Instruction Manual

Manuals Brands Metrohm Manuals Equipment tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab)

tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab)

Online Help

8.101.8016EN

Summary of content (1602 pages)

PAGE 1

tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Online Help 8.101.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3

Metrohm AG CH-9101 Herisau Switzerland Phone +41 71 353 85 85 Fax +41 71 353 89 01 info@metrohm.com www.metrohm.com tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Online Help 8.101.8016EN 09.
PAGE 4

Teachware Metrohm AG CH-9101 Herisau teachware@metrohm.com This documentation is protected by copyright. All rights reserved. Although all the information given in this documentation has been checked with great care, errors cannot be entirely excluded. Should you notice any mistakes please send us your comments using the address given above.
PAGE 5

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents Table of contents 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Welcome to tiamo ................................................................ 1 1.2 Operation ............................................................................ 2 1.3 Connecting devices ............................................................... 3 1.4 Method editor ...................................................................... 4 1.5 Database .................................................
PAGE 6

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 2.4.5 Molar mass calculator ............................................................ 78 2.5 Editing ................................................................................. 79 2.5.1 Select date ............................................................................ 79 2.5.2 Text editor ............................................................................. 79 2.5.3 Hyperlink .................................................................
PAGE 7

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 3.8.3 3.8.4 3.8.5 Live display - Application note ............................................. 168 Live display - Messages ........................................................ 168 Live display - Properties ........................................................ 168 3.9 Subwindow Report ......................................................... 175 3.9.1 Report - General ................................................................. 175 3.9.
PAGE 8

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 Information - Configuration ......................................... 333 Information - Messages ..................................................... 339 Information - Determination comment .............................. 339 4.7 Subwindow Results .......................................................... 340 4.7.1 Results - General .................................................................. 340 4.7.2 Results - Results overview ..........
PAGE 9

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 5.5 Tracks ................................................................................ 402 5.5.1 Tracks - General ................................................................... 402 5.5.2 Track types .......................................................................... 403 5.5.3 Edit tracks ........................................................................... 408 5.6 Commands ......................................................................
PAGE 10

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 6.7 Subwindow Sensors ....................................................... 1277 6.7.1 Sensors - General ............................................................... 1277 6.7.2 Sensor table ...................................................................... 1278 6.7.3 Sensor properties ............................................................... 1282 6.8 Common variables subwindow ..................................... 1301 6.8.
PAGE 11

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 7.5.4 7.5.5 Properties - MSB # ............................................................. 1349 Properties - GLP ................................................................ 1350 7.6 867 pH Module ............................................................... 1352 7.6.1 867 pH Module - Overview ................................................ 1352 7.6.2 Properties - General ........................................................... 1353 7.6.
PAGE 12

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 7.11.8 External position ............................................................... 1392 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler .............................................. 1393 7.12.1 855 Robotic Titrosampler - Overview ................................. 1393 7.12.2 Properties - General ........................................................... 1393 7.12.3 Properties - Measuring inputs ............................................ 1394 7.12.4 Properties - Tower # .
PAGE 13

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 7.18.2 7.18.3 7.18.4 7.18.5 7.18.6 Barcode reader - Overview ................................................. 1434 Properties - General ........................................................... 1434 Properties - Settings ........................................................... 1435 Properties - GLP ................................................................ 1435 Establish a connection to the barcode reader ..................... 1437 7.
PAGE 14

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 Backing up configuration data ........................................... 1517 Restoring configuration data ............................................. 1518 Backing up methods .......................................................... 1519 Archive Audit Trail ............................................................ 1521 9.3 Determinations ............................................................... 1523 9.3.
PAGE 15

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table of contents 9.8 Sample tables ................................................................. 1560 9.8.1 Create sample table .......................................................... 1560 9.8.2 Edit sample table .............................................................. 1561 9.8.3 Loading working sample table .......................................... 1562 9.8.4 Edit working sample table ................................................. 1563 9.9 Reports ................
PAGE 16
PAGE 17

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1 Introduction 1 Introduction 1.1 Welcome to tiamo Introduction tiamo = titration and more tiamo is a control and database software for titrators, dosing devices and sample changers and makes complete laboratory automation possible. It is for that reason that the name tiamo stands for «titration and more» tiamo can do more than just titrate. tiamo is the successor software to TiNet and Workcell. Metrohm thus provides a uniform software product for laboratory automation.
PAGE 18

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.2 Operation ￭￭￭￭￭￭ Database-based program with Client/Server functionality A wide range of import and export functions FDA-compatibility in acc. with 21 CFR Part 11 Comprehensive online help Program versions What is new in tiamo 2.1? Overview of the most important information concerning ProcessLab under tiamo ￭￭￭ 1.
PAGE 19

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.3 1 Introduction Connecting devices Introduction tiamo brings together the world of Titrino devices and the new generation of the Titrando System under the same roof. Compatibility with existing Metrohm devices is not a matter of course in the software sector.
PAGE 20

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.4 Method editor 1.4 Method editor Introduction The new graphic method editor gets more out of your titration system. With the aid of the numerous templates, methods can be created fast and easily. For most routine and automated tasks, there are tried and tested methods available. Just a few clicks and they are adapted and ready to use. One new feature is that actions running parallel in terms of time can now be programmed and linked.
PAGE 21

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1 Introduction in this network and can be accessed and processed by all Client PCs. All clients also access the same pool of methods. The new database has all the major tools necessary for management of, searching for and grouping of results. Quick filters allow the user to search through thousands of determinations within seconds and to display the result clearly. Chart plots give a fast overview of the sequence of results based on time.
PAGE 22

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.7 Conformity ￭￭￭￭￭ 1.7 Various export formats , e.g. XML, CSV, SLK (see Chapter 4.4.4.2.1, page 245). Automatic data export, e.g. to NuGenesis SDMS, Scientific Software CyberLAB, etc. (see Chapter 5.6.8.5.1, page 1126). Report designer (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.1.1, page 202). E-mail functions for status messages, error messages or results (see Chapter 2.6, page 81). Importing external measured values (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859).
PAGE 23

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1 Introduction Digital signature on two levels (see Chapter 2.3, page 17). One signature each for methods and results. Documentation of all methods and changes in results (see Chapter 4.5.2.14, page 322). Traceability thanks to detailed Audit Trail (see Chapter 6.4.1.1, page 1233). ￭￭￭￭ 1.8 Versions Introduction tiamo is available in three sales versions, which differ with regard to the scope of functions. An upgrade is possible at any time. tiamo 2.1 light tiamo 2.
PAGE 24

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.9 Online help 1.9 Online help Introduction Calling up the Help tiamo has an extensive and detailed online help that can be requested in two ways: ￭￭ General request With the menu item Help ▶ tiamo Help, or the symbol the online help with the topic Welcome to tiamo is opened. From there you can jump via Contents, Index, Search or personal Favorites to the desired topic.
PAGE 25

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1 Introduction Warning This symbol draws attention to a possible hazard due to heat or hot instrument parts. Warning This symbol draws attention to a possible biological hazard. Caution This symbol draws attention to a possible risk of damage to instruments or instrument parts. Note This symbol marks additional information and tips. 1.10 What is new in tiamo 2.1? Introduction In this chapter the changes since tiamo 2.0 are described. 1.10.
PAGE 26

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 1.10 What is new in tiamo 2.1? ￭￭￭ Titrino: The window evaluation does not work correctly. 778, 789: Exception if the lift is to be lowered at an invalid rack position. Sartorius balances: Transmit data only when using point as decimal separator. Commands ￭￭￭￭￭￭ DET: Difficulties to correctly transmit the max. increment to the device when changing the type of device (Titrino/Titrando) during the command.
PAGE 27

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions 2 General program functions 2.1 Program parts 2.1.1 Program parts General program functions tiamo™ has five different program parts which can be opened by clicking on the corresponding symbol in the vertical bar on the left. The symbol for the opened program part is shown in color, the symbols for the other program parts in black and white. The menus, symbol bars and content of the main window depend on the program part currently opened.
PAGE 28

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.1 Program parts Manual program part ￭ Manual control of devices Note Access to the individual program parts can be deactivated in the user administration. In this case, the corresponding symbols are hidden. 2.1.2 Workplace - Desktop Program part: Workplace Workplace symbol Clicking on the workplace symbol in the vertical bar on the left opens the program part Workplace while, at the same time, the workplace symbol is shown in color.
PAGE 29

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions shown in color. The upper left corner of the symbol contains a black field displaying the number of databases currently opened (see Chapter 4.2.2, page 189). Elements The desktop of the program part Database comprises the following elements: ￭￭￭ 2.1.4 Database-specific menu bar. Database-specific toolbar. Main window in which up to 6 subwindows can be displayed.
PAGE 30

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.2 Login/password protection Elements The desktop of the program part Configuration comprises the following elements: ￭￭￭ 2.1.6 Configuration-specific menu bar. Configuration specific toolbar. Main window in which up to 6 subwindows can be displayed.
PAGE 31

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions A login with user name and password is required each time the program is started. The password administration is implemented in tiamo. User names must be unique. Users entered once cannot be deleted. Passwords must be unique per user. None of the expired passwords already used once by the user may be reused. Passwords must comprise a minimum number of characters. Passwords must be changed according to a defined validity period.
PAGE 32

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.2 Login/password protection [Change password] Opens the window Change password, in which the new password has to be entered and confirmed. [Cancel] The login is canceled, the program is terminated. 2.2.3 Log out manually Menu item: Workplace / Database / Method / Configuration ▶ File ▶ Logout A logged in user can logout at any time with the menu item File ▶ Logout. The logout options defined in the Security settings apply.
PAGE 33

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Note The password always has to be changed before the Validity of the password expires. For users who are logging in for the first time or users whose status has been reset from inactive or removed back to active, this window is automatically opened after logging in with the Start Password. For Old Password you also need to enter the Start Password specified by the Administrator. Old password Entry of the previous password.
PAGE 34

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.3 Electronic signatures ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.3.2 Different users The same user may only sign on either Level 1 or Level 2. Reason and comment Each signature must be accompanied by a reason selected from predefined default reasons. A further comment can also be entered. Saved data The signature date, user name, full name, reason and comments are saved for each signature. Deleting signatures 1 Signatures at Level 1 are automatically deleted again when compiling a new version.
PAGE 35

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Create Modify Delete Not sigend Sign (1) Modify Signed 1 Delete Delete signatures 2 Sign (2) Modify Sigend 2 Delete 2.3.3 Signature Level 1 Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 or Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method Manager... ▶ Method Manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 1 in the Signature Level 1 window.
PAGE 36

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.3 Electronic signatures Signature possible The selected method or determination can be signed. Signature 1 not possible (signature 2 exists) The selected method or determination can no longer be signed at Level 1 as it has already been signed at Level 2. Signature not possible (accessed by other client) The selected method or determination cannot be signed as it is already marked to be signed on a different client. User Entry of the user name (short name).
PAGE 37

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 2 in the Signature Level 2 window. Note Methods or determinations signed at level 2 are locked, i.e. they can neither be edited nor deleted. In order to be able to edit such methods or determinations again, the signatures on Level 2 must first be deleted. Info Information for signing and deleting signatures is displayed in this box.
PAGE 38

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.3 Electronic signatures [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open. Note Methods or determinations can only be signed at Level 2 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 2.3.5 Delete Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Delete signatures 2... ▶ Delete Signatures Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Delete signatures 2...
PAGE 39

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Note Signatures 2 can only be deleted if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 2.4 Formula editor Dialog window: Formula editor The Formula editor serves as a support when entering formulas for calculating results. It has an automatic Syntax check, which is activated when applying the formula. The general rules of priority apply for the calculation operations.
PAGE 40

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor ￭ time Time indications must always be made with the aid of the Time( ) function. Entry using the function buttons Mathematical operators and parentheses can simply be added to the formula using the corresponding buttons. A space is automatically added before and after the sign. Addition Equal to Logic AND Subtraction Greater than Logic OR Multiplication Less than Round parentheses Division Not equal to Curly parentheses e.g.
PAGE 41

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions -2.38 yields -2.4 -2.45 yields -2.5 Statistics The mean value, absolute and relative standard deviation of results R are calculated using the following formula: Mean value Absolute standard deviation Relative standard deviation (in %) The statistical calculations of the software have been implemented so that they can be checked to as great a degree as possible by the user.
PAGE 42

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor The number of significant digits has now been reduced by three to four digits by omitting the prefix "milli". Note The above losses of accuracy by rounding off in the area of the maximum certain places are only relevant theoretically. Most of the time they are lower by several orders of magnitude than – as an example – the uncertainties resulting from weighing out the sample. 2.4.3 2.4.3.
PAGE 43

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Name Syntax Description Common variables 'CV.Variable name.Variable identification' Common variables are global variables, which are adopted from the table of the program part Configuration at the start of the determination and assigned to the determination. Enter variables Variables must always be entered and ended with an apostrophe ' (e.g. 'MV.myVariable'). Note When using variables, always observe their data type (Number, Text or Date/Time). 2.
PAGE 44

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Variable name Description Data type .OVF Exceeding limits for method variable (Number: 1 = limit exceeded, 0 = limit not exceeded) Number In the following lines you will find the method variables (sample data) present in the default settings which appear in the workplace and which can be edited and deleted in the START command of the corresponding method. 2.4.3.3 Sample size.VAL Value of 'Sample size' Number Sample size.
PAGE 45

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Note In the case of variables with Index {x}, the desired number 1…9 must be entered for x (e.g. .EP{3}.ERC for the third endpoint). If no index is specified, then the last index will be used automatically (e.g. .EP.ERC for the last endpoint). For the commands ANALOG IN, ANALOG OUT, DIGITAL IN, DIGITAL OUT and STEPPING MOTOR, the syntax is 'Commandname.Portname.Variabledesignation'. tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Identification Description Commands .
PAGE 46

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 30 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started All except START and END .C0 Coefficient c0 of the calibration curve CAL Spec .C1 Coefficient c0 of the calibration curve CAL Spec .C2 Coefficient c0 of the calibration curve CAL Spec .C3 Coefficient c0 of the calibration curve CAL Spec .
PAGE 47

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command DET, MET, SET, KFT, STAT, STDADD dos, STDADD auto, ADD, DOS, LQH, PREP, EMPTY .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC, STAT, MEAS, CAL MEAS, STDADD, DOS .DEF Default value which is defined in the configuration for an IO port ANALOG OUT, DIGITAL OUT .
PAGE 48

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 32 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .EP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the endpoint x (1…9) MET .EP.DVT Drift for the endpoint x (1…9) in µg/min KFC, BRC .EP{x}.ERC ERC for the endpoint x (1…9) DET .EP{x}.MEA Measured value for the endpoint x (1…9) in the unit of the measured value DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC .EP{x}.
PAGE 49

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended All except START and END .FP{x}.CNT Intensity for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in counts MEAS Opt .FP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) MET .FP{x}.DVT Drift for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in µg/min KFC, BRC .FP{x}.
PAGE 50

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 34 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .GMA Maximum gas flow rate in mL/min MEAS T/Flow .GMI Minimum gas flow rate in mL/min MEAS T/Flow .GMN Average gas flow rate in mL/min MEAS T/Flow .GP.VOL Volume for Gran endpoint in mL DET, MET .GP.MEA Measured value for the Gran endpoint in the unit of the measured value DET, MET .GP.TEM Temperature for Gran endpoint in °C DET, MET .GP.TIM Time for Gran endpoint in s DET, MET .HP{x}.
PAGE 51

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .LCO Loop counter = current quantity of completed runs, both of Repeat loops and of While loops LOOP, CAL LOOP .LP.CAx Calculated value x (1…3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC, STAT, MEAS (without Ref, Spec, Opt), DOS .LP.CHA Load for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in mA s KFC, BRC .LP.
PAGE 52

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 36 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC, STAT, MEAS (without Ref, Spec), CAL MEAS, DOS .LP.QTY Measured value (water) for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in µg KFC, BRC .LP.
PAGE 53

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value DET, MET, SET, KFT, STAT, MEAS (without Conc, Ref, Spec) .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C DET, MET, SET, KFT, STAT, MEAS (without Conc, Ref, Spec) .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached DET, MET, SET, KFT, STAT, MEAS (without Conc, Ref, Spec) .MA.
PAGE 54

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 38 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .MR.MRC Correlation coefficient for mean dosing rate for the whole range STAT, DOS .MR.MRS Standard deviation for mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min STAT, DOS .MR.MRT Mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min. STAT, DOS .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC, STAT, MEAS (without T/Flow, Ref, Spec), CAL MEAS, STDADD, DOS .
PAGE 55

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .RAN Current, absolute rotation angle of the rack in ° in relation to the axis of the selected tower (entry when ending the command) MOVE .RE{x}.DRC Correlation coefficient for mean dosing rate in window x (1…9) STAT .RE{x}.DRS Standard deviation for mean dosing rate in window x (1…9) in mL/min STAT .RE{x}.DRT Mean dosing rate in window x (1… 9) in mL/min STAT .RE{x}.
PAGE 56

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 40 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description Commands .SPO Current external position (entry when ending the command); 0 means invalid position SWING .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, BRC, STAT .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error DET, MET, SET, KFT, STAT, MEAS, CAL MEAS, STDADD, DOS .
PAGE 57

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 2 General program functions Identification Description Commands .TC.C4 Coefficient of the Chebyshev polynomial of conductivity of the fourth order MEAS Cond, MEAS TC Cond .TC.MIN Minimum temperature coefficient of the conductivity in %/°C MEAS TC Cond .TC.MAX Maximum temperature coefficient of the conductivity in %/°C MEAS TC Cond .TC.TSTART Start temperature in °C MEAS Cond, MEAS TC Cond .TC.
PAGE 58

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.3.4 Result variables Dialog window: Formula Editor ▶ Variables Result variables are method-specific and are defined in the CALC command of the method. The Variables field of the Formula editor lists all Result variables which are available for the current method. Syntax 'RS.Result name.Variable identification' Examples: 'RS.RS01.VAL' (='RS.RS01'), 'RS.testTime.
PAGE 59

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Syntax 'DV.Variable name' Examples: 'DV.DUR', 'DV.STT' You can select the determination variables directly in the formula editor under Variables/Determination variables in order to avoid syntax errors. Available determination variables Variable name Description Data type DUR Duration of the determination in s Number STT Time point at which the determination was started Date/ Time 2.4.3.
PAGE 60

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Variable name Description Data type STC Start counter Number USN Short name of the logged-in user Text ORG Method run: 1 = original determination, 0 = reprocessing Number STO Indication whether the determination has been stopped (manual stop, stop via SEND command, emergency stop) or terminated normally ; 1 = stopped, 0 = terminated normally Number 2.4.3.
PAGE 61

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Overview of the operators and functions Operators Functions Arithmetic: Arithmetic: ￭￭￭￭￭ Addition (+) Subtraction (-) Multiplication (*) Division (/) Potentiation (^) ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Logic: ￭￭ Date/Time: AND OR ￭￭￭ Comparison: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ Exponential function (Exp) Natural logarithm (Ln) Common logarithm (Log) Square root (Sqrt) Absolute value (Abs) Fraction (Frac) Integer (Int) Round integer (Round) Sign (Sign) Quantiles of the St
PAGE 62

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.2 Arithmetical operators 2.4.4.2.1 Addition Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 + Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. Examples Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark both operands of the same type: Number Number Number 1.2 + 3 = 4.
PAGE 63

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.2.2 2 General program functions Subtraction Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 - Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. Examples Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark both operands of the same type: Number Number Number 1.2 - 3 = -1.8 - Text Text Text "Metrohm" - "AG" = invalid This operation is not allowed.
PAGE 64

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Examples Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark Operands of the same type: Number Number Number 1.2 * 3 = 3.6 - Text Text Text "Metrohm" * "AG" = invalid This operation is not allowed. Time Time Number Time(1998;05;06) * Time(1902;02;03) = 27'478'004.
PAGE 65

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Operand1 Operand2 Result 2 General program functions Example Remark Operand of different type: The operand which does not correspond to the result type is converted to the relevant result type before the operation. Number Text Text 1.2 / "Metrohm" = invalid This operation is not allowed. Text Number Text "Metrohm" / 1.2 = invalid This operation is not allowed.
PAGE 66

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark Time Number Number Time(1999;10;7) ^ 2.5 = 253479847878.04 (for UTC+2) - Text Time Text "Metrohm" ^ Time(1999;10;7) = invalid This operation is not allowed. Time Text Text Time(1999;10;7) ^ "Metrohm" = invalid This operation is not allowed. 2.4.4.3 Logical operators 2.4.4.3.
PAGE 67

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark Number Text Number 1.2 AND "1.2" --> 1 Before the operation, the operand of the type Number is converted to the type Text, as a conversion from Text to Number is not advisable. During the second operation, the 0 is therefore converted to "0", which corresponds to the logical value 1 (true), as every character string that is not empty is interpreted as 1.
PAGE 68

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Operand1 Operand2 Result Example Remark Number Number Number 5 OR 4 --> 1 Numbers greater than 1 are automatically interpreted as 1 (true) 4 OR 0 --> 1 Text Text Number "Metrohm" OR "AG" --> 1 "" OR "Metrohm" --> 1 "" OR "" --> 0 Time Time Number Time(1999;10;07) OR Time(1964;02;03) --> 1 An empty character string ("") is interpreted as 0 (false), everything else as 1 (true).
PAGE 69

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 70

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.4.2 Greater than Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 > Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 71

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.4.3 2 General program functions Greater than or equal to Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 >= Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 72

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.4.4 Less than Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 < Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 73

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.4.5 2 General program functions Less than or equal to Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 <= Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as variables and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 74

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.4.6 Not equal to Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax Operand1 <> Operand2 The operands can be entered either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. The result type is always a number (1 = true, 0 = false).
PAGE 75

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.5 2.4.4.5.1 2 General program functions Arithmetical functions Exponential function Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Exp(number) Calculates e ^ number. Other notation for y = e(number), whereby e is the Euler number (e = 2.71828…). Parameters Number Exponent The parameter can be indicated either directly as a number or as a variable of the type Number.
PAGE 76

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.5.3 Common logarithm Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Log(number) Gives the logarithm of the entered number for base 10. Alternative notation for y = log10(number). Parameters Number > 0 The parameter can be indicated either directly as a number or as a variable of the type Number. If the parameter does not correspond to the expected type, it will automatically be converted to this.
PAGE 77

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.5.5 2 General program functions Absolute value Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Abs(number) Gives the absolute value of the entered number, i.e. the value of the number irrespective of its sign. Parameters Number The parameter can be indicated either directly as a number or as a variable of the type Number. If the parameter does not correspond to the expected type, it will automatically be converted to this.
PAGE 78

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.5.7 Integer Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Int(number) Gives the integer of the entered number. Parameters Number The parameter can be indicated either directly as a number or as a variable of the type Number. If the parameter does not correspond to the expected type, it will automatically be converted to this. If this is not possible, the result of this operation is given as invalid. Examples Int(-55.325) = -55 Int('CV.
PAGE 79

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.5.9 2 General program functions Sign Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Sign(number) Gives the sign of the entered number: 1 for a positive number, -1 for a negative number. Parameters Number The parameter can be indicated either directly as a number or as a variable of the type Number. If the parameter does not correspond to the expected type, it will automatically be converted to this.
PAGE 80

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Type number, value range: 1 ... n. Direct entry as number or as formula providing a number. If the type of value is non-permitted, then the result will become invalid. The number of independent samplings for calculating the standard deviation, reduced by the number of adjusted parameters for the model to which the standard deviation refers, must be specified as degrees of freedom (Degrees of freedom = Number of samplings − Number of parameters). Examples Tinv(0.
PAGE 81

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Note UTC = Universal Time , from which the times in the various time zones of the earth are derived. CET (Central European Time) is equal to UTC plus 1 hour, in the summer time UTC plus 2 hours. 2.4.4.6.2 Time(Date) Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = Time(year; month; day) Gives the entered figures in the format Date/Time.
PAGE 82

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Note UTC = Universal Time , from which the times in the various time zones of the earth are derived. CET (Central European Time) is equal to UTC plus 1 hour, in the summer time UTC plus 2 hours. Examples Time(2004;02;02) = 2004-02-02 00:00:00 UTC +1 (dependent on the system time) Time('CV.Test year';'CV.Test month';'CV.Test day') = Date comprised of the common variables 2.4.4.6.
PAGE 83

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Note Only the integral part is used for all parameters. A variable of the type Date/Time cannot be transferred as a parameter here. Both for the automatic and explicit conversion of a Time to the type Number, the number of days are counted since December 30, 1899 at 01 hours. Attention: December 30, 1899 01 hour = 0.
PAGE 84

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Examples NumberToText(-55.3) = -55.3 NumberToText('CV.AverageTemp') = Vale of the common variable (AverageTemp) als Text 2.4.4.7.2 NumberToTime Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = NumberToTime(number) Gives the entered number as Date/Time, whereby the number is interpreted as the number of days since December 30, 1899 at 01 hours.
PAGE 85

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions TextToNumber('CV.DurchschnTemp') = Value of the variables (AverageTemp) as Number TextToNumber('MV.ID1') = entered text of ID 1 as Number 2.4.4.7.4 TextToTime Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = TextToTime(Text;Format) Gives the entered text as a Date/Time. Parameters Text The parameter may only contain numerical characters or variables of the type Text, as otherwise a type conversion is not possible (Result = invalid).
PAGE 86

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Examples TextToTime("2004-12-3 5:22:01 PM";"yMdhmsa") = 2004-12-03 17:22:01 UTC+1 (dependent on the system time) TextToTime("12-15-01 2001:3:5";"HmsyMd") = 2001-03-05 12:15:01 UTC+1 (dependent on the system time) TextToTime('CV.TestDate';'CV.TestFormat') = Values of the common variables in the time format indicated TextToTime('MV.ID1';'CV.TestFormat') = entered text of ID1 in the time format indicated 2.4.4.7.
PAGE 87

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.7.6 2 General program functions TimeToText Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = TimeToText(Time) Gives the time entered as Text. y = TimeToText(Time;Format) Gives the time entered as Text in the required format. Parameters Time This parameter can be indicated either in the form of a time function or as a variable of the type Date/Time. Format Indicates in which format or order the time is to be output as text.
PAGE 88

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor Characters Significance Example E Weekday short form Mon, Tue, Wed EEEE Weekday Monday, Tuesday D one, two or three-digit number of the day in the year 2, 35, 142 DD two or three-digit number of the day in the year 02, 35, 142 DDD three-digit number of the day in the year 002, 035, 142 F one-digit number of the weekday in the month, e.g.
PAGE 89

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4.4.8 2.4.4.8.1 2 General program functions Text functions TextPosition Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = TextPosition(Text ; sample text) Gives the Index which indicates at which point the sample text appears for the first time in the Text. The numbering of the index begins at 1! Parameters Text The parameter can be indicated either directly or as a variable of the type Text, Number or Date/Time.
PAGE 90

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor 2.4.4.8.2 SubText Dialog window: Formula editor ▶ Operators/Functions Syntax y = SubText(Text ; Position ; Length) Gives that part of the text from Text which begins at the index Position and which has the length Length. Parameters Text The parameter can be indicated either directly as text or as a variable of the type Text. If the parameter does not correspond to the expected type, it will automatically be converted to this.
PAGE 91

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Parameters Text The parameter can be indicated either directly or as a variable of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. Sample text The parameter can be indicated either directly or as a variable of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. If the types of the two parameters do not coincide, the type is converted from Sample text to the type Text. Note Entries of the type Number are always provided with a decimal place.
PAGE 92

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor the type Text, Number or Date/Time. Entire operations can also be transferred here. Value_false If condition = 0, this parameter is saved as a result of the function. This parameter can be transferred either directly or as a variable and can be of the type Text, Number or Date/Time. Entire operations can also be transferred here. Value_error If condition = invalid, this parameter is saved as a result of the function.
PAGE 93

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Examples Error('RS.IntermediateRes') = 0: the intermediate result was able to be calculated. Error('RS.ZwischenRes') = 1: the intermediate result is invalid. Error('DET pH 6.EP{1}.MEA') = 0: the variable for the measured value exists at endpoint 1, Error('DET pH 6.EP{1}.MEA') = 1: no variable for the measured value or no EP exists. 2.4.4.
PAGE 94

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.4 Formula editor ASCII value Characters ASCII value (dec) 2.4.
PAGE 95

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2 General program functions Examples Molecular formula Molar mass H2SO4 98.0734 Ca(OH)2 74.09268 AlCl3*6H2O 238.43174 2.5 Editing 2.5.1 Select date Dialog window: Select date The dialog window Select date serves for entering a date in a field and is opened with the button . Selects the month Selects the year Selects the day Selected date 2.5.
PAGE 96

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.5 Editing Copy selected text to the clipboard. Paste text from the clipboard. Open editor for entering a hyperlink (see Chapter 2.5.3, page 81). Open formula editor for entering calculation formulas .(see Chapter 2.4, page 23) Note In order for results of formulas of the type Date to be output correctly, they must be converted for text windows with the function TimeToText(see Chapter 2.4.4.7.6, page 71) to Text. Font size in pt. Select font color. Bold. Italic. Underlined.
PAGE 97

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 2.5.3 2 General program functions Hyperlink Dialog window: Hyperlink The dialog window Hyperlink serves for entering a hyperlink in a field and is opened with the button . Displayed text Designation of the hyperlink that is displayed. Link target Address of the link target to which the hyperlink refers (Web site, E-mail address, file,...). The button opens a selection dialog in order to link a file as a link target. 2.6 E-mail 2.6.
PAGE 98

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.1 Workplace - General 3 Workplace 3.1 Workplace - General 3.1.1 Workplace - Definition Program part: Workplace Workplace is defined in tiamo as the program part in which up to 4 workplaces can be opened next to one another for the simultaneous, independent running of determinations. 3.1.
PAGE 99

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.1.3.2 3 Workplace Tools Manual control, run test, sample tables, sample assignment tables, text templates. Help Open Help, show program info. Workplace - Menu File Program part: Workplace Workplace ▶ New… Opens new workplace (see Chapter 3.2.1, page 90). Properties… Edits properties of the selected workplace (see Chapter 3.2.2, page 90). Close Closes the selected workplace (see Chapter 3.2.4, page 92).
PAGE 100

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.1 Workplace - General Properties Run window Sets properties for the tab Single determination or Determination series in the subwindow Run. Properties live display 1 Sets properties for the subwindow Live display 1 (see Chapter 3.8.5, page 168). Properties live display 2 Sets properties for the subwindow Live display 2 (see Chapter 3.8.5, page 168). Switches toolbar display on/off. Toolbar 3.1.3.
PAGE 101

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Change layout Changes layout of the loaded workplace view (see Chapter 3.1.7.2, page 88). Load view Loads a saved workplace view (see Chapter 3.1.7.3, page 89). Save view Saves the current workplace view (see Chapter 3.1.7.4, page 89). Run test Carries out run test for determination(s) (see Chapter 3.6.2, page 117). Split vertically Splits workplace window vertically and display two workplaces side by side (see Chapter 3.2.3.3, page 92).
PAGE 102

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.1 Workplace - General The original view of all subwindows is restored when the in the maximized subwindow again. 3.1.
PAGE 103

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Subwindow Method ￭￭￭ Zoom Modify parameters live Interrupt commands Subwindow Report ￭ Select a report Tools ￭￭￭ 3.1.7 3.1.7.1 Perform run test Edit sample assignment table Define text templates Views Views - General Program part: Workplace / Database / Configuration Definition The term View defines the contents and design of the main window in the program parts Workplace, Database and Configuration.
PAGE 104

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.1 Workplace - General Automatic load The standard procedure is that the view saved when the program is terminated will be loaded automatically the next time that the program is opened. As an alternative a standard view can be defined for each user group that is loaded automatically the first time that the program part is opened.
PAGE 105

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Move the selected subwindow upward (modifies sequence). Move the selected subwindow downward (modifies sequence). 3.1.7.3 Load view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Load view… ▶ Load view With the symbol or the menu item View ▶ Load view... the dialog window Load view is opened. Name Name of the view that should be loaded. [Rename] Rename the selected view. [Delete] Delete the selected view. [Load] Load the selected view. 3.1.7.
PAGE 106

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.2 Workplaces 3.1.7.5 Rename view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Rename view… ▶ Rename view To be able to rename a view, either open the dialog window Load View or Save View and press the [Rename] button. The Rename View window is opened. Rename view to Enter a new name for the view. Input 3.1.7.
PAGE 107

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Name Entry of a name for the selected workplace or selection from the list of the 10 names most recently used. 50 characters Input Color Selection of the color for the title bar of the subwindow and the status symbol for the selected workplace in the status bar green | blue | ochre | brown green Selection Default value 3.2.3 3.2.3.
PAGE 108

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables 3.2.3.2 Displaying single workplaces Menu item: Workplace ▶ View ▶ Unsplit In the default settings, the most recently opened workplace is displayed alone in the main window. If the display of two windows is enabled, then the symbol or the menu item View ▶ Unsplit can be used to switch back to the display of just one single workplace. 3.2.3.
PAGE 109

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Name Name of the sample table. Saved Date and time when the sample table was saved. Saved by Short name of the user who saved the sample table. Lines Number of lines in the sample table. Comment Comment on the sample table that was entered on the tab Comment as comment concerning the sample table (see Chapter 3.3.2.6, page 110). Opening the sample table Name Name of the sample table that is to be opened.
PAGE 110

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Increment Automatically increments selected lines. Filling Automatically fills selected lines. Test sample table Checks whether or not all sample data in the sample table is correct. Sample data table This table contains sample data lines that have already been saved in the sample data table and a line for entering new data that contains a star instead of a line number. The table cannot be edited or sorted directly.
PAGE 111

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Unmark lines Removes the line marking for the selected lines. Set lines inexecutable Sets the selected lines to "inexecutable", i.e. these lines will not be carried out in the method run. Such lines are crossed through with a red line. Set lines executable Sets the selected lines to "executable", i.e. they will be carried out in the run. [Sample table] contains the following menu items: Save Saves the current sample table under the same name.
PAGE 112

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Note If a method is changed and saved in the method editor or during reprocessing, then the latest method version will be loaded when the program is restarted. Note The following sample data fields can no longer be edited if they were defined as Fixed value in the method (see Chapter 5.6.2.2.5, page 418). Sample position Position of the sample on the rack. This number is used to move to the sample position with the command MOVE.
PAGE 113

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Note If a value is entered or imported into this field, then in addition the time of the data entry and the data source are stored manually, while the 'Name of the balance', the 'Name of the barcode reader' or the 'Name of the import file) are stored automatically at the same time, placed in the determination and identified in the Information subwindow as Entry date and Data source. Note If a negative value is entered in this field (e. g.
PAGE 114

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Jump to the next line in the sample table. If the end of the table has been reached, then a new line will be inserted automatically and the program will jump to it. The same function can also be triggered by pressing the [Enter] key. Jump to the last line in the sample table. Jump to a new, empty line.
PAGE 115

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3.1.6 3 Workplace Importing sample data Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Sample table / Determination series ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Import data… ▶ Select files to import Select a *.csv file in this dialog window with the sample data to be imported. File name Input or selection of the file that is to be imported. File name Selection File type Selection of the import format for the import of data from a file (only *.csv is possible). Selection Default value *.csv | *.csv (Unicode) *.
PAGE 116

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables File type Prescribed format *.csv. Selection Default value [*.csv] [*.csv] [Save] The sample data will be written to the export file. 3.3.1.8 Sample table test Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Sample table / Determination series ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Sample table test... ▶ Sample table test -Sample table name The menu item [Sample table] ▶ Sample table test... or the symbol is used to perform the sample table test.
PAGE 117

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Sample table test finished with errors This display appears if an error has occurred during the sample table test. The errors that occured are listed in the Test report field. Test report Display of errors that occurred during the sample table test, together with line numbers. 3.3.1.
PAGE 118

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables [Save] Save the sample table under the desired name. 3.3.1.10 Print sample table (PDF) Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Sample table / Determination series ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Print (PDF)… ▶ Print sample table (PDF) The output format for the PDF output can be selected in this dialog window. Orientation Selection Default value Portrait | Landscape Portrait Portrait Output in portrait format. Landscape Output in landscape format. 3.3.2 3.3.2.
PAGE 119

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Operating elements Note This parameter group is visible only if the dialog window above the tab Determination series is open. [Pause]/[Cont] on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the operating buttons [Pause] or [Cont]. [Hold]/[Cont] on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the operating buttons [Hold] or [Cont].
PAGE 120

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Sample data Note The names defined here will be used only for the column headings in the sample table. The names defined in the START command under Method variables will always be used when editing a sample line and for the determination data. Sample position on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the column Sample position in the sample table. The option also exists of renaming the heading of this column in the working sample table.
PAGE 121

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Input Default value 50 characters Sample size Unit on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the column Sample size unit in the sample table. The option also exists of renaming the heading of this column in the working sample table. Input Default value 3.3.2.
PAGE 122

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Copy automatically into next line Method on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the content of this field will automatically be filled with the content of the previous line when a new sample data line is created. ID1 … ID3 on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the content of this field will automatically be filled with the content of the previous line when a new sample data line is created.
PAGE 123

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3.2.4 3 Workplace Properties - Process Dialog window:Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Sample table ▶ New… ▶ Sample table 'Name' ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Properties… ▶ Properties Sample table 'Name' Dialog window:Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Determination series ▶ Properties Run window ▶ Properties - Determination series Options for processing the working sample table in the Workplace window in the tab Determination series.
PAGE 124

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Stop series ([Stop]) If this option is selected, then the series is stopped before the start of the marked line (equivalent to [Stop]). Start the Text editor with which the message can be entered and edited. 3.3.2.
PAGE 125

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Always accept data If this option is selected, then the data sent from the balance is imported into the open sample table for which this balance is defined as data source. Accept data only for active window If this option is selected, then the data sent from the balance is only imported into the open sample table if this is actively selected (i.e. when the window has the focus). Confirmation necessary to accept data during determination.
PAGE 126

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Import from file on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then external data from a file(e.g. via LIMS) will be imported into a sample table.
PAGE 127

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Entering a comment on the sample table. Comment on sample table Entering a comment on the sample table. This comment will be displayed in the column of the same name in the dialog windows Open sample table and Sample table manager. Input 3.3.3 1000 characters Sample table manager 3.3.3.
PAGE 128

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3 Sample tables Copy Copies the selected sample table(s) (see Chapter 3.3.3.3, page 112). Delete… Deletes the selected sample table(s) (see Chapter 3.3.3.4, page 112). Export… Exporting selected sample table(s) in the file format *.mstab (see Chapter 3.3.3.5, page 112). Import… Importing sample table(s) from *.mstab file(s) (see Chapter 3.3.3.6, page 113). 3.3.3.
PAGE 129

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.3.3.6 3 Workplace Importing sample table Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Sample table ▶ Manager… ▶ [Edit] ▶ Import ▶ Select files for import The dialog window Select files for import, in which the sample table (file format *.mstab) to be imported needs to be selected, is opened by means of the menu item [Edit] ▶ Import…. 3.3.3.7 Renaming imported sample tables Rename imported sample table 'Name' to Entry of the new name for the sample table.
PAGE 130

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.4 Sample assignment table Method, the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence. Assignment ID Identification on the basis of which the method is assigned. Method Method which is loaded for the Assignment ID. [New] Add new sample assignment. [Properties] Edit selected sample assignment. [Delete] Delete selected sample assignment. 3.4.
PAGE 131

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Open the dialog window Open method for the extended method selection. If a method is selected in this window from a method group other than the current one, then this group will henceforth be the current method group for the quick selection of methods in the Method field. This button is active only if more than one method group is present. 3.4.
PAGE 132

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run [New] Add new text template (see Chapter 3.5.2, page 116). [Properties] Edit selected text template (see Chapter 3.5.2, page 116). [Delete] Delete the selected text template. 3.5.2 Edit text template Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Text templates... ▶ Text templates ▶ [New] / [Properties] ▶ Text templates The text templates can be edited in the dialog window Text templates. Text Text template entry. 100 characters Input 3.6 Subwindow Run 3.6.
PAGE 133

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6.2 3 Workplace Run test Menu item: Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Run test Note In contrast to the Sample table test, which is only used to check whether or not all sample data is correct, the Run test also checks the required hardware. Single determination The menu item Tools ▶ Run test or the symbol is used to perform the start test for the selected method. The precondition for this is that the workplace is in READY status.
PAGE 134

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Run test error This display appears if an error has occurred during the run test. During a determination series, the user can determine, on the basis of the line number displayed, the line to which the the error message belongs that appeared at the time of the error and that is currently displayed in the usual message window. Run test finished without errors This display appears at the end of a run test that has been completed without errors. 3.6.3 3.6.3.
PAGE 135

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace The button is present in the status BUSY (determination is running), COND READY (condition requirement fulfilled) and COND BUSY (conditioning is running), e.g. when conditioning has been started. Interrupt run The button is enabled (dark gray) in the status BUSY (determination is running), COND READY (condition requirement fulfilled) and COND BUSY (conditioning is running). The button is disabled (light gray) in all other cases.
PAGE 136

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ERROR Error. 3.6.3.4 Single determination - Determination parameters Subwindow: Run ▶ Sequence ▶ Single determination User If the option User name required is enabled in the security settings, then the abbreviation of the currently registered user will be displayed in this field. This field is then not available for editing. If work is done without registering, then a user name can be entered in this field (only in the status READY).
PAGE 137

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace menu item Delete statistics, whereby the already calculated statistics data is deleted at the same time. The second field after Statistics shows the number of determinations still to be carried out for the statistics (Setpoint counter). In its default settings, it contains the value Number of single determinations defined in the START command. This field cannot be edited except in the status READY and COND BUSY.
PAGE 138

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Sample position Position of the sample on the rack. This number is used to move to the sample position with the command MOVE. For this to be achieved, the Sample position option must be set under Target for the Move parameter. Range Default value 1 ... 999 (Increment: 1) 'empty' ID1…ID16 Sample identifications ID1…ID16. Any text may be entered into this field, the checking for type and limit values does not take place until the start of the determination.
PAGE 139

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Sample size unit Sample size unit (initial weight). There are no restrictions on the text to be entered in this field. Input Selection Default value 16 characters g | mg | µg | mL | µL | pcs g Note Sample position, ID1…ID16, Sample size and Sample size unit can be modified live for a determination while it is running (see Chapter 3.6.3.7, page 123). Generally speaking, no formula input is possible in these fields.
PAGE 140

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Sample position Position of the sample on the rack. This number is used to move to the sample position with the command MOVE. For this to be achieved, the Sample position option must be set under Target for the Move parameter. Range Default value 1 ... 999 (Increment: 1) 'empty' ID1…ID16 Sample identifications ID1…ID16. Any text may be entered into this field, the checking for type and limit values does not take place until the start of the determination.
PAGE 141

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Sample size unit Sample size unit (initial weight). There are no restrictions on the text to be entered in this field. Input Selection Default value 16 characters g | mg | µg | mL | µL | pcs g Note Generally speaking, no formula input is possible in these fields. If the option Comment on modification of sample data (live) is enabled in the security settings, then a reason and a comment on the modification must be entered before saving (see Chapter 6.2.2.4, page 1207).
PAGE 142

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ￭￭￭ Check device (modules) and rack Check whether the instruments (and/or instrument types), device modules (e.g. measuring input, tower, etc.) and racks required in the instrument-specific commands are present and available and/or assigned. If the instrument in a command is not yet assigned, then the device assignment dialog window will open for the assignment of the instrument.
PAGE 143

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Check sample data Check whether the sample data entered corresponds to the defined method variables and is valid. Assign determination ID A unique determination ID is assigned for the determination. Reserve devices (modules) The devices and/or their function units used by the device-dependent commands in the method are reserved for the duration of the determination, i.e. they can neither be used in other workplaces nor can they be operated manually.
PAGE 144

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run 7 - Conditioning (only for methods with conditioning) Conditioning is started with the loaded method in the case of methods which contain commands with switched-on conditioning. The requirement for this is that the Automatic conditioning option is switched on in the START command. The conditioning starts immediately after the end of the track which contains the command with conditions. ￭￭ 3.6.3.9 3.6.3.9.
PAGE 145

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6.3.9.2 3 Workplace Properties - Display Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Single determination ▶ Properties Run window ▶ Properties - Single determination Definition of the operating elements and columns that are to be displayed on the tab Single determination.. Operating elements [Hold]/[Cont] on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the operating buttons [Hold] or [Cont].
PAGE 146

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run 2 columns If this option is selected, then the sample identifications ID1…ID16 are shown in double columns. 3.6.3.9.3 Properties - Edit Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Single determination ▶ Properties Run window ▶ Properties - Single determination Definition of the sample data which is to be applied automatically for the next single determination.
PAGE 147

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Request assignment ID on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the Assignment ID will be queried immediately after the start of the determination. Autorepeat determination on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the next determination will be started with the same method automatically after the completion of a determination. The determination must be canceled with [Stop] in order to cancel the automatic repetition. 3.6.3.9.
PAGE 148

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Selection Default value Always accept data | Accept data only for active window Always accept data Always accept data If this option is selected, then the data sent from the balance is imported into all of the Single determination tabs of the open workplaces for which this balance is defined as data source.
PAGE 149

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Confirmation necessary to accept data during the determination. on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on, then data will not be imported during a determination except when the Data input dialog of a REQUEST command is open. 3.6.3.
PAGE 150

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ￭￭ 3.6.4.2 Sample data Entry of sample data for the next determinations. Properties Definition of the properties for the tab Determination series. Determination series - Operating elements Tab: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Determination series The following operating elements are located on the tab Determination series: Start series (abbreviation: Ctrl G) Start of the first determination of a sample series.
PAGE 151

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Interrupt series With this button, the ongoing determination of a sample series will still be carried out to completion, but no new determination will be started. The button is present in the status BUSY (determination is running). The button is disabled (light gray) in all other cases. When [Pause] is pressed, this button will be replaced in the display by [Cont]. Continue series Start of the next determination of an interrupted sample series.
PAGE 152

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ERROR Error. 3.6.4.4 Determination series - Determination parameters Tab: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Determination series User If the option User name required is enabled in the security settings, then the abbreviation of the currently registered user will be displayed in this field (see Chapter 6.2.2.2, page 1202). This field is then not available for editing. If work is done without registering, then a user name can be entered in this field (only in the status READY).
PAGE 153

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace The second field after Autostart shows the total number of determinations per series that are still to be carried out (Setpoint counter). It contains in its default settings the entry Sample table, which refers to the number of lines of the working sample table. This field cannot be edited except when it is in the status READY. Note The second field after Autostart can also be modified live for a series that is currently running.
PAGE 154

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run 3.6.4.5 Determination series - Sample data Tab: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Determination series The current working sample table, which contains the sample data for determination series in tabular form, is displayed under Sample data. Each line corresponds to a single determination. This table contains sample data lines that have already been saved in the sample data table and a line for entering new data that contains a star instead of a line number.
PAGE 155

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Reset sample table Resets lines that have been run, i.e. they can be edited again. Duplicate Duplicates selected line(s). The new lines are inserted underneath the selected range. Increment Automatically increments selected lines. Filling Automatically fills selected lines. Test sample table Checks whether or not all sample data in the sample table is correct. Window menus [Edit] contains the following menu items: Edit line Edits selected line.
PAGE 156

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Unmark lines Removes the line marking for the selected lines. Set lines inexecutable Sets the selected lines to "inexecutable", i.e. these lines will not be carried out in the method run. Such lines are crossed through with a red line. Set lines executable Sets the selected lines to "executable", i.e. they will be carried out in the run. [Sample table] contains the following menu items: New Loads new empty sample table.
PAGE 157

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Remarks Freely definable remarks concerning the determination, that are saved together with the determination. Prepared sample texts can also be selected instead of making manual entries (see Chapter 3.5.1, page 115). Input 3.6.4.7 100 characters Modifying autostart counter The dialog window Live modifications, in which the autostart counter can be modified live in a determination while it is running, opens with the context-sensitive menu item Modify autostart counter.
PAGE 158

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ￭￭￭￭￭￭ Authorization for carrying out the method? Check whether the registered user is authorized to carry out the method required (see Chapter 5.4.2.3, page 401). Method executable? Check whether the required method is executable. For methods which are not executable, a prompt appears to perform the method check and to modify the method accordingly (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 385).
PAGE 159

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Conditioning condition fulfilled If the conditioning requirement has been fulfilled, then the status will switch to COND READY. The method is then started automatically afterwards. 5 - Method start The following checks and actions are triggered with method start: ￭￭￭￭ Assign determination ID A unique determination ID is assigned for the determination.
PAGE 160

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run ￭￭￭￭￭ Interrupt and continue series A series that is running can be interrupted at any time with [Pause]. When this is done, the ongoing determination of the sample series will still be carried out to completion, but no new determination will be started. The next determination of the interrupted sample series us started with [Cont]. Cancel run A determination that is running can be canceled at any time with [Stop].
PAGE 161

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace ￭ 3.6.4.9 3.6.4.9.1 Conditioning condition fulfilled If the conditioning requirement has been fulfilled, then the status will switch to COND READY. A new determination can be started in this status with [Start]. Conditioning can also be canceled with [Stop] or interrupted with [Hold] and resumed with [Cont]. As long as the determination has not yet been started, the conditioning requirement will continue to be monitored on a continuous basis.
PAGE 162

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Loading sample table Name Name of the sample table that is to be loaded. If a sample table from the table is selected, the name will be entered automatically in this field. It can however also be entered manually. 50 characters Input [Load] Loads the data of the selected sample table into the working sample table.
PAGE 163

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace for the quick selection of methods in the Method field. This button is active only if more than one method group is present. Note If a method is changed and saved in the method editor or during reprocessing, then the latest method version will be loaded when the program is restarted. Note The following sample data fields can no longer be edited if they were defined as Fixed value in the method (see Chapter 5.6.2.2.5, page 418).
PAGE 164

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Note If a value is entered or imported into this field, then in addition the time of the data entry and the data source are stored manually, while the 'Name of the balance', the 'Name of the barcode reader' or the 'Name of the import file) are stored automatically at the same time, placed in the determination and identified in the Information subwindow as Entry date and Data source. Note If a negative value is entered in this field (e. g.
PAGE 165

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Jump to the previous line in the working sample table. Option of entering the desired line number to which the program jumps when the [Enter] is actuated. Jump to the next line in the working sample table. If the end of the table has been reached, then a new line will be inserted automatically and the program will jump to it. Jump to the last line in the working sample table. Jump to a new, empty line.
PAGE 166

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Range Default value 3.6.4.9.5 1 ... 999 1 Importing sample data Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Sample table / Determination series ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Import data… ▶ Select files to import Select a *.csv file in this dialog window with the sample data to be imported. File name Input or selection of the file that is to be imported. File name Selection File type Selection of the import format for the import of data from a file (only *.csv is possible).
PAGE 167

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace File type Prescribed format *.csv. Selection Default value [*.csv] [*.csv] [Save] The sample data will be written to the export file. 3.6.4.9.7 Sample table test Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Sample table / Determination series ▶ [Sample table] ▶ Sample table test... ▶ Sample table test -Sample table name The menu item [Sample table] ▶ Sample table test... or the symbol is used to perform the sample table test.
PAGE 168

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Sample table test finished with errors This display appears if an error has occurred during the sample table test. The errors that occured are listed in the Test report field. Test report Display of errors that occurred during the sample table test, together with line numbers. 3.6.4.9.
PAGE 169

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace [Save] Save the sample table under the desired name. 3.6.4.9.9 Run test Menu item: Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Run test Note In contrast to the Sample table test, which is only used to check whether or not all sample data is correct, the Run test also checks the required hardware. Single determination The menu item Tools ▶ Run test or the symbol is used to perform the start test for the selected method. The precondition for this is that the workplace is in READY status.
PAGE 170

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Run test running… This display appears during the test run. A progress bar also appears; the test can be interrupted thereby by means of the [x] next to the bar. Run test error This display appears if an error has occurred during the run test.
PAGE 171

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace ￭￭￭ 3.6.4.10.2 Process Options for processing the working sample table on the tab Determination series. Data import Enabling/disabling the import of external data for working sample table fields. Comment Entry of comment on the working sample table.
PAGE 172

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Sample number on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the field Sample number. User on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the field User. Remarks on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the field Remarks. Statistics on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the statistics fields. Sample data Note The names defined here will be used only for the column headings in the sample table.
PAGE 173

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Input Default value 50 characters ID1…3 ID4 … ID16 on | off (Default value: off) Enable/disable the display of the column ID4 … ID16 in the sample table. The option also exists of renaming the heading of this column in the working sample table. Input Default value 50 characters ID4…16 Sample size on | off (Default value: on) Enable/disable the display of the column Sample size in the sample table.
PAGE 174

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run into the same line. This means that it is possible, for example, to fill a line first with sample identifications per barcode reader and then later to apply the sample size from a balance for the same line.
PAGE 175

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Sample size unit on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the content of this field will automatically be filled with the content of the previous line when a new sample data line is created. Sample position + 1 on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the content of this field will automatically be incremented by +1 when a new sample data line is created. 3.6.4.10.
PAGE 176

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Actions for marked sample table lines Selection Default value Pause series ([Pause]) and show message | Stop series ([Stop]) Pause series ([Pause]) and show message Pause series ([Pause]) and show message If this option is selected, then the series is interrupted before the start of the marked line (equivalent to [Pause]). At the same time a message will appear which also contains the text defined in the message box.
PAGE 177

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Balance Selection of the balance from which data is to be imported. Selection Device name Selection Always accept data | Accept data only for active window Always accept data Default value Always accept data If this option is selected, then the data sent from the balance is imported into the open sample table for which this balance is defined as data source.
PAGE 178

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.6 Subwindow Run Accept data only for active window If this option is selected, then the data sent from the barcode reader is only imported into the open sample table if this is actively selected (i.e. when the window has the focus). Confirmation necessary to accept data during determination. on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on, then data will not be imported during a determination except when the Data input dialog of a REQUEST command is open.
PAGE 179

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace *.csv (Unicode) Format for the import of CSV files with Unicode character sets. 3.6.4.10.6 Properties - Comment Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Tools ▶ Sample table ▶ New… ▶ Sample table ▶ Properties… ▶ Properties - Sample table 'Name' Dialog window: Workplace ▶ Run ▶ Determination series ▶ Properties Run window ▶ Properties - Determination series Entering a comment on the sample table. Comment on sample table Entering a comment on the sample table.
PAGE 180

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.7 Subwindow Method 3.7 Subwindow Method 3.7.1 Method window - General Subwindow: Workplace ▶ Method Subwindow Method The Method subwindow displays the method with its tracks and commands that is loaded in the Run window on the Single determination or Determination series tab, whereby the display is identical with that in the method program part. The subwindow can be switched on in the Workplace program part during the definition of the Layout and thus made visible.
PAGE 181

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Selection Default value 3.7.3 Fit in window Fit in window Adjust to both height and width of the window. Method window - Live modifications Subwindow: Workplace ▶ Method Double-clicking on a command in the method window or in the contextsensitive menu item Properties will open the properties window of the relevant command in which all of the parameters are shown, but in which only the specified live parameters can be edited.
PAGE 182

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.8 Subwindow Live display 3.7.4 Method window - Cancel command Subwindow: Workplace ▶ Method If a workplace is in BUSY status, then the context-sensitive menu item Cancel can be used to stop the running of an active command immediately and to jump directly to the next command. This applies only to commands with live display. This cancellation is documented in the determination (under Messages) and in the Audit Trail.
PAGE 183

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace On these tabs the live display elements (curve, measured value, message) defined in the Properties are displayed for the currently active command. The tabs have to be switched manually, i.e. there is no automatic switching when calling another track. This makes it possible to display two simultaneously active tracks next to another in two live windows. At the start of the determination the content of the track tabs is deleted.
PAGE 184

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.8 Subwindow Live display 3.8.3 Live display - Application note Subwindow: Workplace ▶ Live display On the tab Application note the application note of the method loaded and which is defined in the START command is displayed. This tab is opened by default in the subwindow Live display when loading the method. 3.8.
PAGE 185

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Measured value 1…3 Select the measured values for the measured value display. The measured quantities and the default value depend on the Command type selected. DET Selection Default value MET Selection Default value SET Selection Default value KFT Selection Default value KFC / BRC Selection Default value STAT Selection Default value MEAS Selection Default value MEAS T/Flow Selection Default value tiamo 2.
PAGE 186

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.8 Subwindow Live display MEAS TC Cond Selection Default value MEAS Opt Selection Default value DOS Selection Default value off | Measured value | time | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 off off | Measured value | time | Intensity | Transmission | Saturated pixels off off | Measured value | time | Temperature | Volume | dV/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 187

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ KFC / BRC Selection Default value STAT Selection Default value MEAS Selection Default value MEAS T/Flow Selection Default value MEAS TC Cond Selection Default value MEAS Opt Selection Default value DOS Selection Default value 3 Workplace time | Measured value | amount | drift | Charge | dV/dt | Ugen | Igen | Calculated 1…3 | External 1…3 time time | Measured value | Temperature | Volume | dV/dt | Calculated 1…3 | External 1…3 time time | Measured value | Temperature | dMW/ dt |
PAGE 188

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.
PAGE 189

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ DOS Selection Default value 3 Workplace Volume | Measured value | Temperature | time | dV/dt | Calculated 1…3 | External 1…3 Volume Color Selection of the curve color for the quantity to be shown on the y1 axis. Selection Default value Color selection | blue blue y2 axis Selection of the quantity to be shown on the y2 axis (right y axis).
PAGE 190

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.
PAGE 191

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3 Workplace Display grid on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, a grid will be displayed Background Selection of the color for the curve background. Selection Default value 3.9 Subwindow Report 3.9.1 Report - General Color selection | white white Subwindow: Workplace ▶ Report Subwindow Report The reports of determinations are displayed in the subwindow Report.
PAGE 192

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 3.9 Subwindow Report 3.9.4 Report overview Tab: Workplace ▶ Report ▶ Report overview The reports for the determinations since program start are shown in a table on the tab Report overview. The lines are arranged chronologically in ascending order. The table is automatically updated as new reports are received.
PAGE 193

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4 Database 4.1 Database - General 4.1.1 Database - Definition Program part: Database Definition The term Database is used in tiamo to refer to the program part in which the determinations saved in the databases can be displayed, managed, evaluated, reprocessed and printed out. The Determination databases are also referred to as Databases; they can, in contrast to the Configuration database, be generated by the user and contain the determination data.
PAGE 194

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1 Database - General Elements The desktop of the program part Database comprises the following elements: ￭￭￭ 4.1.3 Database-specific menu bar. Database-specific toolbar. Main window in which up to 6 subwindows can be displayed. Database - Menu bar 4.1.3.1 Database - Main menus Program part: Database The menu bar in the program part Database includes the following main menu items: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1.3.2 File Open and close databases, database management, printing.
PAGE 195

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Report… 4 Database PDF file output of the report (see Chapter 4.5.2.12, page 320). Logout... Logout user (see Chapter 2.2.3, page 16). Exit End program. 4.1.3.3 Database - Editing menu Program part: Database Copy Copy the selected lines in the determination overview to the clipboard. Select all Select all lines in the current set of determinations in the determination overview. 4.1.3.4 Database - Menu View Program part:Database Update Update determination overview.
PAGE 196

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1 Database - General 4.1.3.5 Database - Menu Determinations Program part: Database Comment... Enter comment on the selected determination (see Chapter 4.5.2.2, page 282). Search Open the window Search for searching for determinations (see Chapter 4.5.2.3, page 282). Filter ▶ Last filter Use last quick or special filter again (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.2, page 285). Quick filter Use quick filter with the content of the selected table cell (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.3, page 286).
PAGE 197

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Make current Make the old version selected in the history view the current version again (see "Make old version current", page 322). Display calibration curve… Display the calibration or standard addition curve for the focused determination (see Chapter 4.5.2.15, page 322). Control chart… Display control chart and statistical evaluation of the selected determination (see Chapter 4.5.2.16, page 323).
PAGE 198

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1 Database - General 4.1.3.7 Help Menu Program part: Workplace / Database / Method / Configuration tiamo Help Open tiamo Help. About Displays information about the program and the installation. 4.1.4 Database - Toolbar Program part: Database Open… Open database (see Chapter 4.2.1, page 188). Close Close database (see Chapter 4.2.6, page 190). Database manager... Manage determination databases (see Chapter 4.3.1, page 191). Logout... Logout user (see Chapter 2.2.
PAGE 199

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Filter/Quick filter Use quick filter with the content of the selected table cell (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.3, page 286). Filter/Special filter… Open the window Special filter for the definition of user-specific filters (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.4, page 286). Filter/All statistics records Display all related statistics data sets of the focused determniation (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.5, page 287). Filter/Remove filter Remove current filter (see Chapter 4.5.2.4.6, page 287).
PAGE 200

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1 Database - General 4.1.5 Database - Subwindows Program part: Database Selection The following subwindows can be displayed in the main window: ￭￭￭￭ Determination overview Overview of the determinations saved in the database. This subwindow is permanently on display. Information Display of information for focused determination. Results Display of results for focused determination. Curves 1...5 Display of curves for focused determination.
PAGE 201

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Determinations ￭ Overview of functions Templates ￭￭￭￭ 4.1.7 4.1.7.1 Edit report templates Edit control chart templates Edit curve overlay templates Edit export templates Views Views - General Program part: Workplace / Database / Configuration Definition The term View defines the contents and design of the main window in the program parts Workplace, Database and Configuration.
PAGE 202

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.1 Database - General As an alternative a standard view can be defined for each user group that is loaded automatically the first time that the program part is opened.
PAGE 203

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Move the selected subwindow downward (modifies sequence). 4.1.7.3 Load view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Load view… ▶ Load view or the menu item View ▶ Load view... the dialog With the symbol window Load view is opened. Name Name of the view that should be loaded. [Rename] Rename the selected view. [Delete] Delete the selected view. [Load] Load the selected view. 4.1.7.
PAGE 204

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.2 Database display 4.1.7.5 Rename view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Rename view… ▶ Rename view To be able to rename a view, either open the dialog window Load View or Save View and press the [Rename] button. The Rename View window is opened. Rename view to Enter a new name for the view. Input 4.1.7.
PAGE 205

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Editable Shows whether or not the database can be edited by the user currently logged in. Comment Shows remarks about the database. Opening the database Database name Name of the method to be opened. If a database is selected from the table, the name of the database will be entered automatically in this field. It can however also be entered manually. 50 characters Input [Open] Opens the selected database and shows its data sets in the Determination overview.
PAGE 206

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.2 Database display Two databases are opened. Normally only one database is displayed in the main window but the option exists of displaying two databases at once, either next to the another or one below the other. A menu with the currently opened databases is displayed by clicking with either the left or right mouse button on the database symbol. The databases displayed in the main window are marked with a checkmark.
PAGE 207

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.3 Manage databases 4.3.1 Manage databases Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager… ▶ Database manager The symbol or the menu item File ▶ Database manager… is used to open the window Database manager, in which one user with corresponding access rights can administer databases. Database table The database table contains information concerning all determination databases. The table cannot be edited.
PAGE 208

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.3 Manage databases [Properties] Opens the window Database manager for editing the database selected in the table (see Chapter 4.3.5.1, page 193). [Backup] Opens the window Backup the database for backing up the database selected in the table (see Chapter 4.3.6, page 196). [Restore:] Opens the window Restoration of databases for restoring backed-up databases (see Chapter 4.3.7, page 197). [Exit] Closes the window Database manager. 4.3.
PAGE 209

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Note The database name must be unambiguous in the whole Client/Server system. 4.3.4 Deleting database Menu item: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager… ▶ Database manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete The menu item [Edit] ▶ Delete is used to delete the selected database. Note Databases that are open cannot be deleted. 4.3.5 4.3.5.1 Database properties Database properties - Overview Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager...
PAGE 210

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.3 Manage databases Size Shows the size of the database in KB. Created Shows the date and time of the creation of the database. Created by Full name of the user who created the database. Modified Shows the date and time of the last modification of the database properties. Modified by Shows the name of the user (abbreviation) who carried out the modifications. 4.3.5.3 Database properties - Access rights Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager...
PAGE 211

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.3.5.4 4 Database Database properties - Backup Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager... ▶ Database manager ▶ [Properties] ▶ Properties - Database ▶ Backup Definition of backup monitoring and automatic backups. Backup monitoring on | off (Default value: off) Enables/disables the backup monitoring for the selected database.
PAGE 212

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.3 Manage databases Note Make sure that you have read and write access rights on the selected directory. 4.3.5.5 Database properties - Monitoring Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Database manager... ▶ Database manager ▶ [Properties] ▶ Properties - Database ▶ Monitoring Defines database monitoring. Monitoring size on | off (Default value: off) Enables/disables size monitoring for the selected database.
PAGE 213

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Backup target Backup directory Selection of a folder predefined in Program administration for the backup. Selection Default value Selection of the backup directory | Standard backup directory Standard backup directory Note Make sure that you have read and write access rights on the selected directory. Backup name Selection of an existing name for the backup file or entry of a new name. If an existing backup file is selected it will be overwritten.
PAGE 214

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.3 Manage databases Backup name Selection of a backup file. Select backup files Selection Backup date Shows the time at which the database was backed up. If the backup file is located on a network drive, this information is not available. Database name Shows the name of the database. If the backup file is located on a network drive, this information is not available. Number of records Shows the number of data sets in the database.
PAGE 215

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database 4.4 Templates 4.4.1 Report templates 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.1.1 Manage report templates Report template manager Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ Manager… ▶ Report template manager The menu item Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ Manager… is used to open the window Report template manager. List of report templates The list of report templates contains information about all the saved report templates. The table cannot be edited.
PAGE 216

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.1.1.2 Rename report templates Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ Manager… ▶ Report template manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Rename… ▶ Rename report template With the menu item Edit ▶ Rename... in the window Report template manager, the window Rename report template opens for renaming the selected report template. Rename report template 'Name' to Entry of the new name for the report template.
PAGE 217

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.1.6 4 Database Import report templates Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ Manager… ▶ Report template manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Import… ▶ Select files for import With the menu item Edit ▶ Import... in the window Report template manager the dialog window Select files for import opens in which the report templates to be imported must be selected. The report templates are then imported. 4.4.1.
PAGE 218

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Saved Date and time when the report template was saved. Saved by Short name of the user who saved the report template. Comment Comment on the report template. Open report template Name Name of the report template to be opened. If a report template is selected from the table, the name will be entered automatically in this field. It can however also be entered manually.
PAGE 219

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.4.1.2 4 Database Report template - Desktop Program window: Database ▶ Report template Elements The desktop of the program window Report template has the following elements: ￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.4.1.3 4.4.1.4.1.3.
PAGE 220

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Print (PDF)... Show the report template with the data of the selected determination as a PDFfile. Close Close the program window Report template. 4.4.1.4.1.3.3 Report template - Menu Edit Program window: Database ▶ Report template Undo: Undo the last action. Restore: Restore the undone action. Cut Cut selected items and copy them to the clipboard (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.2.6, page 211). Copy Copy the selected items to the clipboard (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.2.
PAGE 221

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.4.1.3.6 4 Database Report template - Menu Tools Program window: Database ▶ Report template Options... 4.4.1.4.1.3.7 Set options for the report template (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.2.10, page 214). Report template - Menu Help Program window: Database ▶ Report template tiamo Help 4.4.1.4.1.4 Open tiamo Help. Report template - General toolbar Program window: Database ▶ Report template Save Save an opened report template (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.2.11, page 215).
PAGE 222

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.1.4.1.5 Report template - Module-specific toolbar Program window: Database ▶ Report template Depending on the module selected in the report template, other symbols and input fields are shown below the general toolbar, with which the properties of these modules can be directly edited (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.1.6, page 206). 4.4.1.4.1.
PAGE 223

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Line If this option is switched on then lines can be inserted in the report template (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.3.10, page 229). Rectangle If this option is switched on then rectangles can be inserted in the report template (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.3.11, page 231). Curve If this option is switched on then curves can be inserted in the report template (see Chapter 4.4.1.4.3.12, page 232).
PAGE 224

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Apply to all pages The page settings are applied for all report pages. Page format Page format Selection of the page format. The width and height of the paper can be defined with User-defined. Selection Default value A4 | Letter | Legal | User-defined A4 Width Width of the page format. This parameter can only be edited for Page format= User-defined Range Default value 0.0 ... 499.0 mm 210.0 mm Height Height of the page format.
PAGE 225

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 4 Database 0.0 ... 499.0 mm 20.0 mm Right Right-hand page margin. Range Default value 0.0 ... 499.0 mm 20.0 mm Layout Header Height of header. Range Default value 0.0 ... 499.0 mm 15.0 mm Footer Height of footer. Range Default value 0.0 ... 499.0 mm 15.0 mm Determination height Height of the section for a single determination on a tabular report. only for tabular report Range 0.0 ... 499.0 mm Default value 25.0 mm 4.4.1.4.2.
PAGE 226

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Defining sections for tabular report The header, footer and report sections can be enlarged and reduced with the left mouse button. 4.4.1.4.2.4 Report template - Insert pages Menu item: Report template ▶ Insert ▶ Page before / Page after Note It is not possible to insert pages in templates for tabular reports.
PAGE 227

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Jumps to last page. 4.4.1.4.2.5 Report template - Insert modules Program window: Database ▶ Report template In order to insert a module in a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the module bar and then placed on the report template by creating a field with the left mouse button. The Properties window of the corresponding module then opens automatically.
PAGE 228

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Select a single module Single modules are selected with a click of the left mouse button. This automatically shows the corresponding properties of the module below the toolbar. Select several modules Several modules are selected by drawing a frame around the required modules with the left mouse button.
PAGE 229

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.4.2.8 4 Database Report template - Page preview Preview window: Report template ▶ File ▶ Page preview ▶ Report preview With the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Page preview in the program window Report template the window Report preview opens in which a page preview of the report template is shown with the data of the determinations selected in the determination overview. Functions Produces displayed report as PDF-file.
PAGE 230

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Jumps to last determination. 4.4.1.4.2.9 Report template - Comment Dialog window: Report template ▶ Edit ▶ Comment ▶ Comment With the symbol or the menu item Edit ▶ Comment in the program window Report template the window Comment on report template opens in which comments on the opened report template can be entered. Comment Enter comment on the report template that is shown in the List of report templates. Input 4.4.1.4.2.
PAGE 231

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Snap at grid on | off (Default value: off) Enable/Disable snapping at grid on the report template. Default font Font Select the default font for the report templates. Selection Default value 4.4.1.4.2.
PAGE 232

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 50 characters Input Note The name of the report template must be unambigous in the whole Client/ Server system. [Save] Save the report template under the required name. 4.4.1.4.3 4.4.1.4.3.1 Report template - Modules Report template - Text field Program window: Database ▶ Report template Text fields are used for showing any texts in the report.
PAGE 233

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Selection of the available Windows fonts. Font size in pt. Color selection. Bold. Italic. Underlined. Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Switches line break on/off for multi-line text fields. Fills the field with dots. Text Entry of text for the text field. 4.4.1.4.3.2 Report template - Data field Program window: Database ▶ Report template Data fields are used for showing determination data in a report. tiamo 2.
PAGE 234

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Insert In order to insert a data field into a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of data field. Range 0.0000 ... (max.
PAGE 235

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Switches line break on/off for multi-line data fields. Fills the field with dots. Prefix Text placed in front of the data field contents. Input 50 characters Data field Shows path and name of selected data field (the field cannot be edited directly). With a window opens for selecting the data field in which all the available fields for the determination overview are shown in a tree structure.
PAGE 236

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Insert In order to insert a date field into a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of date field. Range 0.0000 ... (max.
PAGE 237

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Fills the field with dots. Prefix Text placed in front of the date field contents. Input 50 characters Suffix Text placed after the date field contents. Input 50 characters Sample Shows the formatted date. 4.4.1.4.3.4 Report template - Time field Program window: Database ▶ Report template Time fields are used for showing the actual time in the report.
PAGE 238

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of time field. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Height Height of time field. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Selection of the available Windows fonts. Font size in pt. Color selection. Bold. Italic. Underlined. Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Fills the field with dots. Prefix Text placed in front of the contents of the time field. Input 222 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 50 characters tiamo 2.
PAGE 239

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Suffix Text to be placed after the contents of the time field. Input 50 characters Preview Shows the formatted time. 4.4.1.4.3.5 Report template - Page number Program window: Database ▶ Report template The actual page number in the report is produced in a page number field.
PAGE 240

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Color selection. Bold. Italic. Underlined. Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Fills the field with dots. Prefix Text placed in front of the page number field. Input 50 characters Suffix Text placed after the page number field. Input 50 characters Preview Shows the formatted page number. 4.4.1.4.3.6 Report template - Number of pages Program window: Database ▶ Report template This field shows the total number of pages in the report.
PAGE 241

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Insert In order to insert a number of pages field into a report template, the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and then placed in the header or footer of the report template by creating a field with the lefthand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of the field. Range 0.0000 .
PAGE 242

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Left-justified. Centered. Right-justified. Fills the field with dots. Prefix Text placed in front of the field contents. Input 50 characters Suffix Text placed after the field contents. Input 50 characters Preview Shows the formatted number of pages. 4.4.1.4.3.7 Report template - Fixed report Program window: Database ▶ Report template Fixed reports are used for producing predefined part-reports of the determination in the report.
PAGE 243

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Width Shows the predefined width of the fixed report. Height Height of fixed report. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Fixed report Selection of a predefined fixed report.
PAGE 244

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Note The following fields, which do not permit page break controls, cannot be inserted into a group field. ￭￭￭ Fixed report Curve Calibration curve Insert In order to insert group field into a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. Shows the predefined x-position for the field. Y pos. y-position within the permitted section.
PAGE 245

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of image field. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Height Height of image field. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Graphics file Shows path and name of the selected graphics file (the field cannot be edited directly).
PAGE 246

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Insert In order to insert a line in a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and then placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Length Length of the line. Range 0.0 ... (max.
PAGE 247

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.1.4.3.11 4 Database Report template - Rectangle Program window: Database ▶ Report template Any rectangle can be inserted in the report template. Insert In order to insert a rectangle into a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos.
PAGE 248

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Selection of the fill color. 4.4.1.4.3.12 Report template - Curve field Program window: Database ▶ Report template Curve fields are used for showing determination curves in the report. Insert In order to insert a curve in a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and then placed on the report template by creating a field with the left mouse button. Properties Note The properties are saved individually for each curve field.
PAGE 249

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Selection Default value DET | MET | SET | MEAS | MEAS T/Flow | MEAS TC Cond | MEAS Ref | MEAS Opt | MEAS Spec | CAL Spec | KFT | KFC | BRC | STAT | DOS DET Command name Name of the command for which the curve is to be produced. With not defined all curves present in the determination with the selected Command type will be produced as default. Note In the command name, the index in the format .# must be specified additionally (e.g. Chloride.1).
PAGE 250

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Insert In order to insert calibration curve field into a report template the corresponding symbol must be selected on the Module bar and placed on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. Properties X pos. x-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page width) mm Y pos. y-position within the permitted section. Range 0.0000 ... (max. page height) mm Width Width of calibration curve field. Range 0.0000 ... (max.
PAGE 251

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Template table The table with the defined templates cannot be edited, although it can be sorted according to the selected column in increasing or decreasing sequence by clicking on the column title Template name Shows the name of the template. Result Shows the result for which the template can be used. Comment Shows the comments about the template. Functions [New] Create new template.
PAGE 252

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates ￭￭￭￭ 4.4.2.2.2 Graphical parameters Parameters for the graphical display of the control chart. Limits Definition of warning and intervention limits for the control chart. Statistics Display of statistics data on the control chart. Comment Enter comment on the template. Control chart template - Graphical parameters Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Control chart templates ▶ Properties Parameters for the graphical display of the control chart.
PAGE 253

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Color Selection of the color for the measuring point symbol. Selection Default value Color selection | blue blue Link measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the measured value points will be joined by a line. 4.4.2.2.3 Control chart template - Limit values Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Control chart templates ▶ Properties Definition of warning and intervention limits to be shown on the control chart.
PAGE 254

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.2.2.4 Control chart template - Statistics Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Control chart templates ▶ Properties Definition of the display of statistics data on the control chart. Show the statistics data on | off (Default value: on) If this check box is activated then below the graph the statistics data for Mean value, Standard deviation, Number of measuring points and Minimum and maximum values will be shown.
PAGE 255

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Template table The table with the defined templates cannot be edited, although it can be sorted according to the selected column in increasing or decreasing sequence by clicking on the column title Template name Shows the name of the template. Command type Shows the command type for which the template can be used. Comment Shows the comments about the template. Functions [New] Generates a new template.
PAGE 256

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.
PAGE 257

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Scaling Start value Initial value for scaling the x axis. Range Default value -1.0 E12 ... 1.0 E12 0.0 End value End value for scaling the x axis. Range Default value 4.4.3.2.3 -1.0 E12 ... 1.0 E12 1000.0 Curve overlay - y axis Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Curve overlay templates ▶ Properties Parameters for the graphical display of the overlaid curves on the y axis. y axis Size Selection of the quantiy to be shown on the y axis.
PAGE 258

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Scaling Start value Initial value for scaling the y-axis. Range Default value -1.0 E12 ... 1.0 E12 0.0 End value End value for scaling the y-axis. Range Default value 4.4.3.2.4 -1.0 E12 ... 1.0 E12 1000.0 Curve overlay - Options Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Curve overlay templates ▶ Properties Options for the graphical display of the overlaid curves.
PAGE 259

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Manual EPs Selects the color for manually set endpoints. Selection Default value Color selection | pink pink Background Background color Selection of the color for the curve background. Selection Default value Color selection | white white Legend Display of the data field, which is shown in the legend to identify the curves. Open the dialog window Legend - Field selection for selecting the data field.
PAGE 260

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.4 Export templates 4.4.4.1 Managing export templates Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Export templates... ▶ Export templates With the menu item Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Export templates, the dialog window Export templates opens in which the globally available templates for manual or automatic export of determination data can be managed.
PAGE 261

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.4.2 4.4.4.2.1 4 Database Editing export templates Export template - Properties Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Export templates... ▶ Export templates ▶ [Properties] ▶ Export template [Properties] is used to open the dialog window Export template 'Name' in which the properties of the selected export template can be edited. Name Name of export template. Input 50 characters Comment Freely definable comment on the export template.
PAGE 262

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates *.csv (measuring point list) Data exchange format for the measuring point list with unformatted text, which can be imported into corresponding PC programs. The text file contains a document header with date/time of the determination and the determination ID, then the measuring point lists of the separate commands are listed one after the other.
PAGE 263

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Sample identification If this option is selected then the name of the export file will be formed from the selected sample identification ID1...ID16, the Computer name, the date stamp -YYYYMMDD-HHMMSS and the suffix for the format. If the generated name already exists in the folder then a version number will additionally be appended to the date. Request on each export If this option is selected then the name of the export file will be requested at each export.
PAGE 264

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Remove selected field. Modifies the sequence of the exported fields by moving the selected field up. Modifies the sequence of the exported fields by moving the selected field down. 4.4.4.2.3 Export template - Options for CSV format Dialog window: Database ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Export templates...
PAGE 265

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Field separator Selection of the field separator. Selection Default value 4.4.4.3 ; | , | Tab ; XML export XML export General An XML export file with all determination data can be created when an XML report template is used at the export of the determinations. Structure An XML export file is constructed as follows:
PAGE 266

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates User name (full name) Client name Program version - Build number License code Note dynamic= means that the following nodes can appear more than once. The actual data is situated between " ". 4.4.4.3.
PAGE 267

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Determination run (way in which the determination was ended): regular without remarks The determination was finished automatically after the method was processed normally and without any remarks. regular with remarks The determination was finished automatically after the method was processed normally but with remarks. abort The determination was stopped manually with [Stop], by a stop criterion or with a SEND command.
PAGE 268

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Determination status: original Determination data unaltered. modified Determination data altered. Date and time when the reprocessed determination version was saved. Short name of user logged in when determination was reprocessed. Full name of user logged in when determination was reprocessed. Reason for the determination modification.
PAGE 269

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Variable type: TX = Text NR = Number DT = Date/Time NA = Unknown Variable identification Variable value. – System variables – System variable Variable type: TX = Text NR = Number DT = Date/Time NA = Unknown Variable identification Variable value.
PAGE 270

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – ... Comment on the signature. 4.4.4.3.2 XML export - Method data XML export – Method data – Information about the identification of the method. Name of the method. Name of method group to which the method belonged when the determination was carried out.
PAGE 271

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Date and time when the modified method version was saved. Short name of user logged in when modified method was saved. Full name of user logged in when modified method was saved. Reason for the method modification. User comment on the method modification.
PAGE 272

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Variable status: OK = The value is ok and has not been monitored. OKL = The value is ok and has been monitored. LE = The value exceeded the limit and has not been monitored. LEL = The value exceeded the limit and has been monitored.. NV = The value is invalid and has not been monitored. NVL = The value is invalid and has been monitored.
PAGE 273

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – Sample identifications. – Sample identification ID1. – ... see above ... – ... see above 4.4.4.3.4 XML export - Results overview XML export – Results overview – Result value with the number of decimal places defined in the CALC command. Result value with full precision.
PAGE 274

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Name of the CALC command the result has been generated with. Unit of the result. Formula used for the calculation of the result. – Variables used for the calculation of the result. – Variable value. Variable status (see above). Variable type (see above). Variable name. – Mean value of the result.
PAGE 275

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Variable status (see above). Number of the result among the statistically evaluated results. Maximum number of statistically evaluated results. 4.4.4.3.5 XML export - Single results XML export – Single results – 1. single result – Result value with the number of decimal places defined in the CALC command.
PAGE 276

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – Mean value of the result. – Mean value with the number of decimal places defined in the CALC command. Mean value with full precision. Variable status (see above). – Absolute standard deviation of the result. – Absolute standard deviation with the number of decimal places defined in the CALC command. Absolute standard deviation with full precision.
PAGE 277

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4.4.3.6 4 Database XML export - Command data XML export – Command data – Data on command Command name.Index Command type. – Command variables – Variable type: TX = Text NR = Number DT = Date/Time NA = Unknown Variable identification Variable value.
PAGE 278

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – ... Type of Swing Head on tower 1. – ... Serial number of Swing Head on tower 1. – ... Tower number. – ... Type of Swing Head on tower 2. – ... Serial number of Swing Head on tower 2. – Data on the peripheral devices connected.
PAGE 279

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – ... Concentration. – ... Concentration unit. – ... Production date. – ... Titer value. – ... Titer unit. – ... Date and time of the last titer determination. – ... Name of the method the last titer determination was carried out with.
PAGE 280

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Serial number of measuring input. Type of temperature sensor (Pt 1000 or NTC). Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Material constant of the NTC resistance referred to measuring the resistance at 25 °C and 50 °C. – Data on sensor. Sensor name. Sensor type.
PAGE 281

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Blank value of the ISE sensor. Concentration unit of calibration. Variance of calibration. Calibration temperature. Calibration mode. Calibration date. Calibration method. – Calibration solutions. –
Column headers.
PAGE 282

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates Variance. – Standard addition solutions. –
Column headers. Column header for measuring solution. Column header for addition volume. Column header for measured value. Column header for measured value difference. Column header for measuring time.
– – ... Measuring solution.
PAGE 283

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – Endpoints – Designation of the endpoint X value of the endpoint. Unit of the x value of the endpoint. Y value of the endpoint. Unit of the y value of the endpoint. – Monitoring data – Data on monitoring. Monitoring type.
PAGE 284

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates ... Volume in mL. ... Temperature, measured value pH or measured value mV. ... ... Action. 4.4.4.3.7 XML export - Common Variables XML export – Common variables – Variable value.
PAGE 285

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Assignment method. Assignment date. 4.4.4.3.8 XML export - Device data XML export – Device data – Data on device. – Device type. Parameter name. Parameter value. – ... Device name. – ... Device serial number. – ...
PAGE 286

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – ... Recording time of dark and reference spectrum. – ... User during recording of the dark and reference spectrum. – ... Method during recording of the dark and reference spectrum. – ... Determination ID of the recording of the dark and reference spectrum. – ...
PAGE 287

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – Data on solution. – ... Solution title. – ... Solution name. – ... Concentration. – ... Concentration unit. – ... Production date. – ... Titer value. – ... Titer unit. – ... Date and time of the last titer determination.
PAGE 288

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates – Sensor data – Data on sensor. Type of sensor: XML_SENSOR_OTHER = Other sensor XML_SENSOR_PH = pH sensor XML_SENSOR_ION = ISE sensor XML_SENSOR_METAL = Metal sensor XML_SENSOR_TEMP = Temperature sensor XML_SENSOR_COND = Conductivity sensor – Data on measuring input. Number of measuring input. Type of analog/digital converter.
PAGE 289

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Calibration method. Measuring input at calibration. 4.4.4.3.10 XML export - Sample solutions (TC conductivity) XML export – Sample solutions (TC conductivity) – Data on sample solution (TC conductivity). – ... Name of the sample solution (TC conductivity). – ...
PAGE 290

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.4 Templates 4.4.4.3.11 XML export - Method parameters XML export – Method parameters – Data on command. Command type. – Command name. Parameter designation. Parameter value. – <'Parameter name'> Data on tab or parameter. Parameter name. Parameter value.
PAGE 291

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database – ... Mean value of the result. – ... Result unit. – ... Absolute standard deviation of the result. – ... ... Relative standard deviation of the result. – ... ... Minimum value of the result. – ... ... Maximum value of the result.
PAGE 292

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.1 Determination overview - General 4.5.1.1 Determination overview - Overview Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview General The subwindow Determination overview shows selected data for the determinations contained in the open database in tabular form. It is always shown in the program part Database, i.e. it cannot be removed from the Database view.
PAGE 293

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Table view With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence. The table view can be adapted with the left-hand mouse button as follows: ￭￭￭ Drag the border between column titles: Sets the column width. Double-click on the border between column titles Sets the optimal column width. Drag the column title Moves the column to the required location.
PAGE 294

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Removes the selected column from the table. Move selected column upwards. Move selected column downwards. 4.5.1.
PAGE 295

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.1.5 4 Database Determination overview - Navigation bar Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview The navigation bar shown below the determination table is used for navigation in extensive tables in which all the determinations cannot be shown at once. It contains the following tools: Jump to the first set of determinations in the table. Jump back to the previous set of determinations in the table. Display the selected set #### - #### of determinations in the table.
PAGE 296

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview [Page Up] Pages backward within the current set. [Page Down] Pages forward within the current set. [Alt] [End] Jumps to last determination (of all). [Alt] [Home] Jumps to first determination (of all). [Alt] [↑] Jumps to first data set of previous set. [Alt] [↓] Jumps to first data set of next set. In the determination table it is not possible to show more than 200 determinations at once.
PAGE 297

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.1.8 4 Database Several determinations not in sequence In order to select several determinations not in sequence the individual determinations must be selected with the Ctrl key and the left mouse button. The last determination to be selected receives the focus. All determinations With [Ctrl] [A] or by clicking on the uppermost left-hand table field all the filtered determinations within the current set of determinations are selected. The focus is retained.
PAGE 298

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 Determination overview - Functions Update determination overview Menu item: Database ▶ View ▶ Update The menu item View ▶ Update or the symbol determination table. is used to update the Note The determination table is updated automatically when the database is opened and when a change is made from another program part to the program part Database, but afterwards only when the table is newly sorted or filtered. 4.5.2.
PAGE 299

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [More...] Open the dialog window Search – Field selection. All fields are listed in tree-form. A field can be included in the search by marking it and then closing the dialog with [OK]. Details Depending on the data field, under Details further selection fields are dynamically created in order to be able to select the required property. Search options Type Selection of the format type for the fields for which several types are possible.
PAGE 300

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview outside limits It is being searched for values which exceed the limit values defined for the selected fields (values presented in red). Search word Enter a search word for searching the selected data field. For fields of the Type = Date the date can be selected by pressing on [...] in the dialog window Select date. for fields of the type = Text Input 256 characters Definition of a text expression as search word.
PAGE 301

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Selection Default value Total | Downward | Upward Total Total It is being searched down to the end of the database and then again from above down to the selected data record. Downward It is being searched to the end of the databse. Upward It is being searched to the beginning of the databse. Match case on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then differentiation will be made between upper and lower case letters during searches in Text-type fields.
PAGE 302

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.4.3 Determinations - Quick filter Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Quick filter With the menu item Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Quick filter or the symbol a quick filtering for the content of the selected tabular field can be carried out. After this function has been selected the field in the determination table in which the cursor is located will be shown with a colored background during navigation.
PAGE 303

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Table view The overview table shows all the defined filter criteria and cannot be directly edited. The filter conditions will be numbered automatically in sequence.
PAGE 304

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.4.7 Determinations - Save filter Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Filter ▶ Special filter... ▶ Special filter - Database "Database name" ▶ [Save filter] ▶ Save filter With the button [Save filter] in the dialog window Special filter - Database "Database name" the dialog window Save filter opens for saving a special filter. All the saved special filters are shown in the upper field.
PAGE 305

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Selection 'Field name' Filtering is carried out only for the selected field. The 10 most recently selected fields are always available for selection. [Other...] Open the dialog window Filter - Field selection. Herein all fields that can be used for filtering are listed in tree-form. A field can be adopted by marking it and then closing the dialog with [OK].
PAGE 306

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview out of limits Values that are out of the defined limits for the selected fields will be filtered for (values shown in red). Comparative value Selection or entry of the comparative value for the filter criterion. For fields where Type = Date, the date can be selected by pressing [...] in the dialog window Select date. Only for fields of the type = text Input 256 characters Definition of a text expression as comparison value.
PAGE 307

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.5 4.5.2.5.1 4 Database Signing determinations Rules for electronic signatures Program parts: Method / Database In tiamo, methods and determination can be electronically signed at two levels. The following rules apply for this: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.5.2 Signature levels Signature levels for methods and determinations can be signed at two levels (Signature Level 1 and Signature Level 2) by entering the user name and password.
PAGE 308

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 1 in the Signature Level 1 window. Note Methods or determinations which have been signed at Level 1 can be changed and deleted. If the altered method or determination is saved as a new version then all existing signatures will be deleted automatically, i.e. the method or determination must be signed again. Info Information display for signing and deleting signatures.
PAGE 309

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open. Note Methods or determinations can only be signed at Level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 4.5.2.5.3 Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method Manager... ▶ Method Manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Signature 2... ▶ Signature Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 2...
PAGE 310

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 24 characters Input Password Password entry. 24 characters Input Reason Selection from the Default reasons defined in the Security Settings dialog window for the category Signature level 2. Selection from the Default reasons Selection Comment Entry of comment on the signature. 1000 characters Input [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open.
PAGE 311

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Reason Reason for signature. Signature comment Comment on the signature. 4.5.2.5.5 Delete Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Delete signatures 2... ▶ Delete Signatures Level 2 or Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Delete signatures 2... ▶ Delete Signatures Level 2 The Delete Level 2 signatures window allows you to delete all signatures on Level 2 for the selected methods or determination.
PAGE 312

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6 4.5.2.6.1 Determinations - Reprocessing Reprocessing - General Dialog window: Reprocessing Reprocessing determinations The determinations saved in the database can be reprocessed at any time. The variables, methods, statistics and curve evaluation can be modified and the results recalculated. The reprocessed determination can then be saved in the database as a new version.
PAGE 313

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Functions If determinations have been edited in the subwindow Modifications then the following functions can be triggered: [Recalculating] Recalculate selected determination(s) with the modifications on variables, method, statistics or curve evaluation made in the subwindow Modifications. A progress bar appears during the recalculating, the recalculating can be canceled with next to the bar.
PAGE 314

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.3 Reprocessing rules Dialog window: Reprocessing The following rules apply for reprocessing the selected and modified determinations: ￭￭ Number of determinations No more than 100 determinations (including statistically linked determinations) may be selected for reprocessing.
PAGE 315

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 4 Database Titration and measuring commands For DET, MET, SET, KFT, KFC, MEAS, CAL MEAS only the evaluations with existing data will be recalculated, all other parameters will be ignored. For commands that generate data, which are carried out during the determination but are no longer carried out during reprocessing, all the existing values will be deleted.
PAGE 316

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.4 4.5.2.6.4.1 Modifications Modifications - Overview Subwindow: Database ▶ Determination overview ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Modifications In the subwindow Modifications of the dialog window Reprocessing modifications can be made on the following 4 tabs: ￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.4.2 Variables Modification of the variables used in the selected determination. Method Modification of the method used in the selected determination.
PAGE 317

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [Modify] Open the dialog window Modify variable to modify the value of an existing variable. Note If a variable is modified, then with [Recalculate] all the selected determinations will be recalculated with the new value. If one variable is not modified then when several determinations are recalculated the original value of the variable will be used (i.e. variables with the same name but different values will not be overwritten until they are deliberately altered). 4.5.2.
PAGE 318

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 385). The modified method then appears on the tab Methods with the addition (modified). This modified method is then applied to the selected determinations with [Recalculate] and can be saved at any time with [Save as]. 4.5.2.6.4.4 Modifications - Statistics Tab: Database ▶ Determination overview ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess...
PAGE 319

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database [Result on/off] Switch the selected single result for the statistical calculations off or on. If the result is switched off, an asterisk (*) appears behind the result value, is it switched on again, the asterisk disappears. However, updating the statistics data always only takes place with [Recalculate]. Note If the results of a determination are switched off, the statistics for these results will be switched off when this determination is recalculated, i.e.
PAGE 320

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Command name Selection of the measuring command (command name.index - command type) for which the curve is to be shown for reprocessing. Selection Command name [Edit] The dialog window Curve evaluation opens for manually reprocessing the curve evaluation. 4.5.2.6.4.6.2 Edit curve evaluation Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess...
PAGE 321

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Set EP with parallel tangents By moving the mouse a point on the curve is selected to which the tangent is automatically applied. At the same time a tangent parallel to it is applied to the other leg of the curve. The two tangents are set with a click of the left mouse button and at the same time a new endpoint is set at the intersection of the middle line of the two tangents with the curve.
PAGE 322

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Define properties for the graph display The dialog window Properties - Curves # is opened for graph display. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved for the reprocessing window per client. Show EP list The dialog window Endpoints is opened in which all endpoints of the selected curve are displayed in a table. If an endpoint is added to or deleted from the curve then the table will be updated automatically.
PAGE 323

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Measured value Measured value (pH) for endpoint. ERC ERC value for the endpoint. Time Time for the endpoint. Temperature Temperature for the endpoint. Note Manually set endpoints only have two measured quantities, for the other measured quantities invalid is entered. [Delete] Delete selected endpoint. [Exit] Close dialog window. 4.5.2.6.4.6.4 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.
PAGE 324

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.2 Properties curve evaluation - x axis Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ x axis On the tab x axis the parameters for the graphical presentation of the curves on the x axis can be set. Command type Shows the type of command for which the curve properties can be defined.
PAGE 325

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Only editable when the option Autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.0E12 ... 1.0E12 Default value 1.0E12 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.3 Properties curve evaluation - y axis Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ y axis On the tab y axis the parameters for the graphical presentation of the curves on the y axis (left y axis) can be set.
PAGE 326

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview End value End value for scaling the y-axis. Only editable when the option Autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.0E12 ... 1.0E12 Default value 1.0E12 Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | blue blue Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Selection Default value 5 symbols | No symbol No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown.
PAGE 327

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Smoothing factor y-axis Factor for smoothing on the y axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Show with original curve on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled then the original curve (solid line) will be shown in addition to the smoothed curve (dotted line, same color). 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.
PAGE 328

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | red red Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Selection Default value 5 symbols | No symbol No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown.
PAGE 329

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.4.6.4.5 4 Database Properties curve evaluation - Options Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ [Edit] ▶ Curve evaluation ▶ Properties ▶ Options On the tab Options the parameters for the graphical presentation of the curves can be set. Command type Shows the type of command for which the curve properties can be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type for the reprocessing window are saved per client.
PAGE 330

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview Show endpoints Show endpoints on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled then the endpoints found will be shown on the curve by the symbol ♦and labeled with EP# (potentiometric endpoint), BP# (break point), FP# (fixed endpoint), HP (HNP), MI (minimum value) or MA (maximum value). Automatic EPs Selection of the color for automatically set endpoints.
PAGE 331

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.6.5.1 4 Database Result view - Results overview Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Result display ▶ Result overview In the subwindow Result view of the dialog window Reprocessing the results calculated during the CALC commands and the variables used for are displayed and updated with each recalculation. Per CALC command the following elements are shown: Title Name of the calculation command.
PAGE 332

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.6.5.2 Result view - Raw data Tab: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Reprocess... ▶ Reprocessing ▶ Result display ▶ Raw data On the tab Raw data of the subwindow Result view the raw data generated in commands with evaluations will be shown and updated at each recalculation.
PAGE 333

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5.2.7 4 Database Sending determinations to Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Send to... The menu item Determinations ▶ Send to... opens the dialog window Send determinations per E-mail Selection Default value Determination ID | Sample identification | Name Determination ID Determination ID The name of the export file is formed out of an unambiguous determination ID, the computer name, the date stamp -YYYYMMDDHHMMSS and the suffix for the format.
PAGE 334

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview All filtered data records All those determinations from the whole determination table are exported that correspond to the set filter. Export template Selection of the Export template for data export. 'Export template' Selection 4.5.2.9 Import determinations Dialog window: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Importing... ▶ Importing determinations With the menu item Determinations ▶ Importing...
PAGE 335

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Note If the check box Comment on modification of determinations in the Security settings is activated, then the window Modification comment determination will appear before the modification is saved. 4.5.2.11 Determination overview - Print Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview… ▶ Print determination overview (PDF) The Menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview... opens the dialog window Print determination overview (PDF).
PAGE 336

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.12 Determinations - Print report Dialog window: Database ▶ File ▶ Print ▶ Report... ▶ Report output The menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Report... opens the dialog window Report output.
PAGE 337

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database PDF file on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated the reports are put out as PDF files under the entered file name. Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name. 4.5.2.13 Determinations - Show method Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Show method… The menu item Determinations ▶ Display method...
PAGE 338

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview 4.5.2.14 Determinations - Displaying history Menu item: Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Show history Switch history view on/off With the menu item Determinations ▶ Display history... or the symbol only the currently focused determination in the determination table as well as all the previous versions of this determination will be shown.
PAGE 339

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database values. Listed below are the individual measured values and the results for Slope, E(0), c(blank) and Variance. Calibration curve for CAL LOOP Conc Standard addition curve for STDADD In the dialog window Calibration curve a tab marked with the command name showing the standard addition curve and evaluation data will be displayed for each STDADD command. The command type is shown above the calibration curve.
PAGE 340

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.5 Determination overview If the cursor is moved to a point then the number, date and value appear as a tooltip. The sorting and the date and time for the first and last point are shown as the legend. [Print (PDF)] Open dialog window Print control chart (PDF) (see Chapter 4.5.2.19, page 325). The content of the control chart can be shown as a PDF file in the required format. 4.5.2.
PAGE 341

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database right of the curve the legend is shown with the line number in the determination table belonging to the determination. The legend consists of the content of a data field which can be defined in the options of the template and of a counter, which identifies the curves if the same command has been executed several times during a determination. [Print (PDF)] Open the dialog window Print curves (PDF) (see Chapter 4.5.2.18, page 325).
PAGE 342

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Portrait Produces control chart in portrait format. Landscape Produces control chart in landscape format. Comment Possibility of entering comments on the control chart which will be produced together with the control chart. Input 1000 characters [OK] The control chart is shown in the required format as a PDF file and opened directly with the Acrobat Reader; it can then be printed out and/or saved. 4.6 Subwindow Information 4.6.
PAGE 343

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6.2 4 Database Information - Determination Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Determination Display of general information about determination. Identification Information about the identification of the determination. Determination ID: Unambiguous and unmistakable identification for the determination. Server name: Computer name of the server to which the client was connected when the determination was recorded.
PAGE 344

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Stop The determination was stopped manually with [Stop], by a stop criterion or with a SEND command. Stop by error Due to an error, the determination was canceled automatically. User (short name): Short name of the user. Note Which user is entered depends on the option Edit workplaces in 'BUSY' status in the security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.2, page 1202). Active User who started the determination. Inactive User logged in when finishing determination.
PAGE 345

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Determination status: Selection original | modified original Determination data unaltered. modified Determination data altered. Determination version: Version of the determination. The unaltered original determination has the version number 1, reprocessed determinations have a version number >1. Reprocessing date: Date and time when the reprocessed determination version was saved.
PAGE 346

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Signed by (full name): Full name of user who signed the determination. Signature reason: Reason for signature selected by user. Signature comment: User comments on signing the determination. 4.6.3 Information - Method Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Method Shows general information about the method used. Identification Information about the identification of the method. Method name: Name of the method.
PAGE 347

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Method version: Version of the method the determination was created with. Method saving date: Date and time when the modified method version was saved. Method saved by (short name): Short name of user logged in when modified method was saved. Method saved by (full name): Full name of user logged in when modified method was saved. Modification reason method: Reason for the method modification. Modification comment method: User comment on the method modification.
PAGE 348

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Sample size: Value for the sample size. Sample size unit: Unit of sample size. Input date: Date and time at which the sample size was entered. Data source: Data source for the sample size: For manual input manual is shown, for automatic input from a balance or barcode reader the corresponding device name, for data import from a file the corresponding file name.
PAGE 349

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Modification reason sample data: Reason for the sample data modification. Modification comment sample data: User comment on the sample data modification. 4.6.5 Information - Configuration Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Configuration Shows general information about the devices, sensors and common variables used. Device 'Device name' Information about the device used (only the existing device information will be shown). Device type: Type of device.
PAGE 350

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Measuring input: Number of the measuring input (+ designation iConnect for intelligent sensors). ADC type: Type of analog/digital converter. ADC serial number: Serial number of measuring input. Temperature sensor: Type of connected temperature sensor. Stirrer: Stirrer connection at device. Stirrer type: Type of stirrer. Serial number: Serial number of stirrer. Dosing device: Dosing connection at device. Dosing device type: Dosing device type.
PAGE 351

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Date titer det.: Date of the titer determination. Titer method: Method with which the titer was determined. Exchange/Dosing unit: Type of exchange or dosing unit. Name: Designation of exchange or dosing unit. Order number: Order number of exchange or dosing unit. Serial number: Serial number of exchange or dosing unit. Cylinder volume: Cylinder volume of exchange or dosing unit. Cylinder serial number: Serial number of cylinder. Remote box: Connection to device.
PAGE 352

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Detector type: Type of the detector built in the spectrometer. Date dark/reference spectrum: Date and time of the recording of the dark spectrum and the reference spectrum. User dark/reference spectrum: User logged in during recording the dark spectrum and the reference spectrum. Method dark/reference spectrum: Method with which the dark spectrum and the reference spectrum were recorded.
PAGE 353

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Sensor serial number: Serial number of sensor. Device: Name of device to which sensor is connected. Measuring input: Number of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected (+ designation iConnect for intelligent sensors). Slope: Electrode slope of the sensor used (in % for pH sensor or in mV for ISE). E (0): Electrode zero point of the sensor used (in mV only for ISE). pH (0): Electrode zero point of the sensor used (dimensionless for pH sensor).
PAGE 354

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.6 Subwindow Information Value: Value and unit of the common variables after the last value assignment. Assignment date: Date and time of last value assignment. Assignment method: Method with which the value was assigned. Sample solution (TC conductivity) 'Name' Information on the sample solution used. Assignment date: Date and time of last value assignment. Assignment method: Method with which the value was assigned.
PAGE 355

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Measuring input: Shows the type of measuring input and serial number (e.g. 1.845.0010 11458 for iConnect). Determination ID: Unambiguous and unmistakable identification for the determination. 4.6.6 Information - Messages Tab: Database ▶ Information ▶ Messages Shows messages generated during the determination run. 'Time' Shows the time at which the message was generated in the run (date, time, UTC in the format YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss UTC.....).
PAGE 356

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results 4.7 Subwindow Results 4.7.1 Results - General Subwindow: Database ▶ Results In the subwindow Results in the program part Database the results calculated in the calculation commands and the variables used for are shown.
PAGE 357

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Note Only the last results having been calculated will be shown. For example, if there are several commands that generate a result with the same name, then the corresponding result data will be shown only for that command that was the last to calculate the result. Nothing will be shown for the other commands. "Result" Shows the result name and result value with the defined number of decimal places and units.
PAGE 358

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results 4.7.3 Results - Raw data Tab: Database ▶ Results ▶ Results On the tab Raw data the evaluation results of commands with evaluations are shown. "Command name" For each CALC command the raw data is displayed in six columns: Column 1 Display of the command type. Column 2 Shows the variable designation for the raw data. Columns 3-6 Shows the raw data. The following tables show the raw data depending on the command type.
PAGE 359

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table 3 4 Database Command DET Ipol Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL, mL, 4 EP#.MEA, mV, 1 EP#.TIM, s, 1 EP#.TEM, °C, 1 FP# FP#.VOL, mL, 4 FP#.MEA, mV, 1 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.TEM, °C, 1 HP# HP#.VOL, mL, 4 HP#.MEA, mV, 1 HP#.TIM, s, 1 HP#.TEM, °C, 1 MI MI.VOL, mL, 4 MI.MEA, mV, 1 MI.TIM, s, 1 MI.TEM, °C, 1 MA MA.VOL, mL, 4 MA.MEA, mV, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM, °C, 1 BP# BP#.VOL, mL, 4 BP#.MEA, mV, 1 BP#.TIM, s, 1 BP#.
PAGE 360

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 MA MA.VOL, mL, 4 MA.MEA, mV, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM, °C, 1 BP# BP#.VOL, mL, 4 BP#.MEA, mV, 1 BP#.TIM, s, 1 BP#.TEM, °C, 1 GP GP.VOL, mL, 4 GP.MEA, mV, 1 GP.TIM, s, 1. GP.TEM, °C, 1 Table 7 Command MET Ipol Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL, mL, 4 EP#.MEA, mV, 1 EP#.TIM, s, 1 EP#.TEM, °C, 1 FP# FP#.VOL, mL, 4 FP#.MEA, mV, 1 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.
PAGE 361

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Table 10 4 Database Command SET U Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP# EP#.VOL, mL, 4 EP#.MEA, mV, 1 EP#.TIM, s, 1 EP#.TEM, °C, 1 DRI DRI, µL/min, 1 DTI DTI, s, 1 FP# FP#.VOL, mL, 4 FP#.MEA, mV, 1 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.TEM, °C, 1 MI MI.VOL, mL, 4 MI.MEA, mV, 1 MI.TIM, s, 1 MI.TEM, °C, 1 MA MA.VOL, mL, 4 MA.MEA, mV, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.
PAGE 362

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Table 14 Command KFT Upol Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 EP EP.VOL, mL, 4 EP.MEA, µA, 1 EP.TIM, s, 1 EP.TEM, °C, 1 DRI DRI, µL/min, 1 DTI DTI, s, 1 FP# FP#.VOL, mL, 4 FP#.MEA, µA, 1 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.TEM, °C, 1 MI MI.VOL, mL, 4 MI.MEA, µA, 1 MI.TIM, s, 1 MI.TEM, °C, 1 MA MA.VOL, mL, 4 MA.MEA, µA, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.
PAGE 363

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 RE# RE#.DRT, mL/min, 4 RE#.DRS,mL/min, 4 RE#.DRC, "empty", 3 FP# FP#.VOL, mL, 4 FP#.MEA, mV, 3 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.TEM, °C, 1 MI MI.VOL, mL, 4 MI.MEA, mV, 3 MI.TIM, s, 1 MI.TEM, °C, 1 MA MA.VOL, mL, 4 MA.MEA, mV, 3 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM, °C, 1 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Table 19 Command MEAS pH Column 2: Variable Column 3 EME EME, pH, 3 ETE ETE, °C, 1 FP# FP#.MEA, pH, 3 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.
PAGE 364

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 ETE ETE, °C, 1 FP# FP#.MEA, µA, 1 FP#.TIM, s, 1 FP#.TEM, °C, 1 MI MI.MEA, µA, 1MI.MEA, µA, 1 MI.TIM, s, 1 MI.TEM, °C, 1 MA MA.MEA, µA, 1 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM, °C, 1 BP# BP#.MEA, µA, 1 BP#.TIM, s, 1 BP#.TEM, °C, 1 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Table 23 Command MEAS T Column 2: Variable Column 3 EME EME, °C, 1 FP# FP#.MEA, °C, 3 FP#.TIM, s, 1 MI MI.
PAGE 365

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 MA MA.MEA, mS/cm, 2 MA.TIM, s, 1 MA.TEM, °C, 1 BP# BP#.MEA, mS/cm, 2 BP#.TIM, s, 1 BP#.TEM, °C, 1 Column 5 Column 6 Column 5 Column 6 Column 5 Column 6 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Table 27 Command MEAS TC Cond Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 TC TC.MIN, %/°C, 2 TC.MAX, %/°C, 2 Table 28 Command MEAS Ref Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 PK# PK#.WVL, nm, 1 PK#.
PAGE 366

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Table 33 Command CAL Cond Column 2: Variable Column 3 CLC CLC, /cm, 3 RTE RTE, °C, 1 Table 34 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Column 6 Command CAL Spec Column 2: Variable Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 CP# CP#.REF, nm, 1 CP#.MEA, nm, 1 ± CP#.TOL, nm, 1 WL WL.C0, –, 4 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 Column 6 WL.C1, –, 4 WL.C2, –, 4 WL.C3, –, 4 WL.
PAGE 367

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database For every single result a maximum of the following information is displayed: Result "Result name" Result "Result name" Display of the result with variable name. Note Only the last results having been calculated will be shown. For example, if there are several commands that generate a result with the same name, then the corresponding result data will be shown only for that command that was the last to calculate the result. Nothing will be shown for the other commands.
PAGE 368

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.7 Subwindow Results Assignment: Assigns the result to one of the result columns RS01...RS25 in the Determination overview. Formula: Shows the formula used for calculating the result. 'Variable name': 'Displays the variables used in the formula. Note Variables that have not been created during the determination are not displayed and lead to invalid results. 4.7.
PAGE 369

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Statistics on | off (Default value: off) Shows the statistics results. Assignment on | off (Default value: on) Shows the assignment. Formula on | off (Default value: on) Shows the calculation formula. Variables on | off (Default value: off) Displays the variables used in the formula. 4.8 Curves subwindow 4.8.1 Curves - General Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves Curves subwindow The subwindows Curves 1...
PAGE 370

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow undone with a double-click on the section of the graph or with the contextsensitive menu command Show All. Note When a new determination is selected the complete curve is always shown, i.e. the zoom range is not retained when the determination is changed. Curves can be copied into the clipboard with the context-sensitive menu command Copy graphics. Show monitoring report With the context-sensitive menu item Monitoring report...
PAGE 371

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database The display of the measuring points in the table can be defined per window and per command type in the Properties - Curve # 4.8.3 Curves - Monitoring report Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves If the method contains commands of the type STAT or DOS, then with the context-sensitive menu item Monitoring report... in the curve window the dialog window Monitoring report - 'Command name' can be opened.
PAGE 372

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Stop command (only Titrando) The running STAT command was quit, then the next command was started. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current STAT command was interrupted until it was continued by a manual command. Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current STAT command was interrupted until the monitored measured value was again within the limits (including hysteresis). Afterwards reagent dosing was resumed automatically. none No action was taken.
PAGE 373

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Note When the dialog window is opened, those Command type will be selected as standard which applies for the curve shown in the curve window. Autoscaling on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then all axes in the curve window will be scaled automatically. In this case the fields Start value and End value cannot be edited. Size Selection of the quantity to be shown on the x axis.
PAGE 374

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow For BRC commands Selection Default value Time [s] | Measured value | Amount [µg] | Charge [mAs] | Drift [µg/min] | dV/dt [µ/min] | Ugen | Igen [mA] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Time [s] For MEAS commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | dMW/dt | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Default value Time [s] For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 375

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Label Freely definable axis label for the x axis. With auto the designation from the field Size will be used. Selection Default value 50 characters | auto auto Scaling Start value Initial value for scaling the x axis. Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value -1.00E+12 End value End value for scaling the x axis. Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value +1.00E+12 4.8.4.
PAGE 376

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Autoscaling on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then all axes in the curve window will be scaled automatically. In this case the fields Start value and End value cannot be edited. Size Selection of the quantity to be shown on the y1 axis. For DET commands Selection Default value Volume [mL] | Measured value | ERC | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 377

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 Default value Measured value For MEAS TC Cond commands Selection Temperature [°C] | Measured value | Time [s] | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 378

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value -1.00E+12 End value End value for scaling the y1 axis. Only editable when autoscaling is disabled. Range -1.00E+12 ... +1.00E+12 Default value +1.00E+12 Curve Curve color Selection of the color for the curve line. Selection Default value 13 colors | blue blue Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points.
PAGE 379

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database Smoothing Smoothing on | off (Default value: on) Switches smoothing on/off for the curve. Smoothing factor x axis Factor for smoothing on the x axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.01 Smoothing factor y-axis Factor for smoothing on the y axis. Range Default value 0.01 ... 1000 0.
PAGE 380

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Autoscaling on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then all axes in the curve window will be scaled automatically. In this case the fields Start value and End value cannot be edited. Size Selection of the quantity to be shown on the y2 axis. For DET commands Selection Default value Volume [mL] | Measured value | ERC | Time [s] | Temperature [°C] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 381

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4 Database For MEAS T/Flow commands Selection Time [s] | Measured value | Flow [ml/min] | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...3 | off Default value off For MEAS TC Cond commands Selection Temperature [°C] | Measured value | Time [s] | dMW/dt | Calculated 1...3 | External 1...
PAGE 382

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Selection Default value 13 colors | pink pink Symbol Selection of the symbol for the display of the individual measuring points. Not editable for MEAS Ref and MEAS Spec commands Selection 5 symbols | No symbol Default value No symbol No symbol Measuring points are not shown. Note With curves, for which the distance between to measuring points is smaller than 5 pixels, the separate measuring points are not displayed anymore, even if a symbol has been selected.
PAGE 383

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8.4.5 4 Database Curve properties - Options Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # ▶ Options Options for graphical display of curves. Command type Selection of the command type for which the curve properties are to be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved per curve window and per client.
PAGE 384

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8 Curves subwindow Background Background color Selection of the color for the curve background. Selection Default value 13 colors | white white Show endpoints Show endpoints on | off (Default value: on) If this check box is activated then the endpoints found will be shown on the curve by the symbol ♦ and labeled with EP# (potentiometric endpoint), BP# (break point), FP# (fixed endpoint), HP (HNP), MI (minimum value) or MA (maximum value).
PAGE 385

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 4.8.4.6 4 Database Curve properties - Measuring point list Dialog window: Database ▶ Curves ▶ Properties curves # ▶ Options Parameters for showing the measuring point list. Command type Selection of the command type for which the curve properties are to be defined. The curve properties defined for each command type are saved per curve window and per client.
PAGE 386

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General 5 Method 5.1 Method - General 5.1.1 Method - Definition Program part: Method Definition In tiamo a method is an instruction for processing a sample, which can be created in the program part Method and be started in the program part Workplace. Structure Each method contains tracks consisting of individual commands.
PAGE 387

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method further modifications. Methods are stored in the configuration database and globally accessible for all clients. 5.1.2 Method - Desktop Program part: Method Method Symbol Clicking on the method symbol in the vertical bar on the left opens the program part Method while, at the same time the method symbol is shown in color. The upper left corner of the symbol contains a black field displaying the number of methods currently opened (see Chapter 5.2.3, page 378).
PAGE 388

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General 5.1.3.2 Method - Menu File Program part: Method New… Create a new method (see Chapter 5.2.1, page 376). Open… Opens an existing method (see Chapter 5.2.2, page 376). Save Save the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 385). Save as… Save the selected method under a new name (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 385). Close all Close all opened methods (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 388). Close Close the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 388).
PAGE 389

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Insert Inserts the content of the clipboard (commands, tracks) above the selected command or on the right hand side of the selected track. Delete Deletes selected elements (commands, tracks). Comment… Newly enter or edit a comment on the selected command.(see Chapter 5.2.4.2.9, page 384). 5.1.3.4 Method - Menu View Program part: Method Split vertically Splits method window vertically and display two methods side by side (see Chapter 5.2.3.2, page 379).
PAGE 390

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.1 Method - General Save Save the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.6, page 385). Close Close the selected method (see Chapter 5.2.9, page 388). Method manager… Opens the method manager (see Chapter 5.3.1, page 389) Method groups… Opens the method groups manager (see Chapter 5.4.1, page 400). Print (PDF)... PDF file output of the method report (see Chapter 5.2.8, page 388). Method check Check the selected method for plausibility (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 385).
PAGE 391

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Split horizontally Splits method window horizontally and display two methods below each other (see Chapter 5.2.3.3, page 379). Unsplit Undoes the splitting of the method window (see Chapter 5.2.3.1, page 379). Logout… Logout user (see Chapter 2.2.3, page 16). tiamo Help Open tiamo Help. 5.1.
PAGE 392

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2 Method editor 5.2.1 Creating new method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ New… With the symbol or with the menu item File ▶ New... the window New method is opened in which a method template can be selected for the new method. Templates Selection Default value Method templates | Blank method Blank method Method templates Selecting a method template as a basis for creating a new method.
PAGE 393

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Name Name of the method. Saved Date and time when the method was saved. User Short name of the user who saved the method. Full name Full name of the user who saved the method. Version Version number of the method. Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. Level 1 The method has been signed electronically at level 1.
PAGE 394

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor program; the number of currently opened methods is displayed in the left upper corner of the method symbol. Note A maximum of 9 methods can be opened but only two can be displayed at the same time (see Chapter 5.2.3.1, page 379). 5.2.3 Select method Program part: Method The number of the currently opened methods is displayed in the left upper corner of the method symbol.
PAGE 395

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2.3.1 5 Method Display single method Menu item: Method ▶ View ▶ Unsplit In the default settings, the most recently opened method is displayed singularly in the main window. If the display of two methods is switched on, the display can be changed to only one method with the icon menu item View ▶ Unsplit. 5.2.3.
PAGE 396

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor Selection 5.2.4 5.2.4.1 Fit to window Adjust to both height and width of the window. Edit method Edit tracks Program part: Method The following functions for tracks are available for a method currently opened in the main window: 5.2.4.1.1 Insert new track Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New track... With the icon or the menu item Insert ▶ New track...
PAGE 397

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2.4.1.3 5 Method Move track Program part: Method ▶ Method window Move track with Drag&Drop To move a track with Drag&Drop it has to be selected first. It can then be moved to the desired position with left mouse button pressed. A red vertical arrow indicates the possible positions. Move track via the clipboard To move a track via the clipboard it has to be cut first. It can then be inserted to the right of the selected track. 5.2.4.1.
PAGE 398

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2.4.1.5 Cut track Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Cut The selected track is moved to the clipboard with Edit ▶ Cut, the contextsensitive menu item Cut or with the icon 5.2.4.1.6 . Insert track Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Insert The track copied to the clipboard is inserted to the right of the selected track with Edit ▶ Paste, the context-sensitive menu item Paste or with the icon . 5.2.4.1.
PAGE 399

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭ ProcessLab DIGITAL IN, DIGITAL OUT, ANALOG IN, ANALOG OUT, STEPPING MOTOR, PORT The new command is inserted above the selected command after confirming the selection with [OK]. 5.2.4.2.2 Select command Subwindow: Method A command is selected with a left mouse click. The selected command is marked with a black border. Further commands within the same track can be selected by pressing-down the Ctrl key while clicking on the desired command with the left mouse button.
PAGE 400

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2.4.2.5 Cut command Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Cut The selected commands are moved to the clipboard with Edit ▶ Cut the context-sensitive menu item Cut or with the icon 5.2.4.2.6 . Insert command Menu item: Method ▶ Edit ▶ Insert The commands copied to the clipboard are inserted above the selected command with Edit ▶ Insert, the context-sensitive menu item Insert or with the icon . 5.2.4.2.
PAGE 401

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command without comment 5.2.5 Command with comment Checking method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method check With the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method check a method check for the method in focus is triggered.
PAGE 402

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor comment) the table can be sorted according to the selected column in increasing or decreasing order. Name Name of the method. Saved Date and time when the method was saved. User Short name of the user who saved the method. Full name Full name of the user who saved the method. Version Version number of the method. Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed.
PAGE 403

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note The method name must be unique in the whole Client/Server system. [Save] Save the selected method under the desired method name in the selected method group. The method check is automatically carried out before saving the method - it can also be started manually at any time (see Chapter 5.2.5, page 385). The method is checked as thoroughly as possible.
PAGE 404

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.2 Method editor 5.2.8 Print method report Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Print (PDF)… With menu item File ▶ Print (PDF)… or the symbol the window Print method reports (PDF) is opened in which the desired report for the selected method can be selected and output as PDF file. Report selection Selection of the method report to be put out.
PAGE 405

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 5.3 Managing methods 5.3.1 Managing methods Dialog window Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager… ▶ Method manager With the symbol or with File ▶ Method manager... the dialog window Method manager is opened where a user with the corresponding access right is allowed to manage the methods. Method group Method group Selection of the Method group for which the methods should be displayed in the table.
PAGE 406

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Signed Display if and at which level the method has been signed. Selection no | Level 1 | Level 2 no The method has not been signed. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. Level 1 The method has been signed electronically at level 1. It can be opened for editing and also deleted. If the method is edited and saved again, a new version is created and all the signatures will be deleted. Level 2 The method has been signed electronically at level 2.
PAGE 407

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Show signatures… Show all signatures of the selected method (see Chapter 5.3.10.4, page 397). Delete signatures 2… Delete all signatures at level 2 of the selected method (see Chapter 2.3.5, page 22). [History] Opens the dialog window Method history of the selected method (see Chapter 5.3.11, page 399). [Exit] Closes the dialog window and saves entries. 5.3.2 Renaming method Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Manage method... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Rename...
PAGE 408

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Method group Selection of the method group to which the selected methods should be moved. Method groups Selection Note Locked methods (methods signed at Level 2) cannot be moved. 5.3.5 Deleting method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete The selected methods and all method versions are deleted with the menu item [Edit] ▶ Delete....
PAGE 409

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3.7 5 Method Exporting a method Menu item: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Edit] ▶ Export… The selected methods can each be exported as a file named 'Method name'.mmet with the menu item Edit ▶ Export.... The window Select directory for export opens in which the directory for export must be selected. Note The exported methods are stored uncoded but with a checksum. If a file stored in this manner is manipulated, then it cannot be imported again. 5.3.
PAGE 410

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Note The method name must be unique in the whole Client/Server system. Locked methods cannot be renamed. Renaming the method is not regarded as modification i.e. the method version does not change. 5.3.10 5.3.10.1 Signing methods Rules for electronic signatures Program parts: Method / Database In tiamo, methods and determination can be electronically signed at two levels.
PAGE 411

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3.10.2 5 Method Signature Level 1 Dialog window:Database ▶ Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 or Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method Manager... ▶ Method Manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Signature 1... ▶ Signature Level 1 Methods or determinations can be signed at Level 1 in the Signature Level 1 window. Note Methods or determinations which have been signed at Level 1 can be changed and deleted.
PAGE 412

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Reason Selection from the Default reasons defined in the Security Settings dialog window for the category Signature level 1. Selection from the Default reasons Selection Comment Entry of comment on the signature. 1000 characters Input [Sign] Sign method or determination. The window remains open. Note Methods or determinations can only be signed at Level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 5.3.10.
PAGE 413

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Signature 2 not possible (signature 1 missing) The selected method or determination cannot be signed at Level 2 as it has not yet been signed at Level 1. Signature not possible (accessed by other client) The selected method or determination cannot be signed as it is already marked to be signed on a different client. User Entry of the user name (short name). 24 characters Input Password Password entry.
PAGE 414

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.3 Managing methods Signature date Date and time at which the method was signed. User Short name of the user who signed the method. Full name Full name of the user who signed the method. Reason Reason for signature. Signature comment Comment on the signature. 5.3.10.5 Delete Signature Level 2 Dialog window:Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [Sign] ▶ Delete signatures 2...
PAGE 415

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Delete] Delete Signatures 2. Note Signatures 2 can only be deleted if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization. 5.3.11 Showing method history Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method manager... ▶ Method manager ▶ [History] ▶ Method history The dialog window [Method history] showing a table with all versions of the selected method is opened with the button History. Name Name of the method. Version Version number of the method.
PAGE 416

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.4 Method groups [Make current] Restores the selected method version as the current method version. This creates a new method whose version number is increased by +1 compared with the last version to have been saved 5.4 Method groups 5.4.1 Manage method groups Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method groups… ▶ Method groups With the symbol or with the menu item File ▶ Method groups...
PAGE 417

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Delete] Deleting the selected method group. 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 Edit method groups Method groups - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ File ▶ Method groups... ▶ Method groups ▶ Properties Method group 'Name' The properties window [Properties - Method group 'Name'] for the selected method group is opened with the button Properties or by doubleclicking on the line in the table. The parameters for the method groups are configured on the following tabs: ￭￭ 5.4.2.
PAGE 418

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks Note The user group Administrators always has both access rights, i.e. they cannot be disabled. User group Names of the user groups Execute on | off (Default value: on) Authorization to start methods from a method group. Methods in this group can only be opened and started but can not be edited or deleted. Edit on | off (Default value: on) Authorization to edit methods from a method group. Methods in this group can be opened, started, edited and deleted.
PAGE 419

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Presentation The individual tracks are arranged side by side in the method window. The track name is displayed in the START or TRACK command, respectively, as well as in the END command. 5.5.2 5.5.2.1 Track types Main track Subwindow: Method The main track contains the main sequence of the method and exists in each method. It starts with a (see Chapter 5.6.2.2, page 413) and finishes with an (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 427).
PAGE 420

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks 5.5.2.2 Normal track Subwindow: Method A normal track is a track that can be created manually by the user with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Normal track or with the icon . It starts with a start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.3, page 423) and finishes with an end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 427). Normal tracks can be called up with the command CALL and entering the corresponding name. Branching and parallel processes can be implemented this way.
PAGE 421

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭ Parallel running normal track If the check box Return immediately in the (see Chapter 5.6.2.3, page 423) command is activated, then the corresponding command will be be highlighted with an arrow (see below). The execution of the commands in the normal track is started when this track is called, but it sends an acknowledgement immediately to the track containing the corresponding (see Chapter 5.6.10.3, page 1152) command.
PAGE 422

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks 5.5.2.4 Series end track Subwindow: Method A series end track is a track that can be created manually with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Series end track or with the icon . It starts with a start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.5, page 425) and finishes with an end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 427). Only one series end track can be inserted per method.
PAGE 423

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5.2.5 5 Method Exit track Subwindow: Method An exit track is a track that can be created manually with Paste ▶ New track... ▶ Exit track or with the icon . It starts with the start command (see Chapter 5.6.2.6, page 426) and finishes with a end command (see Chapter 5.6.2.8, page 427). Only one exit track can be inserted per method. The exit track is executed as soon as all normal tracks and the main track have finished or if the determination has been stopped manually.
PAGE 424

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.5 Tracks The error track is executed if the determination is stopped due to an error. In this case the error track takes over the function of the Main track. Normal tracks can be called from error tracks as well. 5.5.3 Edit tracks Subwindow: Method The following functions for tracks are available for a method currently opened in the main window: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 408 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Insert new track Select track Move track Copy track Cut track Insert track Delete track tiamo 2.
PAGE 425

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 5.6 Commands 5.6.1 Commands - General 5.6.1.1 Definition and Presentation Subwindow: Method Definition A command is a part of a track with the following general properties: ￭￭ Command type Each Command type defines the function of the command. The designqtion of the command type (short description in capital letters) cannot be changed. Command name Each command has a freely selectable command name which must be unique within the method.
PAGE 426

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭ 5.6.1.2 Green Titration and measurement commands Yellow Sample Processor and dosing commands Blue All other commands Edit commands Subwindow: Method The following processing functions for commands are available for a method currently opened in the main window: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.1.
PAGE 427

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method CALC Calculation of intermediate and end results, titer values and common variables. CALL Calling tracks (subprograms). CTRL Setting remote output lines. DATABASE Storage of the determination data in data bases. DET Dynamic Equivalence Point Titrations. DIGITAL IN Reading in all analog inputs. DIGITAL OUT Reading in all analog inputs. DOS pH Controlled dosing with the measured quantity pH.
PAGE 428

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 412 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ MET Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations. MOVE Moving to a rack position or an external position. PORT Change the port position on a multi-port valve PREP Preparing a exchange or dosing unit. PUMP Switching on/off the connected or built-in pumps. RACK Initialization of the rack attached. RECEIVE Waiting for event messages or status messages. REPORT Output of a report defined by a report template.
PAGE 429

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.2 5.6.2.1 STEPPING MOTOR Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution. STIR Controlling a connected stirrer. SWING Swinging of the robotic arm (with Swing Head only). TRACK Start command for normal track. TRANSFER Data transfer via RS-232 to external devices or programs. WAIT Interrupts the method run. WEIGH Interrupts the method run. Track commands Track commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New track...
PAGE 430

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command START are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General General settings for the method run. Application note Writing an application note which is displayed when starting a determination. Method variables Configuring method and sample variables which are to be available for the method. Command variables No command variables are generated in the method run by the START command.
PAGE 431

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.2.2.2 5 Method Identification Description Sample position.VAL Value of 'Sample position' (Number) Sample position.OVF Exceeding limit for 'sample position' (Number) ID1 (…3).VAL Value of 'ID1…3' (Text) ID1 (…3).OVF Exceeding limit for 'ID…3' (Number) START - General Tab: Method ▶ START ▶ Properties... ▶ START 'Command name' ▶ General Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 432

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Main track | Selection of available tracks Main track Live display 2 Selection of the track to be displayed in the subwindow Live display 2. Selection Default value Main track | Selection of available tracks Main track Statistics on | off (Default value: off) If this parameter is switched on, then the statistic functions defined in the CALC command will be calculated.
PAGE 433

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method track with the conditioning command. This parameter must be switched off for automation applications. 5.6.2.2.3 START - Application note Tab: Method ▶ START ▶ Properties... ▶ START 'Command name' ▶ Application note Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The application note defined in the text window is displayed in the tab Application note in the subwindow Live display of the program part Workplace.
PAGE 434

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the method variable selected in the table. 5.6.2.2.5 START - Method variables (Properties) Dialog window: Method ▶ START ▶ Properties... ▶ START 'Command name' ▶ Method variable ▶ [Properties] ▶ Method variable - 'Name' Definition of the method variable Name Freely selectable name of the method variable which must be unique within the method. 50 characters Input Type Selection of the variable type.
PAGE 435

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Fixed value on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the method variables can be assigned a fixed value. For variables of the type Date/Time, the date must be entered in the dialog window 2.5.1Select date. No formulas can be entered in this field. Type = Number Range -1.0E-99 ... 1.
PAGE 436

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Lower limit Lower limit for the variable. Type = Number Input 10 digits Type = Date/Time Selection 'Date' Upper limit Upper limit for the variable. Type = Number Input 10 digits Type = Date/Time Selection 'Date' Message Note Is displayed only for method variables of the types Number or Date/ Time. The message defined here can be output to different targets if the upper limit is exceeded or if the lower limit is not reached.
PAGE 437

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be sent to the address defined under if the result limits are exceeded. [E-mail] Opens the window Send E-mail for defining the E-mail parameters (see Chapter 5.6.2.2.6, page 422).
PAGE 438

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.2.2.6 Send E-mail Dialog window: Send E-mail Use E-mail template on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the E-mail parameters are loaded from an Email template; if not, then these parameters must be entered. Parameter for "Use E-mail template = on" Subject Subject to describe the message.
PAGE 439

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Mail from E-Mail address of the sender. Input 200 characters SMTP server Address of SMTP mail server. Input 200 characters POP3 server Address of POP3 mail server. Input 5.6.2.3 200 characters TRACK Dialog window: Method ▶ TRACK ▶ Properties.. ▶ TRACK 'Command name' Start command for normal track. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 440

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Delete old data on | off (Default value: off) All data previously generated by a track will be deleted at each new start of this track when this option is activated. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command TRACK and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.2.4 Identification Description .
PAGE 441

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SERIE START and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.2.5 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .
PAGE 442

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.2.6 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended EXIT Dialog window: Method ▶ EXIT ▶ Properties.. ▶ EXIT 'Command name' Start command for exit track.
PAGE 443

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.2.7 5 Method ERROR Dialog window: Method ▶ ERROR ▶ Properties.. ▶ ERROR 'Command name' Start command for error track. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Live display on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the track will be shown in the live display.
PAGE 444

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The END command does not have any parameters. It is created automatically at the end of a track when a new track is inserted. Command variables No command variables are generated in the method run by the END command. 5.6.3 5.6.3.1 Titration commands Titration commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New command... Commands for titrations. Modes The following titration commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2 5.6.3.2.
PAGE 445

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method curve. An attempt is made to achieve constant measured value modifications with each dosing. The optimal volume for dosing is determined from the measured value modifications of the previous dosings. Measured value acceptance is drift-controlled (equilibrium titration) or after a waiting time. Note As the reagent addition in DET depends on the measuring data, the titration curve should not vary too much from an S-shaped curve.
PAGE 446

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The figure shows that the evaluation also requires measuring points from the measuring point list after the equivalence point as well. For the recognition of the EPs found, the set EP criterion is compared with the ERC (Equivalence point Recognition Criterion) found. The ERC is the first derivative of the titration curve combined with a mathematical function which is more sensitive for flat jumps than for steeper ones.
PAGE 447

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.2 5 Method DET pH 5.6.3.2.2.1 DET pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties.. ▶ DET pH - 'Command name' Command for dynamic equivalence point titrations with potentiometric pH measurement.
PAGE 448

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 432 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{x}.ERC ERC or first derivative for the break point × (1…9) .BP{x}.MEA Measured value for the break point × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{x}.TEM Temperature for the break point × (1…9) in °C .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point × (1…9) in s .BP{x}.VOL Volume for the break point × (1…9) in mL .
PAGE 449

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.ERC ERC for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .
PAGE 450

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 434 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.
PAGE 451

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command DET pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 452

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 453

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected.
PAGE 454

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855. Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command.
PAGE 455

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 456

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value pH Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -20.000 ... 20.
PAGE 457

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.2.2.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s DET pH - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 458

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.
PAGE 459

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Dosing of increments Note The following parameters will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measuring point density A small value means small volume increments, i.e. a high measuring point density.
PAGE 460

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 9999.9 µL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature.
PAGE 461

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.
PAGE 462

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.2.2.
PAGE 463

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) With this option set up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized.
PAGE 464

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (pH) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows.
PAGE 465

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.2.7 5 Method DET pH - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 466

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/mL 1.
PAGE 467

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer break-points will be found.
PAGE 468

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Measured value pH Range -20.0 ... 20.0 pH Default value 20.0 pH Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.
PAGE 469

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 5.6.3.2.2.8 -20.000 ... 20.000 20.000 DET pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
PAGE 470

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.2.2.
PAGE 471

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
PAGE 472

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 473

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.3 5 Method Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL DET U 5.6.3.2.3.1 DET U - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ DET U - 'Command name' Command for dynamic equivalence point titrations with potentiometric voltage measurement.
PAGE 474

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DET U and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 458 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .
PAGE 475

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EP{x}.TIM Time in s until the endpoint × (1…9) is reached .EP{x}.VOL Volume for the endpoint × (1…9) in mL .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.
PAGE 476

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 460 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
PAGE 477

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.3.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVM Start volume measured value (volume which was added according to the start measured value given in the start conditions) in mL .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .
PAGE 478

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 479

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
PAGE 480

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
PAGE 481

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 482

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ...
PAGE 483

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.
PAGE 484

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands fast For less critical rapid titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.
PAGE 485

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.
PAGE 486

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands if the change of direction in the potential jump region is very abrupt, as otherwise it is easy to add too large a volume in the equivalence point region. The value should not be less than 1/100 cylinder volume. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 9999.9 µL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
PAGE 487

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.3.5 5 Method DET U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
PAGE 488

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ...
PAGE 489

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Potentiometric evaluation Selection Default value Evaluation without window | Evaluation with measured value window (U) | Evaluation with volume window (mL) Evaluation without window Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve.
PAGE 490

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized. ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off.
PAGE 491

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.3.7 5 Method DET U - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 492

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
PAGE 493

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found.
PAGE 494

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.
PAGE 495

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.3.8 5 Method DET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 496

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.2.3.9 DET U - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ DET U ▶ Properties...
PAGE 497

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 498

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 499

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.4 5 Method Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL DET Ipol 5.6.3.2.4.1 DET Ipol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ DET Ipol - 'Command name' Command for Dynamic Equivalence Point Titrations with voltametric measurement (selectable polarization voltage).
PAGE 500

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭ Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DET Ipol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
PAGE 501

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.ERC ERC for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.
PAGE 502

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 486 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.
PAGE 503

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command DET Ipol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab.
PAGE 504

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 1 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 505

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination.
PAGE 506

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used.
PAGE 507

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.4.3 5 Method DET Ipol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
PAGE 508

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
PAGE 509

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started.
PAGE 510

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.4.4 DET Ipol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The parameters for the running of the titration are defined on this tab.
PAGE 511

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min.
PAGE 512

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing of increments Note The following parameters will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measuring point density A small value means small volume increments, i.e. a high measuring point density. The curve then shows all the finest details which also include noise; this could cause unwanted equivalence points to be found. A larger value, i.e. a smaller measuring point density, permits quicker titrations.
PAGE 513

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously.
PAGE 514

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 100,000 mL off Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.000 ... 9999.99 mL 100.00 mL off Stop measured value Stops when the preset value for a measuring point has been exceeded or not achieved since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
PAGE 515

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.2.4.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 516

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) With this option set, up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized. Per window only one EP will be recognized.
PAGE 517

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Titrino Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 518

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The following additional methods for evaluation of titration curves can be activated and defined on this tab: Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence).
PAGE 519

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
PAGE 520

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | Volume | Time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.
PAGE 521

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.4, page 857). Initial volume Volume which must be present in the measuring vessel before the command is started. Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.99 mL 50.
PAGE 522

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 523

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.2.4.9 5 Method DET Ipol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window (Ipol) ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
PAGE 524

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
PAGE 525

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 526

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.5 5.6.3.2.5.1 Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL DET Upol DET Upol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ DET Upol - 'Command name' Command for Dynamic Equivalence Point Titrations with amperometric measurement (selectable polarization voltage). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
PAGE 527

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DET Upol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .BP{x}.
PAGE 528

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 512 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.ERC ERC for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.
PAGE 529

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.
PAGE 530

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.2.5.2 DET Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 531

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 532

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ...
PAGE 533

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
PAGE 534

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 99.90 µA/min 20.00 (slow), 50.00 (optimal), 80.00 (fast) µA/ min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.05 ... 99.90 µA/min 20.00 (slow), 50.00 (optimal), 80.00 (fast) µA/ min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min.
PAGE 535

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855.
PAGE 536

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 99 µA/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached.
PAGE 537

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for the Measured value acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
PAGE 538

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.05 ... 99.90 µA/min 20.00 (slow), 50.00 (optimal), 80.00 (fast) µA/ min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached.
PAGE 539

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring point density A small value means small volume increments, i.e. a high measuring point density. The curve then shows all the finest details which also include noise; this could cause unwanted equivalence points to be found. A larger value, i.e. a smaller measuring point density, permits quicker titrations. If you are using a dosing device with a small cylinder volume then a smaller measuring point density value may be beneficial.
PAGE 540

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. This value is used for temperature correction in pH measurements. 5.6.3.2.5.5 Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.
PAGE 541

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop measured value Stops when the preset value for a measuring point has been exceeded or not achieved since the start of the titration. Range Selection -200.0 ... 200.0 µA off Stop EP The titration is stopped when the specified number of equivalence points has been found. Range Default value Selection 1 ... 9 9 off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added.
PAGE 542

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 5.6.3.2.5.6 maximum maximum DET Upol - Potentiometric evaluation Tab: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters for the potentiometric evaluation of the titration curve with automatic equivalence point recognition.
PAGE 543

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrino Selection Default value all | greatest | last | off all Titrando, 855 Selection Default value all | greatest | last | ascending | descending | off all all All equivalence points will be recognized. greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 544

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. Evaluation with volume window (mL) [New] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.5.10, page 534). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.5.10, page 534). [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. 5.6.3.2.5.
PAGE 545

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.2.5.11, page 535). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 546

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Break-point evaluation on | off (Default value: off) A break-point evaluation is used to determine sharp changes of direction in the titration curve. EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found. As this is a relative value related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range.
PAGE 547

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -200.0 ... 200.0 µA Default value 200.0 µA Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855.
PAGE 548

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value 5.6.3.2.5.8 -200.0 ... 200.0 µA 200.0 µA DET Upol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ DET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 549

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.EX1…3'[New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859).
PAGE 550

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
PAGE 551

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 200 5 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 552

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3 5.6.3.3.1 Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL MET MET - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Command for Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations. Principle With this command titrations with reagent addition at constant volume increments are carried out. Measured value acceptance is drift-controlled (equilibrium titration) or after a waiting time.
PAGE 553

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method VEP = EP volume, V0 = total volume added before ∆n, ∆V = volume increment,ρ = interpolation factor according to Fortuin For the recognition of the EPs found, the set EP criterion is compared with the ERC (Equivalence point Recognition Criterion) found. The ERC is the sum of the measured value modifications before and after the jump: |∆n-2|+|∆n-1|+|∆n|+|∆n+1|+|∆n+2| (In certain cases, only three or only one summand is taken into account.
PAGE 554

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MET pH are configured in the following 7 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration.
PAGE 555

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode zero point of the sensor used for the command (dimensionless) .EP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the endpoint × (1…9) .EP{x}.MEA Measured value for the endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .EP{x}.
PAGE 556

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 540 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .HP{x}.MEA Measured value for the HNP × (1…9) in mV (HNP = half neutralization potential) .HP{x}.TEM Temperature for the HNP × (1…9) in °C .HP{x}.TIM Time in s until the HNP × (1…9) is reached .HP{x}.VOL Volume for the HNP × (1…9) in mL .IGF Initial gas flow (measured value at the time of the start of the command) in mL/min .
PAGE 557

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .
PAGE 558

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 559

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method of the working life, the validity of the titer and the GLP test interval for the selected solution. Selection Default value 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff.
PAGE 560

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 561

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 562

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 563

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method maximum Selection Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 9.999 pH/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached.
PAGE 564

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for the Measured value acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
PAGE 565

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.0 (fast) mV/min off off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached.
PAGE 566

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Volume increment Small volume increments are used for the determination of blank values or for very asymmetrical curves. A good guideline is 1/20 of the expected EP volume. For steep jumps the volume increment should tend toward 1/100 and for flat jumps toward 1/10 of the EP volume. Small volume increments are used for determining blank values or with very asymmetrical curves.
PAGE 567

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5.6.3.3.2.5 5 Method -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C MET pH - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration.
PAGE 568

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop EP The titration is stopped when the specified number of equivalence points has been found. Range Default value Selection 1 ... 9 9 off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.
PAGE 569

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.2.6 5 Method MET pH - Potentiometric evaluation Tab: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters for the potentiometric evaluation of the titration curve with automatic equivalence point recognition are defined on this tab.
PAGE 570

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrino Selection Default value all | greatest | last | off all Titrando, 855 Selection Default value all | greatest | last | ascending | descending | off all all All equivalence points will be recognized. greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 571

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Volume window # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.2.10, page 561). [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.2.7 MET pH - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 572

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands pK/HNP evaluation pK/HNP evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the pK value is determined from the titration curve which corresponds to the pH value at the half neutralization point (see Chapter 5.6.3.9.1, page 854).
PAGE 573

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Break-point evaluation on | off (Default value: off) A break-point evaluation is used to determine sharp changes of direction in the titration curve. EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found. As this is a relative value related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range.
PAGE 574

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value pH Range -20.0 ... 20.0 pH Default value 20.0 pH Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855.
PAGE 575

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Lower limit pH Value for the lower limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 -20.000 Upper limit pH Value for the upper limit of the Gran evaluation range. Range Default value 5.6.3.3.2.8 -20.000 ... 20.000 20.000 MET pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 576

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 577

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 9.99 0.50 EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 578

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL EP criterion pH Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 9.99 0.
PAGE 579

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.3.3 Measured value Range -20.000 ... 20.000 pH Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL MET U 5.6.3.3.3.1 MET U - Overview Dialog window: Dialog window ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ MET U - 'Command name' Command for Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations with potentiometric voltage measurement.
PAGE 580

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭ Potentiometric evaluation Parameters for the potentiometric evaluation of titration curves. Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
PAGE 581

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method .EP{x}.MEP Quantity of endpoints in the window × (1…9); 1 = 1 endpoint, 2 = 2 or more endpoints, 3 = EP corrected with Autodrift, 4 = EP corrected with manual drift .EP{x}.TEM Temperature for the endpoint × (1…9) in °C .EP{x}.TIM Time in s until the endpoint × (1…9) is reached .EP{x}.VOL Volume for the endpoint × (1…9) in mL .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .
PAGE 582

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 566 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.DME Measured value differential for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 583

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.3.2 5 Method .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVM Start volume measured value (volume which was added according to the start measured value given in the start conditions) in mL .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .
PAGE 584

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 585

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
PAGE 586

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
PAGE 587

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 588

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started. If the start measured value is achieved by the addition of a start volume, then titration will start directly. Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ...
PAGE 589

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Default value Selection 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 5.00 mL/min maximum Pause Pause Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.
PAGE 590

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands fast For less critical rapid titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Measured value acceptance Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Measured value drift Drift for the measured value acceptance during the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 20.0 (slow), 50.0 (optimal), 80.
PAGE 591

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.0 (fast) s Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 9999 s 38.0 (slow), 26.0 (optimal), 21.
PAGE 592

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously.
PAGE 593

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 100,000 mL off Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.000 ... 9999.99 mL 100.00 mL off Stop measured value Stops when the preset value for a measuring point has been exceeded or not achieved since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
PAGE 594

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.3.3.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 595

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation with measured value window (U) With this option set, up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized. Per window only one EP will be recognized.
PAGE 596

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (U) [New] Opens the dialog window Measured value # in which the parameters for a new window can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.3.9, page 586). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Measured value # in which the parameters for the selected window can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.3.3.
PAGE 597

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list.
PAGE 598

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
PAGE 599

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method related to the total measured value alteration, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break-point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found.
PAGE 600

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Default value 2000.0 mV Window = Volume Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 9999.99 mL Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.
PAGE 601

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.3.8 5 Method MET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
PAGE 602

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.3.9 MET U - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET U ▶ Properties...
PAGE 603

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
PAGE 604

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of endpoints. Endpoints whose discovered ERC value is smaller than the value entered here will not be recognized. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 1 ... 999 mV 30 mV EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized.
PAGE 605

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4 5 Method Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Volume Range 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL MET Ipol 5.6.3.3.4.1 MET Ipol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ MET Ipol - 'Command name' Command for Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations with voltametric measurement (selectable polarization current). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
PAGE 606

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MET Ipol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 590 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the break point × (1… 9) .
PAGE 607

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.
PAGE 608

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 592 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
PAGE 609

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVS Start volume slope (volume that was added according to the start condition "start slope") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command MET Ipol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 610

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 611

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.0 µA (Increment: 0.
PAGE 612

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 613

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 614

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 615

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method maximum Selection Start slope Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999 mV/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached.
PAGE 616

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for the Measured value acceptance and Dosing of increments of these sets are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
PAGE 617

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off Measured value acceptance will take place after the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 (slow, optimal, fast) ...
PAGE 618

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands as the measured value alterations between two measuring points are then of the same order of magnitude as the noise. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0001 ... 9.9999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Titrino Range Default value 0.001 ... 9.999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
PAGE 619

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.4.5 5 Method MET Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
PAGE 620

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection off Volume after EP When the number of equivalence points defined under Stop EP has been found, this volume will be added. In this way you can see the curve shape after the equivalence point is reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01000 ... 9999.99 mL off off Stop time Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ...
PAGE 621

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Potentiometric evaluation Selection Default value Evaluation without window | Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) | Evaluation with volume window (mL) Evaluation without window Evaluation without window With this option set, the two parameters EP criterion and EP recognition will be applied across the entire range of the titration curve.
PAGE 622

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands all All equivalence points will be recognized. greatest Only the equivalence point with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last equivalence point to be found will be recognized. ascending Only equivalence points with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off.
PAGE 623

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Delete] Deletes the window selected in the table. 5.6.3.3.4.7 MET Ipol - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 624

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.0 mV/mL Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 625

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break-point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis.
PAGE 626

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.4, page 857). Initial volume Volume which must be present in the measuring vessel before the command is started. Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.
PAGE 627

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 628

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3.4.9 MET Ipol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window (Ipol) ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window# Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
PAGE 629

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.4.
PAGE 630

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands EP recognition Filter for the recognition of equivalence points: Titrando, 855 Selection Default value first | greatest | last | ascending | descending first first Only the first endpoint to be found will be recognized. greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized.
PAGE 631

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5 5 Method MET Upol 5.6.3.3.5.1 MET Upol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ MET Upol - 'Command name' Command for Monotonic Equivalence Point Titrations with amperometric measurement (selectable polarization voltage). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
PAGE 632

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 616 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the break point × (1… 9) .BP{x}.MEA Measured value for the break point × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{x}.TEM Temperature for the break point × (1…9) in °C .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point × (1…9) in s .BP{x}.VOL Volume for the break point × (1…9) in mL .
PAGE 633

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FP{x}.DME Measured value differential for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .GP.VOL Volume for the Gran endpoint in mL .GP.
PAGE 634

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 618 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.VOL Volume for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mL .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.
PAGE 635

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.3.5.2 5 Method MET Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 636

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 637

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ... 1270 mV (Increment: 10) 400 mV Electrode test on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then an electrode test will be carried out for polarizable electrodes during the transition from an inactive condition to a measurement.
PAGE 638

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
PAGE 639

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
PAGE 640

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Start measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. Start measured value Once the start measured value is reached, the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the next start condition is processed or the titration is started.
PAGE 641

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Start slope When the start slope is reached the dosing of the start volume is stopped and the titration is started. If the start slope is achieved by the dosing of a start volume then the titration starts directly. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 99 µA/mL off off Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is added until the start slope is reached. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used.
PAGE 642

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible. This could however also lead to an increase in noise, which could result in unwanted EPs. optimal Parameter set for all standard titrations; optimized for the most frequent applications. fast For less critical rapid titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate.
PAGE 643

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 (slow, optimal, fast) ... 999999 s 0 (slow, optimal, fast) s Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed.
PAGE 644

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 0.001 ... 9.999 mL 0.05 (slow), 0.10 (optimal), 0.20 (fast) mL Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 645

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions). The stop volume should be adapted to suit the sample weight or the titration vessel size. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection 0.00000 ... 9999.
PAGE 646

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.3.5.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 647

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) With this option set, up to 9 regions (windows) can be defined on the measured value axis. Only those equivalence points which lie within these windows and additionally meet the parameters defined for each window will be recognized. Per window only one EP will be recognized.
PAGE 648

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands descending Only equivalence points with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. off Equivalence point recognition is switched off. Evaluation with measured value window (Upol) EP criterion Criterion for the recognition of equivalence points which is valid for all windows. Equivalence points whose ERC is smaller than the set EP criterion will not be recognized. Titrino Range Default value 0.1 ... 99.9 µA 2.
PAGE 649

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The following additional methods for evaluation of titration curves can be activated and defined on this tab: Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence).
PAGE 650

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.
PAGE 651

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis, on the volume axis or on the time axis. The break-point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break-point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | Volume | Time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -200.0 ... 200.0 µA Default value -200.
PAGE 652

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Gran evaluation Note This evaluation method is possible only with Titrando and 855. Gran evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then titration curves will be evaluated in accordance with the Gran Plot procedure(see Chapter 5.6.3.9.4, page 857). Initial volume Volume which is present in the measuring vessel before the command is started. Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.99 mL 50.
PAGE 653

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 654

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.3.5.9 MET Upol - Measured value window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with measured value window ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Measured value window# Measured value windows are regions on the measured value axis for which different parameters for potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
PAGE 655

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.5.10 MET Upol - Volume window Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Potentiometric evaluation ▶ Evaluation with volume window ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Volume window # Volume windows are defined sub-regions (windows) on the volume axis for which different parameters for the potentiometric evaluation can be defined.
PAGE 656

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands greatest Only the endpoint with the greatest ERC value, i.e. the steepest jump, will be recognized. last Only the last endpoint to be found will be recognized. ascending Only endpoints with a positive slope of the titration curve will be recognized. descending Only endpoints with a negative slope of the titration curve will be recognized. 5.6.3.3.5.11 MET Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ MET Upol ▶ Properties...
PAGE 657

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method or after a waiting period. The volume that has been added when the endpoint is reached gives the calculable reagent consumption. Reagent addition takes place in three phases during the titration: ￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Initial dosing During this phase the dosing rate increases continuously. It starts with the Min. rate and increases to the Max. rate. Continuous dosing In this phase addition is carried out at the Max. rate until the Control range is reached.
PAGE 658

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note This command is used for rapid routine determinations when the endpoint does not change throughout a series or when an excess of reagent must be avoided. Commands Depending on the measured value one of the following four SET commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.2 SET pH Potentiometric pH measurement with pH electrodes (measured quantity pH). SET U Potentiometric voltage measurement with metal electrodes (measured quantity voltage U).
PAGE 659

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.3 5 Method SET pH 5.6.3.4.3.1 SET pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ SET pH - 'Command name' Command for Set Endpoint Titrations with potentiometric pH measurement.
PAGE 660

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SET pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 644 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .
PAGE 661

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.
PAGE 662

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.2 Identification Description .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .
PAGE 663

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 664

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands of the working life, the validity of the titer and the GLP test interval for the selected solution. Selection Default value 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff.
PAGE 665

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 666

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 667

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
PAGE 668

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.4 SET pH - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 at pH Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -20.00 ... 20.
PAGE 669

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics pH Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
PAGE 670

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time.
PAGE 671

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
PAGE 672

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.5 SET pH - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
PAGE 673

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.3.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET pH - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 674

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.3.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 675

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
PAGE 676

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
PAGE 677

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 663). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 663). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
PAGE 678

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.3.9 SET pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 679

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.3.10 SET pH - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET pH ▶ Properties...
PAGE 680

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET U are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
PAGE 681

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .CBY Command status; 1 = Conditioning activated, 0 = Conditioning deactivated .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .
PAGE 682

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 666 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 683

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SLO Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .
PAGE 684

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed.
PAGE 685

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes.
PAGE 686

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished.
PAGE 687

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 688

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
PAGE 689

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.4 5 Method SET U - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 with Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
PAGE 690

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
PAGE 691

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been turned off.
PAGE 692

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
PAGE 693

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.5 5 Method SET U - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the running of the titration are defined on this tab. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
PAGE 694

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.4.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration.
PAGE 695

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.4.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 696

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
PAGE 697

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
PAGE 698

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.4.10, page 684). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.4.10, page 684). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
PAGE 699

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.4.9 5 Method SET U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 700

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.4.10 SET U - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET U ▶ Properties...
PAGE 701

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET Ipol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
PAGE 702

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 686 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .
PAGE 703

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 704

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.2 Identification Description .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .
PAGE 705

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 706

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -125.0 ... 125.
PAGE 707

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 708

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed. The measured value acceptance depends on the three following parameters: Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 709

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added.
PAGE 710

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.4 SET Ipol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately. Endpoint 1 EP1 with Measured value for the first endpoint. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ...
PAGE 711

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min. rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
PAGE 712

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time.
PAGE 713

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Switching endpoint 2 on/off.
PAGE 714

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.5 SET Ipol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
PAGE 715

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.4.5.6 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 716

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.4.5.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 717

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration. Selection Default value automatic | manual | off off automatic The drift lastly determined during conditioning will be used as drift value.
PAGE 718

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command.
PAGE 719

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.5.10, page 705). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.5.10, page 705). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
PAGE 720

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.4.5.9 SET Ipol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 721

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.5.10 SET Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET Ipol ▶ Properties...
PAGE 722

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: without conditioning with conditioning Parameters The parameters for the command SET Upol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
PAGE 723

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .COK Command status; 1 = Condition requirement fulfilled, 0 = Condition requirement not fulfilled .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .
PAGE 724

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 708 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 725

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.2 5 Method Identification Description .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .
PAGE 726

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 727

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855, 888 Selection Default value 1 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement.
PAGE 728

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used.
PAGE 729

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.3 5 Method SET Upol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
PAGE 730

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Pause 1 Pause 1 Waiting time, e.g. until the electrode has settled down, before a start volume is added. Titrando, 719, 720, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 Range 0 ... 999999 s Default value 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be added before the start of the titration at the dosing rate indicated. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.
PAGE 731

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.4.6.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s SET Upol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The control parameters can be set for each endpoint separately.
PAGE 732

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Control range Dynamics defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and therefore on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Min. rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Min.
PAGE 733

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.01 ... 9999.00 µL/min 5.00 (slow), 25.00 (optimal), 50.00 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been turned off.
PAGE 734

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value Selection 0 ... 999 s 10 s inf. Stop time The titration is stopped if the stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off Endpoint 2 Note Is activated only for EP1 with ≠ off. on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching endpoint 2 on/off.
PAGE 735

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored. Selection Default value + | - | auto auto + positive measured value alteration negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint.
PAGE 736

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 5.6.3.4.6.6 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s SET Upol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration.
PAGE 737

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.7 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum SET Upol - Conditioning Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Conditioning Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditioning on | off (Default value: off) Switching conditioning on/off. If conditioning is deactivated all following parameters are not visible.
PAGE 738

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off No drift correction takes place. Drift value Drift value for drift correction. This parameter is only shown for Drift correction = manual. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99.9 µL/min 0.0 µL/min Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration. The stop volume should be adapted to the size of the titration cell in order to prevent any overflow. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Selection Default value 0.000000 ... 9999.99 mL 20.
PAGE 739

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the titration will not be started until the Event message Start titration is sent to the command with a SEND command. Note Conditioning must already be completed (= Condok) at the time the SEND command is received, otherwise the command to start the titration will be ignored.
PAGE 740

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.6.10, page 726). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.6.10, page 726). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
PAGE 741

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.4.6.9 5 Method SET Upol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 742

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.4.6.10 SET Upol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ SET Upol ▶ Properties...
PAGE 743

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Reagent addition takes place in three phases during the titration: ￭￭￭ Initial dosing During this phase the dosing rate increases continuously. It starts with the Min. rate and increases to the Max. rate. Continuous dosing In this phase, addition is carried out at the Max. rate until the Control range is reached. Dynamics Dosing is finely controlled in this range. Shortly before the endpoint is reached. addition is carried out only at the Min. rate.
PAGE 744

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ 5.6.3.5.2 5.6.3.5.2.1 KFT Upol Amperometric measurement with selectable polarization voltage (measured value current I). KFT Ipol KFT Ipol - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ KFT Ipol - 'Command name' Command for Karl Fischer Titrations with voltametric measurement (selectable polarization current). Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
PAGE 745

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command KFT Ipol and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Identification Description .
PAGE 746

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 730 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.
PAGE 747

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.5.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .
PAGE 748

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 749

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method not defined No tests will be carried out. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination.
PAGE 750

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used.
PAGE 751

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.5.2.3 5 Method KFT Ipol - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The start conditions are processed in the listed sequence before the titration is started. Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrandos. The initial measured value is determined before the other start conditions are processed.
PAGE 752

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 1s Pause 1 Pause 1 Waiting time, e.g. until the electrode has settled down, before a start volume is added. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Start volume Start volume Volume to be dosed with the indicated dosing rate before the start of the titration . Titrando Range Default value 0.00000 ... 9999.99 mL 0.00000 mL Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.
PAGE 753

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 5.6.3.5.2.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s KFT Ipol - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Endpoint Ep with Measured value for the endpoint. Range Default value Selection -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 250.
PAGE 754

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics The control range defines the measured value range before the given endpoint. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and thus also on the accuracy. In the control range, dosing is controlled by the Minimum rate. The closer the endpoint, the slower the dosing until the Minimum rate has been reached. The larger the control range, the slower the titration.
PAGE 755

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0.1 ... 9.9 µL/min minimum (slow), minimum (optimal), 5.0 (fast) µL/min Stop criterion Stop criterion The titration us stopped after the last dosing once the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been fulfilled. The titration can be stopped when a particular drift has been achieved or after a preset time. Titrino Selection Default value drift | time drift Titrando Selection Default value drift | rel.
PAGE 756

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Relative stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached. The stop drift is the sum of the drift at the titration start and the relative stop drift defined here. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = rel. drift. Titrando Range Default value 1 ... 999 µL/min 10 µL/min Delay time If the endpoint has been reached, the delay time defined here is awaited after the last dosing and then the titration is stopped.
PAGE 757

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value + | - | auto auto + positive measured value alteration negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint. Extraction time The titration is not stopped until the extraction time has elapsed (even when the EP has already been reached). The entry of an extraction time may be advisable, e.g. for the titration of sparingly soluble samples. Range 0 ...
PAGE 758

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.2.6 KFT Ipol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
PAGE 759

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Selection Default value 5.6.3.5.2.7 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum KFT Ipol - Conditioning Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Conditioning Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditioning Conditioning on | off (Default value: off) Switching conditioning on/off. If conditioning is deactivated all following parameters are not visible.
PAGE 760

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Drift value Drift value for drift correction. This parameter is only shown for Drift correction = manual. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99.9 µL/min 0.0 µL/min Stop volume Determination stops when the specified volume has been dosed since the start of the conditioning. The stop volume should be adjusted to the size of the titration cell in order to prevent any overflow. Titrando Range Default value Selection Default value 0.000000 ... 9999.
PAGE 761

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note Conditioning must already be completed (= Condok) at the time the SEND command is received, otherwise the command to start the titration will be ignored. Show measured value during conditioning on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the measured value will be shown in the subwindow Live display of the program part Workplace, in addition to the drift and the time. 5.6.3.5.2.8 KFT Ipol - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties..
PAGE 762

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.
PAGE 763

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 764

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.2.10 KFT Ipol - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ KFT Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Volume Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.
PAGE 765

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command KFT Upol are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration.
PAGE 766

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 750 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .DRI Current and/or last drift for drift correction in µL/min .DSC Time for processing all start conditions s .DTI Time for drift correction (time from the start of the titration to the end of the command) in s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .EP.MEA Measured value for the endpoint in the unit of the measured value .EP.
PAGE 767

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.
PAGE 768

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.5.3.2 KFT Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 769

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 770

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands U(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ... 1270 mV (Increment: 10) 400 mV Electrode test on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then an electrode test will be carried out for polarizable electrodes during the transition from an inactive condition to a measurement.
PAGE 771

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos.
PAGE 772

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 99.90 µA/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
PAGE 773

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g.
PAGE 774

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for Control are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value slow | optimal | fast | User optimal slow For titrations in which the finest details are also to be visible.
PAGE 775

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Max. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out outside of the Control range. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando Range Default value Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 1.00 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) mL/min 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min 1.00 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) mL/min Min.
PAGE 776

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands time The endpoint must be exceeded for a certain time: the Delay time. The same Delay time with different, very small volume increments (depending on the volume of the exchange or dosing unit) means different switchoff points. Note The Stop conditions will always stop the titration even if the stop criterion has not been fulfilled or has been switched off. Stop drift Titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached.
PAGE 777

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop time The titration is stopped if the absolute stop time defined here has elapsed since the start of the titration. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = time and Delay time = inf. Titrino Range 5.6.3.5.3.5 1 ... 999999 s KFT Upol - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the running of the titration are defined on this tab.
PAGE 778

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.5.3.6 Titrando Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s 2.00 s KFT Upol - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFT Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 779

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop time Titrando Range Selection Default value 0 ... 999999 s off off off Stops when the preset time (including start conditions) has elapsed since the start of the titration. Filling rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.5.3.7 Titrando Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.
PAGE 780

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Range Default value 1 ... 999 µg/min 20 µg/min Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration.
PAGE 781

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stabilizing time Waiting period until the start of the titration during which the condition requirement must be continuously fulfilled. Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 782

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (Measured value, Volume or Time) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
PAGE 783

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 5.6.3.5.3.9 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/mL 5.
PAGE 784

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 785

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6 5.6.3.6.1 5 Method KFC KFC - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties.. ▶ KFC - 'Command name' Command for coulometric Karl Fischer Titrations with voltametric measurement. Note The coulometric water determination is mainly used to determine small amounts of water. Devices This command can be executed with the following devices.
PAGE 786

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭ Additional evaluations Definition of additional methods for the evaluation of the titration curves. Additional measured values Definition of additional measured values of other measuring commands which are saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command KFC and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
PAGE 787

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.QTY Measured value (water) for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in µg .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .
PAGE 788

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.6.2 Identification Description .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .SME Start measured value (measured value after processing the start conditions) in the unit of the measured value .STE Start temperature (temperature after processing of the start conditions) in °C KFC - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 789

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) Polarization current at the indicator electrode.
PAGE 790

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Cell Generator type Selection of the generator type. Selection Default value without diaphragm | with diaphragm without diaphragm Generator current Polarization current at the generator electrode.
PAGE 791

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 851, 852 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. 851, 852 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 792

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands End point EP at Measured value for the endpoint. 756, 831 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 50.0 mV 851, 852 Range Default value -1250.0 ... 1250.0 mV 50.0 mV Titration rate Titration rate The three predefined sets of parameters can be selected for the titration rate: slow, optimal and fast; the parameters for Control are not displayed. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters.
PAGE 793

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dynamics The control range is entered as distance to the endpoint. Within the control range, iodine will be generated in steps which are controlled by the minimum rate. The larger the control range, the slower the titration. Outside the control range, iodine will be generated continuously with Maximum rate. The standard control parameters are optimal for most applications and should not be modified.
PAGE 794

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Ipol 10 µA 20 µA 30 µA EP 50 mV 100 mV 150 mV Dynamics 70 mV 100 mV 120 mV Max. rate Maximum rate with which iodine is generated outside the Control range. Range Default value Selection 1.5 ... 2240.0 µg/min 1000.0 (slow), maximum (optimal), maximum (fast) µg/min maximum Min. rate This parameter defines the minimum rate with which iodine is generated inside the Control range. The smaller the rate the slower the titration and the higher the accuracy.
PAGE 795

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 1 ... 999 µg/min 5 µg/min Relative stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached. The stop drift is the sum of the drift at the titration start and the relative stop drift defined here. This parameter is only shown for Stop criterion = rel. drift. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 796

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 5.6.3.6.6 756, 831 Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 2s 851, 852 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s KFC - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The conditions for stopping the titration are defined on this tab.
PAGE 797

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Run subwindow displayed on the Single determination or Determination series tab will then switch to COND READY. Range Default value 1 ... 999 µg/min 20 µg/min Drift correction If this parameter is set to automatic or manual the drift correction ( = Drift value × Time for drift correction) caused by empty consumption during titration is deducted from the total consumption. The Time for drift correction is the period between end of conditioning and end of titration.
PAGE 798

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0 ... 99 s 0s Automatic start after sample addition on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the titration starts automatically when the command is in status COND OK and the Threshold value set is exceeded. In this case the system assumes that the sample has been injected. This parameter is displayed only for 851 and 852.
PAGE 799

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6.8 5 Method KFC - Additional evaluations Tab: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 800

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 801

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.6.10 5 Method KFC - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ KFC ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation ▶ [New]/[Property] ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time | Water Measured value Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.7 5.6.3.7.
PAGE 802

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command BRC are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, indicator and generator electrode and stirrers. Start conditions Entry of a waiting period before the start of the titration. Control parameters Control parameters for the endpoint (measured value for the endpoint, titration rate, user-defined parameters, stop criterion).
PAGE 803

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in mV .EP.CHA Load for endpoint in mA·s .EP.DVT Drift for the endpoint in µg/min .EP.MEA Measured value for the endpoint in mV .EP.QTY Measured value (water) for the endpoint in µg .EP.TEM Temperature for the endpoint 1 in °C .EP.TIM Time in s until the endpoint is reached .EP.TIM Time in s until the endpoint is reached .
PAGE 804

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.7.2 Identification Description .LP.IGE Current pulsed current for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mA .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in mV .LP.QTY Measured value (water) for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in µg .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.
PAGE 805

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead. If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 806

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used.
PAGE 807

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command. 5.6.3.7.3 BRC - Start conditions Tab: Method ▶ BRC ▶ Properties... ▶ Start conditions Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Initial measured value Note Is displayed only for Titrando and 855.
PAGE 808

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Max. waiting time If signal drift has been switched off or has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 15 s Pause Pause Waiting time before the start of the titration. Range Default value 5.6.3.7.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s BRC - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ BRC ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 809

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method optimal Parameter set for all standard titrations; optimized for the most frequent applications. fast For less critical, fast titrations. User Editing the individual titration parameters which affect the titration rate. Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics The control range is entered as distance to the endpoint.
PAGE 810

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value Selection 1.0 ... 999.0 µg/min 15.0 (slow), 25.0 (optimal), 50.0 (fast) µg/min minimum Stop criterion Stop criterion Switches off titration when the endpoint has been reached and the stop criterion has been met. Selection Default value drift | rel. drift | time | drift & time | off drift & time Stop drift The titration is stopped when the endpoint and the stop drift have been reached.
PAGE 811

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Extraction time The titration is not stopped until the extraction time has elapsed (even when the EP has already been reached). The entry of an extraction time may be advisable, e.g. for the titration of sparingly soluble samples. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Time interval measuring point Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list.
PAGE 812

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Conditioning on | off (Default value: on) Enable/Disable the conditioning. If the conditioning is disabled, the following parameters are not visible. Start drift The determination can only be started when the currently measured drift is less than the start drift entered here. In such cases, the Status in the Run subwindow displayed on the Single determination or Determination series tab will then switch to COND READY. Range Default value 1 ...
PAGE 813

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stabilizing time Waiting period until the start of the titration during which the condition requirement must be continuously fulfilled. Range Default value 0 ... 999 s 0s Sample addition time Waiting time between stop of conditioning and start of titration during which the sample can be added. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 814

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or bromine) for the fixed endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
PAGE 815

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.1, page 858). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.1, page 858). [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table.
PAGE 816

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix value Value of the fix endpoint. 5.6.3.8 5.6.3.8.1 Measured value Range -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV Time Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 s Bromine Range 0.0 ... 999999.9 µg STAT STAT - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Command for STAT Titrations (STAT). Principle In STAT titrations, reagent is added until a preset measured value (control point) has been reached, which is then maintained at a constant level.
PAGE 817

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Commands Depending on the measured value, one of the following twoSTAT commands can be chosen: ￭￭ 5.6.3.8.2 STAT pH STAT titration with pH electrodes (measured quantity pH) STAT U STAT Titration with metal electrodes (measured quantity U). STAT - Control range Tab: Method ▶ STAT ▶ Properties... ▶ Control parameters Set a large control range for steep curves and a small control range for flat ones.
PAGE 818

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.3 STAT - Evaluation window Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations ▶ Rate evaluation ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Evaluation window # Evaluation windows are defined time segments in which the dosing rate is determined by linear regression. Lower limit Lower limit of evaluation window. Range Default value 0.0 ... 99999.9 s 0.0 s Upper limit Upper limit of evaluation window. Range Default value 5.6.3.8.4 0.0 ... 999999.9 s 999999.
PAGE 819

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Limit exceeding Selects the exceeded limit for which a track is to be started. Selection Default value Lower limit | Upper limit | Any | OK Any Any The track will be started if either the upper or the lower limit is exceeded. OK The track is started when the monitored quantities are once again within the limit values (including hysteresis). Track name Selects the track that is to be started automatically.
PAGE 820

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Cylinder volume 5.6.3.8.6 5.6.3.8.6.1 Max. dosing rate Max. flow rate Exchange unit Dosing unit Exchange unit Dosing unit 1 mL 2.25 mL/min --- approx. 130 mL/h --- 2 mL --- 5.00 mL/min --- approx. 300 mL/h 5 mL 11.25 mL/min 12.50 mL/min approx. 670 mL/h approx. 750 mL/h 10 mL10 mL 22.50 mL/min 25.00 mL/min approx. 1.3 L/h approx. 1.5 L/h 20 mL 45.00 mL/min 50.00 mL/min approx. 2.7 L/h approx. 3.0 L/h 50 mL 112.50 mL/min 124.
PAGE 821

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Control parameters Parameters for the control point. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration. Stop conditions Definitions of conditions which cause the stop of the titration.
PAGE 822

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 806 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mV .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .FP{x}.VOL Volume for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in mL .
PAGE 823

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.VOL Volume for minimum measured value in mL .MR.MRC Correlation coefficient for mean dosing rate for the whole range .MR.MRS Standard deviation for mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min .MR.MRT Mean dosing rate for the whole range in mL/min. .
PAGE 824

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.6.2 STAT pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 825

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 826

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method run to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
PAGE 827

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected.
PAGE 828

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855. Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command.
PAGE 829

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements. The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 830

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g. for the electrode to settle down after the start or a reaction time after the addition of the start volume. The pause follows at the end of all the start conditions. Range Default value 5.6.3.8.6.4 0 ... 999999 s 0s STAT pH - Control parameters Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties...
PAGE 831

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 50 µL/min | 100 µL/min | 500 µL/min | User 100 µL/min Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box. Dynamics pH The control range defines the measured value range before the given control point. It has a decisive influence on the titration rate and thus also on the accuracy. The dosing is also monitored by the Min. rate within the control range.
PAGE 832

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Min. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out at the very beginning of the titration and in the Control range at the end of the titration. The smaller the selected minimum rate, the longer it takes until the control point is reached for the first time. The following rule of thumb should be observed for maintaining the Min. rate in order to achieve as constant (regular) a dosing at the control point as possible: Min. rate in µL/min = expected reaction rate in µL/min/ 10.
PAGE 833

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method negative measured value alteration auto The titration direction is determined automatically from the start measured value and the set endpoint. Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. This value is used for temperature correction in pH measurements.
PAGE 834

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value off off Titrino Range Selection Default value -20.00 ... 20.00 off off Start rate The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until the dosing rate has fallen below this value. This parameter is checked 10 s after the start at the earliest. 5.6.3.8.6.6 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min off off Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 835

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value Selection 0.000 ... 9999.99 mL 100.00 mL off Stop time Stops when the preset time has elapsed after the start conditions have been fulfilled. Range Selection Default value 0 ...
PAGE 836

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Filling rate Speed with which the dosing cylinder is to be refilled after the titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. 5.6.3.8.6.7 Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum STAT pH - Monitoring Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Monitoring Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 837

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Lower hysteresis pH Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.000 ... 20,000 0.020 Upper limit pH Upper limit of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds this limit, then the event Measured value upper limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20,000 ...
PAGE 838

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted and a message appears. As soon as the monitored measured value is again within the limits (including hysteresis) reagent dosing can be resumed by pressing the [Continue] button in this message box. Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted.
PAGE 839

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00 ... 166.00 mL/min 166.00 mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 150.00 mL/min 150.00 mL/min Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the dosing rate. When the dosing rate again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Dosing rate upper limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.
PAGE 840

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note If, when monitoring the dosing rate, the Lower limit is exceeded then the actions Wait for [Continue] and Wait for limit ok are irrelevant as the mean dosing rate becomes ever smaller during this time. The valid range can never be reached again. Monitoring Temperature Monitoring Temperature on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the temperature will be monitored and any exceeded limits will be entered in the measuring point list.
PAGE 841

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature. When the temperature once again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, the action Temperature upper limit ok is triggered Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.
PAGE 842

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.4, page 802). [Delete] Deletes the track call selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.6.8 STAT pH - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 843

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence). [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 663). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.3.4.3.10, page 663). [Delete] Deletes the selected line.
PAGE 844

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.6.9 STAT pH - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 845

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.6.10 STAT pH - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT pH ▶ Properties...
PAGE 846

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command STAT U are configured in the following 8 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Start conditions Parameters for the measurement of the initial measured value and for defining the conditions which have to be met at the start of the titration. Control parameters Parameters for the control point. Titration parameters Parameters for the run of the titration.
PAGE 847

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode slope of the sensor used for the command (in mV for ISE sensors) .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .EVT End volume (total dosed volume at the end of the command) in mL .
PAGE 848

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 832 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .MA.MEA Maximum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MA.VOL Volume with maximum measured value in mL .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MI.
PAGE 849

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.8.7.2 5 Method Identification Description .SVA Start volume absolute (volume that was added according to the start condition "start volume") in mL .SVT Total start volume (volume that was added in dependence on all three start conditions) in mL .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command STAT U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 850

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) with which the solution is to be dosed. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 851

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Selection of the number of the dosing device (dosing or exchange unit) to be used for the dosing. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed. Titrando Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 2 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 852

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes.
PAGE 853

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855.
PAGE 854

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the drift is less than the value entered here. Range Selection Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min off off off The measured vales will not be applied until after the maximum waiting time has passed. Min. waiting time The minimum waiting period is only important for drift-controlled measurements.
PAGE 855

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Titrino Range Default value 5 Method 0.00 ... 999.99 mL 0.00 mL Dosing rate Speed at which the start volume is to be added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum maximum Pause 2 Pause 2 Waiting time, e.g.
PAGE 856

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Selection Default value -2000 ... 2000 mV off off Titration rate Titration rate Three predefined rates, for which the parameters for Control are not displayed, can selected for the titration rate. The User setting must be selected in order to be able to edit these parameters. Selection Default value 50 µL/min | 100 µL/min | 500 µL/min | User 100 µL/min Control Note Will be displayed only if the User option is selected in the Titration rate list box.
PAGE 857

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method point for parameterization: Max. rate in mL/min = 0.005 • Expected rate of reaction in µL/min. Titrando, 855 Range Default value Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min 0.25 (50 µL/min), 0.75 (100 µL/min), 2.00 (500 µL/min) mL/min Min. rate Rate at which dosing is carried out at the very beginning of the titration and in the Control range at the end of the titration.
PAGE 858

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.7.5 STAT U - Titration parameters Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Titration parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Parameters defining the run of the titration. Titration direction Selection of the titration direction. If two endpoints are set, then the titration direction is already established and the following selection of titration direction is ignored.
PAGE 859

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 2s Start time The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this time has elapsed since the start of the titration. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Start measured value The measured values are not entered in the measuring point list until this value has been reached. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.
PAGE 860

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.8.7.6 STAT U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Conditions for stopping the titration. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the titration. Stop volume Stops when the given volume has been added after the start of the titration (including start conditions).
PAGE 861

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Last dosing The stop time starts after the last increment has been dosed, i. e. the stop time is reset to zero again after each dosing step. Stop rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after titration. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. Titrando, 855 Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min off off Titrino Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 150.
PAGE 862

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Monitoring Measured value Monitoring Measured value on | off (Default value: off) If this check box is activated, then the measured value will be monitored and any exceeded limits will be entered in the measuring point list. Lower limit Lower limit of the measured value. When the measured value falls below this value, the event Measured value lower limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV -2000.
PAGE 863

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 2000.0 mV 0.2 mV Action Selection of the event to be triggered if the upper or lower limit is exceeded: Selection Default value Stop determination | Stop command (Titrando, 855) | Wait for [Continue] | Wait for limit ok | none none Stop determination The running STAT command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped.
PAGE 864

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 0.00 ... 150.00 mL/min 0.00 mL/min Lower hysteresis The lower hysteresis represents a tolerance range for the lower limit of the dosing rate. When the dosing rate exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, the action Dosing rate lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.00 ... 166.00 mL/min 0.20 mL/min Upper limit Upper limit of the dosing rate.
PAGE 865

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop command (Titrando, 855) The running STAT command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted and a message appears. As soon as the monitored measured value is again within the limits (including hysteresis) reagent dosing can be resumed by pressing the [Continue] button in this message box. Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current STAT command is interrupted.
PAGE 866

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature. When the temperature once again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, the action Temperature upper limit ok is triggered Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.
PAGE 867

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, a maximum of 20 entries can be defined as to which track is to be started automatically when a particular limit value is exceeded. [New] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.4, page 802). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call # in which the parameters for the track call can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.
PAGE 868

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (measured value, time or volume) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. [New] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to enter a new fixed endpoint (see Chapter 5.6.3.8.7.10, page 854).
PAGE 869

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 5.6.3.8.7.9 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/mL 25.0 mV/mL STAT U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together in additional measured value columns with the measured values present in the default settings.
PAGE 870

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered. [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.3.8.7.10 STAT U - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ STAT U ▶ Properties...
PAGE 871

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If the activities of the acid and the conjugated base are equal (aA = aB), then pH=pKa. This is the value at the half neutralization point and can be extrapolated from the titration curve. A careful pH calibration is necessary for pK evaluations. Nonetheless, the determined pK value is only an approximation, as the ionic strengths are not taken into account.
PAGE 872

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.9.2 Minimum/Maximum evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/MEAS ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Minimum/Maximum evaluation For the minimum or maximum measured value the associated volume, time and temperature are interpolated from the measuring point list. The evaluation begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds a particular threshold value. 5.6.3.9.3 Break-point evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET/MEAS ▶ Properties...
PAGE 873

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.3.9.4 5 Method Gran evaluation Parameters: Method ▶ DET/MET ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Gran evaluation The Gran evaluation can be used to determine S-shaped DET and MET titration curves. Two different procedures can be selected for this which are referred to as Normalized and Standard. In the normalized procedure, the titration curves are linearized in 2 parts: the first part is before, the second after the equivalence point.
PAGE 874

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.3.10 5.6.3.10.1 Additional measured values Calculated measured value Dialog window: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/STAT/MEAS/DOS ▶ Properties...
PAGE 875

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value empty | ppm | % | g/L | mg/L | mg/mL | mg/ 100g | mol/L | mmol/L | mL | g | mg | µg | °C | µL | s | mS/cm empty Decimal places Number of decimal places with which the calculated measured value will be displayed. Range Default value 0 ... 5 2 Comment Comment on the calculated measured value. Input Default value 5.6.3.10.2 250 characters 'empty' External measured value Dialog window: Method ▶ DET/MET/SET/KFT/KFC/STAT/MEAS/DOS ▶ Properties...
PAGE 876

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4 5.6.4.1 Measuring commands Measuring commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Insert ▶ New command... ▶ Measure Commands for measurements with different measured quantities. The following measuring commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 860 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ MEAS pH Potentiometric pH measurement with pH electrodes. MEAS U Potentiometric voltage measurement with metal electrodes.
PAGE 877

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.2 5.6.4.2.1 5 Method MEAS pH MEAS pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties.. ▶ MEAS pH - 'Command name' Command for potentiometric pH measurements with pH electrodes.
PAGE 878

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 862 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{x}.TIM Time for the break point x (1…9) in s .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .EME End measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode zero point of the sensor used for the command (dimensionless) .
PAGE 879

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .MA.TEM Temperature for the maximum measured value in °C .MA.TIM Time in s until the maximum measured value is reached .MI.MEA Minimum measured value in the unit of the measured value .MI.TEM Temperature with minimum measured value in °C .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .
PAGE 880

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected. Titrando, 867 Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff.
PAGE 881

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature manually entered under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855, 867 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 882

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled. The measurement is stopped as soon as the Signal drift or the Stop measured value pH is reached or a defined Waiting time has elapsed. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled. Measurement without drift control The measurement is carried out without drift control if this option is enabled.
PAGE 883

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 884

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop measured value pH Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement.
PAGE 885

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.2.4 5 Method MEAS pH - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
PAGE 886

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/s 1.0 pH/s Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 pH/s 1.
PAGE 887

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window. Only the first break point in the defined window will be recognized. Selection Default value Measured value | time | off off Lower limit Value for the lower limit of the window. Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range -20,000 ...
PAGE 888

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 889

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.2.6 5 Method MEAS pH - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional evaluations ▶ Fix endpoint evaluation # Quantity Selection of the fixed measured quantity to which the associated values for the other quantities are to be interpolated from the list of measured points. Selection Default value Measured value | Time Measured value Fix value Value of the fixed endpoint. 5.6.4.3 5.6.4.3.1 Measured value Range -20,000 ...
PAGE 890

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
PAGE 891

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.3.2 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value x (1…3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value x (1…3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 892

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 893

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously.
PAGE 894

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.3.3 MEAS U - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement The two measuring modes Measurement with drift control or Measurement without drift control can be selected.
PAGE 895

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Titrino Range Default value 0.5 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 896

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV off off off No stop. Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 897

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stop. Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. 5.6.4.3.4 Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.0 °C MEAS U - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties...
PAGE 898

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.4.3.6, page 885). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 899

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method measured value can be evaluated as a break point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ...
PAGE 900

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.3.5 1 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS U - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 901

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.3.
PAGE 902

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 852, 857, 888, 890, 901, 904, 905, 906, 907 Titrino: 702, 716, 718, 719, 720, 721, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Ipol are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers.
PAGE 903

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint x (1...9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint x (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint x (1...
PAGE 904

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.4.2 Identification Description .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS Ipol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 905

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 851, 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode I(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarizable electrode during a amperometric measurement.
PAGE 906

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature manually entered under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer.
PAGE 907

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value Measurement with drift control | Measurement without drift control Measurement with drift control Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled. The measurement is stopped as soon as the defined Signal drift or the Stop measured value is reached or a waiting time has elapsed. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled.
PAGE 908

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 909

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.
PAGE 910

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrino Range Default value 5.6.4.4.4 -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.0 °C MEAS Ipol - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
PAGE 911

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated volume, time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 1.0 ... 2000.0 mV/s 25.
PAGE 912

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window.
PAGE 913

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.4.5 5 Method MEAS Ipol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Ipol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
PAGE 914

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.4.
PAGE 915

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 852, 857, 888, 890, 901, 904, 905, 906, 907 Titrino: 702, 716, 718, 719, 720, 721, 736, 751, 758, 785, 794, 798, 799 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Upol are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers.
PAGE 916

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 900 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fixed endpoint × (1…9) is reached .
PAGE 917

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS Upol - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 918

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 851, 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Metal electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | Metal electrode Metal electrode U(pol) The polarization voltage is the voltage applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement.
PAGE 919

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature manually entered under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855, 867 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off off No stirrer will be used.
PAGE 920

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Measurement with drift control | Measurement without drift control Measurement with drift control Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled. The measurement is stopped as soon as the defined Signal drift or the Stop measured value is reached or a waiting time has elapsed. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled.
PAGE 921

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 922

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Titrino Range Default value 0 ... 9999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s (Increment: 0.1) 2.0 s Titrino Range Default value 0.08 ... 16200 s (Increment: 0.08) 2.0 s Stop meas.
PAGE 923

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrino Range Default value 5.6.4.5.4 -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.0 °C MEAS Upol - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
PAGE 924

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.5 ... 10.0 µA/s 5.0 µA/s Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 925

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Window A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis. The break point evaluation will only be carried out in the defined window.
PAGE 926

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.5.5 MEAS Upol - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Upol ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
PAGE 927

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.5.
PAGE 928

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Conductometer: 856 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS T are configured on the following 4 tabs: ￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves.
PAGE 929

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .FP{x}.MEA Measured value (temperature) for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .FP{x}.TEM Temperature for the fixed endpoint × (1…9) in °C .FP{x}.
PAGE 930

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.6.2 Identification Description .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS T - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab.
PAGE 931

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 851, 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff. 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type Temperature sensor or pH Electrode from the sensors configured in the sensor table. Selection Default value Sensor name | Temperature sensor | pH Electrode Temperature sensor Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Titrando, 855, 856, 867 Selection 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off Default value 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used.
PAGE 932

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.6.3 MEAS T - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement The two measuring modes Measurement with drift control or Measurement without drift control can be selected.
PAGE 933

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 °C 0.5 °C Titrino Range Default value 0.5 ... 999.0 °C 0.5 °C Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Max.
PAGE 934

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Selection Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C off off off No stop. Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 935

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stop. Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. 5.6.4.6.4 Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150 °C 25.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500 °C 25.0 °C MEAS T - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties...
PAGE 936

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Fix endpoint evaluation # to edit the fixed endpoint selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.4.6.6, page 923). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 937

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break point. The smaller the EP criterion set, the more break-points will be found. As this is a relative value related to the total measured value modification, even small changes in the measured value can be evaluated as a break point for a small measured value range. Range Default value 0 ... 1.0 0.3 Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point.
PAGE 938

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Window = Measured value Range -20.0 ... 150.0 °C Default value 150.0 °C Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.6.5 1 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS T - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 939

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 940

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.7 5.6.4.7.1 MEAS T/Flow MEAS T/Flow - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS T/Flow ▶ Properties... ▶ MEAS T/Flow - 'Command name' Command for Temperature and gas flow measurements.
PAGE 941

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .EGF Last measured gas flow rate (measured value following processing of the command) in mL/min .EME Final measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .GMA Maximum gas flow rate in mL/min .GMI Minimum gas flow rate in mL/min .
PAGE 942

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.7.2 Identification Description .MI.TIM Time for the minimum measured value in s .MN.MEA Average of the measured value in the unit of the measured value .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error MEAS T/Flow - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T/Flow ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 943

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.7.3 5 Method MEAS T/Flow - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS T/Flow ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 600 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 1 ... 999999.
PAGE 944

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 20.0 °C/s 1.0 °C/s Maximum evaluation Maximum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time for the maximum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list.
PAGE 945

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calc. measured value # in which the parameters for the additional measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.1, page 858). [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e.
PAGE 946

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Conc are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. General/Hardware Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
PAGE 947

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.8.2 5 Method Identification Description .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.
PAGE 948

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 949

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off The temperature will not be measured. The temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Titration parameters tab will be used. Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 950

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Measurement with drift control The measurement is carried out drift-controlled if this option is enabled. The measurement is stopped as soon as the defined Signal drift or the Stop measured value is reached or a waiting time has elapsed. The corresponding parameters are not visible if this option is disabled. Measurement without drift control The measurement is carried out without drift control if this option is enabled.
PAGE 951

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 52 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Stop measured value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. Range Selection Default value 0 ... 1E+99 off off off No stop.
PAGE 952

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temperature Temperature Manually entered titration temperature. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. Range Default value 5.6.4.8.4 -20.0 ... 150°C 25.0 MEAS Conc - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ Commands ▶ MEAS Conc ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 953

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 954

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭ Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Defining further methods for evaluating measurement curves. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MEAS Cond and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
PAGE 955

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point on the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.
PAGE 956

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.9.2 Identification Description .TC.C3 Coefficient c3 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.C4 Coefficient c4 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.TSTART Start temperature in °C .TC.TSTOP Stop temperature in °C MEAS Cond - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 957

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement 856 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured.
PAGE 958

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.9.3 MEAS Cond - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement Measurement frequency 712 Selection Default value auto | 300 Hz | 2.4 kHz auto auto The more suitable of the two frequencies is selected.
PAGE 959

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time. The response time of an electrode can also increase with time, i.e. reaching a constant measured value takes longer and longer. Drift-controlled measurement is particularly advisable in such cases, as the measured values are not applied until equilibrium has almost been achieved.
PAGE 960

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Stop meas. value Stops when the preset measured value has been reached since the start of the measurement. 856 Range Selection Default value 0.0000 ... 2000.00 mS/cm off off off No stop. Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Duration of measurement Maximum period of time for measurement.
PAGE 961

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off No stop. Temperature Measurement temperature Temperature of the solution to be measured. If a temperature sensor is connected, the temperature entered here is ignored. 712 Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0°C 20.0 856 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0°C 20.0 Reference temperature The electrical conductivity depends greatly on the temperature.
PAGE 962

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Sample solution Selection of the sample solution from the table Sample solutions (TC conductivity). Selection Default value 5.6.4.9.4 DIN | Table entries DIN MEAS Cond - Evaluations Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The following additional methods for evaluation of measurement curves can be activated and defined on this tab.
PAGE 963

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Minimum evaluation Minimum evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the associated time and temperature for the minimum measured value will be interpolated from the measuring point list. Threshold value The evaluation of the minimum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.001 ... 10.0 (mS/cm)/s 5.
PAGE 964

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Slope Minimum difference between the slope before and after the break point. The smaller the difference, the more break-points will be found. Range Default value 0.0 ... 10.0 0.9 Smoothing factor The higher the smoothing factor, the fewer endpoints will be found. Range Default value 2 ... 20 5 Selection Default value Measured value | time | off off Window off A range (window) can be defined on the measured value axis or on the time axis.
PAGE 965

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.9.5 5 Method MEAS Cond - Additional measured values Tab: Method ▶ Commands ▶ MEAS Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Additional measured values Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters A maximum of 6 additional measured values can be defined on this tab which can then be saved together with the measured values present in the default settings in additional measured value columns Calculated # or External # in the measuring point list .
PAGE 966

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [New] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Properties] Opens the dialog window External measured value # in which the parameters for the external measured value can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.3.10.2, page 859). [Delete] Deletes the external measured value selected in the table. 5.6.4.9.
PAGE 967

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS TC Cond are configured on the following two tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Additional measured values Defining further measured values which can be saved as additional columns in the measuring point list.
PAGE 968

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 952 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FP{x}.TIM Time in s until the fix endpoint × (1…9) is reached .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.EXx External value × (1...
PAGE 969

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.10.2 5 Method Identification Description .TC.C3 Coefficient c3 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.C4 Coefficient c4 of the Chebyshev polynomial of the solution used .TC.MAX Maximum temperature coefficient in %/°C ( .TC.MIN Minimum temperature coefficient in %/°C ( .TC.TSTART Start temperature in °C .TC.TSTOP Stop temperature in °C MEAS TC Cond - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS TC Cond ▶ Properties...
PAGE 970

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirrer This section is visible only if the 856 Conductivity Module was selected as device type. Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ...
PAGE 971

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 0 ... 999999 s 3000 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. 712 Range Default value 0.4 ... 999999 s 2.0 s 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 2.0 s Sample solution Selection of the sample solution from the table Sample solutions (TC conductivity). Selection Default value DIN | Table entries DIN Start temperatur Temperature at the time of the start of the measurement.
PAGE 972

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Additional calculated measured values Additional calculated measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be calculated from existing measured values and saved, which can also be presented as curves under the designation Calculated 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.CA1…3'. [New] Opens the dialog window Calc.
PAGE 973

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.11 5 Method MEAS Ref 5.6.4.11.1 MEAS Ref - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Ref ▶ Properties... ▶ MEAS Ref - 'Command name' Command for the Measurement of a reference spectrum. Devices This command can be executed with the following device: Spectrometer: Avantes Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command MEAS Ref are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device.
PAGE 974

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.11.2 MEAS Ref - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Ref ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 975

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method End wavelength Upper limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 1000.0 nm Integration time Integration time for spectrum recording. Range Default value 0.01 ... 600000 ms 6 ms Averaged spectra The number of spectra that are recorded and averaged. Range Default value 1 ... 10000 10 Smoothing Number of neighboring pixels with which the value for each measurement pixel is determined. Range Default value 5.6.4.12 0 ...
PAGE 976

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Evaluations Definition of evaluation results for the sample spectrum. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MEAS Spec and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 960 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .
PAGE 977

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.12.2 5 Method MEAS Spec - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ MEAS Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 978

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands End wavelength Upper limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 1000.0 nm Integration time Integration time for spectrum recording. Range Default value 0.01 ... 600000 ms 6 ms Averaged spectra The number of spectra that are recorded and averaged. Range Default value 1 ... 10000 10 Smoothing Number of neighboring pixels with which the value for each measurement pixel is determined. Range Default value 5.6.4.12.4 0 ...
PAGE 979

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.12.5 5 Method MEAS Spec - Evaluation window Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Evaluations ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Evaluation window # Start wavelength Lower limit of the evaluation range. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 400.0 nm End wavelength Upper limit of the evaluation range. Range Default value 5.6.4.13 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 1000.0 nm MEAS Opt 5.6.4.13.1 MEAS Opt - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Opt ▶ Properties..
PAGE 980

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MEAS Opt and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 964 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .BP{#}.[MEA] Measured value for the break-point (1…9) in the unit of the measured value .BP{#}.CNT Intensity for the break-point x (1…9) in counts .BP{#}.TEM Temperature for the break-point # (1…9) in °C .BP{#}.
PAGE 981

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.13.2 5 Method Identification Description .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .LP.TRN Transmission of the last measuring point of the measuring point list in % .MA{#}.
PAGE 982

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 983

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 5 Method 1 ... 10000 10 Smoothing Number of neighboring pixels with which the light intensity is determined for each measurement pixel. Range Default value 1 ... 100 Pixels 1 Pixels Measurement Measuring time Duration of the absorption measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.
PAGE 984

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fix endpoint evaluation Fix endpoint evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the associated values for the other measured quantities will be interpolated with a fixed measured quantity (Measured value or Time) for the fix endpoint from the measuring point list. Moves the selected line up (changes the sequence). Moves the selected line down (changes the sequence).
PAGE 985

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Threshold value The evaluation of the maximum begins as soon as the slope of the curve exceeds the set threshold value. Range Default value 0.1 ... 1000.0 mAU/s 20.0 mAU/s Break-point evaluation Break-point evaluation on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then sharp, almost 90° changes in directions in the measurement curve will be evaluated. EP criterion Measure of the minimum sharpness of the break-point.
PAGE 986

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Time for the lower limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range 0 ... 4000 mAU Default value 0 mAU Window = Time Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Upper limit Value for the upper limit of the window. Time for the upper limit of the window. Window = Measured value Range 0 ... 4000 mAU Default value 4000 mAU Window = Time Range Default value 5.6.4.13.5 0 ... 999999 s 999999 s MEAS Opt - Fix endpoint evaluation Dialog window: Method ▶ MEAS Opt ▶ Properties...
PAGE 987

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.14 5 Method STDADD man 5.6.4.14.1 STDADD man - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ STDADD man - 'Command name' Command for Standard addition with manual addition of the standard addition solution.
PAGE 988

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.4.14.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CONC Concentration of the solution used for the command .DBL Total duration for the processing of the command in s .EME Final measured value (measured value after processing of the command) in the unit of the measured value .ENP Electrode zero point calculated from the calibration .
PAGE 989

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 990

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously. automatic If a temperature sensor is connected then the temperature will be measured continuously. Otherwise, the temperature entered manually under Temperature on the Measuring parameters tab will be used. off The temperature will not be measured.
PAGE 991

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Number of additions Number of times the standard solution is to be added. Range Default value 1 ... 19 3 Volume auxiliary solution Volume of the auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) which was added to the sample before the first standard addition. Range Default value 0 ... 9999.
PAGE 992

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Concentration unit of addition solution. Selection Default value 5.6.4.14.4 mol/L | mmol/L | µmol/L | ppm | g/L | mg/L | µg/L | mg/mL | µg/mL | % | mEq/L ppm STDADD man - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ STDADD man ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab.
PAGE 993

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150°C 25.
PAGE 994

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command STDADD dos are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Standard addition Parameters for standard addition. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure.
PAGE 995

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.15.2 5 Method Identification Description .ENP Electrode zero point calculated from the calibration .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .
PAGE 996

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 997

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note If an existing solution is selected as the solution to be added then the Concentration and Unit of this solution will be adopted for calculating the standard addition. If not defined is selected, then Concentration and Unit must be entered on the Standard addition tab. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected.
PAGE 998

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.4.15.
PAGE 999

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Addition mode Selection Default value Fixed volume increments | Variable volume increments Fixed volume increments Fixed volume increments If this option is enabled a fixed volume increment must be added for each standard addition. Variable volume increments If this option is enabled the defined volume increment must be added for each standard addition. Addition volume Size of the fixed addition volume (only when Addition mode = fixed volume increments).
PAGE 1000

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing rate Speed at which the volume increments are added. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. Range Selection Default value 5.6.4.15.4 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum STDADD dos - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ STDADD ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1001

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Temperature Temperature Measuring temperature which can be entered manually. If a temperature sensor is connected and the Temperature measurement is set on the General/Hardware tab under Sensor to automatic or continuous, then the temperature will be measured continuously. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150°C 25.
PAGE 1002

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 857, 904, 905, 906, 907 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command STDADD auto are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Standard addition Parameters for standard addition. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure.
PAGE 1003

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.4.16.2 5 Method Identification Description .ENP Electrode zero point calculated from the calibration .ETE End temperature (temperature following processing of the command) in °C .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .
PAGE 1004

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 1005

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note If an existing solution is selected as the solution to be added then the Concentration and Unit of this solution will be adopted for calculating the standard addition. If not defined is selected, then Concentration and Unit must be entered on the Standard addition tab. Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected.
PAGE 1006

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirrer Stirrer Selection of the stirrer. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off No stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.4.16.
PAGE 1007

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop volume Volume of auxiliary solution (e.g. buffer) that is to be added to the sample before the first standard addition. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9999.9 mL 100.0 mL Addition solution Note Displayed only for Solution = not defined. Concentration Concentration of addition solution. Range Default value 0.001 ... 999999.999 1.000 Device Concentration unit of addition solution.
PAGE 1008

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement with drift control The measurement is stopped as soon as the defined Signal drift or the Stop measured value is reached or a defined Waiting time has elapsed. Measured value drift The measured value is only accepted if the signal drift defined here has been fallen short of. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.0 mV/min 10.0 mV/min Min.
PAGE 1009

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch off stirrer during measurement Switch off stirrer during measurement on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then the stirrer is switched off during the measurement. In this case the following two parameters can be edited: Stir before measurement Stirring time between end of dosing and measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 0s Pause before measurement Waiting time before the measurement during which no stirring takes place.
PAGE 1010

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The calibration can be carried out with both manual and automatic solution changes with the aid of a Sample Processor. Commands The following commands can be selected for calibration: ￭￭￭ 994 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ CALL LOOP pH Calibration loop for the calibration of pH electrodes. 5.6.5.5CAL MEAS pH Measurement of buffers for the calibration of pH electrodes. CAL LOOP Conc Calibration loop for the calibration of ion-selective electrodes (ISE electrodes). tiamo 2.
PAGE 1011

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method ￭￭￭ 5.6.5.2 CAL MEAS Conc Measurement of standards for the calibration of ion-selective electrodes (ISE electrodes). CAL Cond Measurement of conductivity standards for the determination of the cell constant of conductivity measurement cells. CAL Spec Measuring command for wavelength calibration.
PAGE 1012

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands method run, a request for specifying the next the buffer or standard is displayed after each measurement. 5.6.5.3 Calibrating with manual solution changing Program part: Method ▶ Calibration commands The basic structure of a calibration method with automatic solution exchange on a Sample Processor looks as follows: * Definition of the number of calibration solutions and the type of solution exchange. ** Move to the next calibration solution. 996 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
PAGE 1013

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The request for changing the buffer or standard must be deactivated in the command CAL LOOP pH or CAL LOOP Conc, respectively. No request for changing the buffer or standard is then displayed during the run. For the automatic move to the next calibration solution on the Sample Processor, a MOVE command must be inserted between the loop command CAL LOOP and the measuring command CAL MEAS. The positions of the calibration solutions on the rack are defined in this command.
PAGE 1014

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note The formula editor is opened with a right click in the input field. 5.6.5.4 5.6.5.4.1 CAL LOOP pH CAL LOOP pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP pH ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name' Loop command for the calibration of pH electrodes which is used together with the command CAL MEAS pH.
PAGE 1015

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.4.2 5 Method Identification Description .SLO Electrode slope calculated from the calibration CAL LOOP pH - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP pH ▶ Properties... ▶ CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name' The number of buffers and the buffer type are defined in the dialog window CAL LOOP pH - 'Command name'. Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Buffers Number of buffers Selecting the number of buffers for the pH calibration.
PAGE 1016

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note The automatic buffer recognition is deactivated for the buffer type Special and the buffers must therefore be measured at the time of calibration in the same order as they were defined in the command CAL LOOP pH. Buffer # pH pH value of the special buffers (this parameter is only displayed for Buffer type = Special). -20.000 ... 20.000 Range Note Enter the pH values for the measuring temperature used.
PAGE 1017

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Met4 Met7 Met9 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 10 3.99 7.06 9.13 15 3.99 7.04 9.08 20 3.99 7.02 9.04 25 4.00 7.00 9.00 30 4.00 6.99 8.96 35 4.01 6.98 8.93 40 4.02 6.98 8.90 45 4.03 6.97 8.87 50 4.04 6.97 8.84 55 4.06 6.97 8.81 60 4.07 6.97 8.79 65 4.09 6.98 8.76 70 4.11 6.98 8.74 75 4.13 6.99 8.73 80 4.15 7.00 8.71 85 4.18 7.00 8.70 90 4.20 7.01 8.68 95 4.23 7.02 8.67 NIST Temp. (°C) tiamo 2.
PAGE 1018

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) NIST1 NIST4 NIST7 NIST9 NIST13 pH 1 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 13 35 1.691 4.025 6.843 9.107 12.133 40 1.697 4.036 6.837 9.076 11.984 45 1.704 4.049 6.834 9.046 11.841 50 1.712 4.064 6.833 9.018 11.705 55 1.715 4.075 6.834 8.985 11.574 60 1.723 4.091 6.836 8.962 11.449 65 1.732 4.108 6.840 8.941 - 70 1.743 4.126 6.845 8.921 - 75 1.754 4.145 6.852 8.902 - 80 1.766 4.164 6.859 8.885 - 85 1.778 4.
PAGE 1019

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) DIN1 DIN3 DIN4 DIN7 DIN9 DIN12 pH 1 pH 3 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 12 60 1.11 3.04 4.70 6.76 8.92 11.69 65 1.11 3.04 4.71 6.76 8.90 11.56 70 1.11 3.04 4.72 6.76 8.88 11.43 75 1.12 3.04 4.74 6.77 8.86 11.30 80 1.12 3.05 4.75 6.78 8.85 11.19 85 1.12 3.06 4.77 6.79 8.83 11.08 90 1.13 3.07 4.79 6.80 8.82 10.99 95 - - - - - - Fis2 Fis4 Fis7 Fis10 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 0 - 4.01 7.13 10.34 5 1.
PAGE 1020

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Fis2 Fis4 Fis7 Fis10 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 85 - 4.18 7.06 9.61 90 - 4.21 7.08 9.60 95 - 4.23 7.11 9.60 FBS4 FBS7 FBS9 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 0 4.01 7.11 9.20 5 4.00 7.08 9.15 10 4.00 7.05 9.10 15 4.00 7.02 9.05 20 4.00 7.00 9.00 25 4.01 6.98 8.96 30 4.01 6.97 8.91 35 4.02 6.96 8.88 40 4.03 6.95 8.84 45 4.04 6.94 8.80 50 4.06 6.94 8.77 55 4.07 6.93 8.74 60 4.09 6.93 8.71 65 4.11 6.
PAGE 1021

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Mettler-Toledo Temp. (°C) MT2 MT4 MT7 MT9 MT11 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 11 0 2.03 4.01 7.12 9.52 11.90 5 2.02 4.01 7.09 9.45 11.72 10 2.01 4.00 7.06 9.38 11.54 15 2.00 4.00 7.04 9.32 11.36 20 2.00 4.00 7.02 9.26 11.18 25 2.00 4.01 7.00 9.21 11.00 30 1.99 4.01 6.99 9.16 10.82 35 1.99 4.02 6.98 9.11 10.64 40 1.98 4.03 6.97 9.06 10.46 45 1.98 4.04 6.97 9.03 10.28 50 1.98 4.06 6.97 8.99 10.10 55 1.
PAGE 1022

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Mer2 Mer4 Mer7 Mer9 Mer12 pH 2 pH 4 pH 7 pH 9 pH 12 20 2.00 4.00 7.00 9.00 12.00 25 2.00 4.01 6.98 8.95 11.88 30 2.00 4.01 6.98 8.91 11.72 35 2.00 4.01 6.96 8.88 11.67 40 2.00 4.01 6.95 8.85 11.54 45 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.82 11.44 50 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.79 11.33 55 2.00 4.00 6.95 8.76 11.19 60 2.00 4.00 6.96 8.73 11.04 65 2.00 4.00 6.96 8.715 10.97 70 2.01 4.00 6.96 8.70 10.90 75 2.01 4.
PAGE 1023

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) MerC4.01 MerC7.00 MerC9.00 MerC10.00 pH 4.01 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 pH 10.00 45 4.05 6.97 8.87 9.80 50 4.06 6.97 8.84 9.73 55 - - - - 60 - - - - 65 - - - - 70 - - - - 75 - - - - 80 - - - - 85 - - - - 90 - - - - 95 - - - - Beckmann Temp. (°C) tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) Bec4 Bec7 Bec10 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 0 4.00 7.12 10.32 5 4.00 7.09 10.25 10 4.00 7.06 10.18 15 4.00 7.04 10.12 20 4.00 7.
PAGE 1024

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Bec4 Bec7 Bec10 pH 4 pH 7 pH 10 70 4.12 6.99 - 75 4.14 7.00 - 80 4.16 7.00 - 85 4.18 7.01 - 90 4.19 7.02 - 95 4.21 7.03 - Radiometer Temp. (°C) 1008 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Rad4.01 Rad7.00 Rad9.18 pH 4.01 pH 7 pH 9.18 0 4.000 7.118 9.464 5 3.998 7.087 9.395 10 3.997 7.059 9.332 15 3.998 7.036 9.276 20 4.001 7.016 9.225 25 4.005 7.000 9.180 30 4.011 6.987 9.139 35 4.018 6.977 9.102 40 4.027 6.970 9.
PAGE 1025

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) Rad4.01 Rad7.00 Rad9.18 pH 4.01 pH 7 pH 9.18 4.240 - - Bak4 Bak7 Bak9 Bak10 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 pH 10.00 0 4.00 7.13 9.23 10.30 5 4.00 7.09 9.17 10.24 10 4.00 7.05 9.10 10.17 15 4.00 7.03 9.05 10.11 20 4.00 7.00 9.00 10.05 25 4.00 6.98 8.96 10.00 30 4.01 6.98 8.91 9.96 35 4.02 6.98 8.88 9.93 40 4.03 6.97 8.84 9.89 45 4.04 6.97 8.81 9.86 50 4.05 6.96 8.78 9.82 55 4.07 6.96 8.76 9.
PAGE 1026

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Temp. (°C) Ham4.01 Ham7.00 Ham9.21 Ham10.01 pH 4.01 pH 7.00 pH 9.21 pH10.01 5 4.01 7.09 9.45 10.19 10 4.00 7.06 9.38 10.15 15 4.00 7.04 9.32 10.11 20 4.00 7.02 9.26 10.06 25 4.01 7.00 9.21 10.01 30 4.01 6.99 9.16 9.97 35 4.02 6.98 9.11 9.92 40 4.03 6.97 9.06 9.86 45 4.04 6.97 9.03 9.83 50 4.06 6.97 8.99 9.
PAGE 1027

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Temp. (°C) 5.6.5.5 5.6.5.5.1 Pre4 Pre7 Pre9 pH 4.00 pH 7.00 pH 9.00 30 4.00 6.99 8.96 35 4.01 6.98 8.93 40 4.02 6.98 8.90 45 4.03 6.97 8.87 50 4.04 6.97 8.84 55 4.06 6.97 8.81 60 4.07 6.97 8.79 65 4.09 6.98 8.76 70 4.11 6.98 8.74 75 4.13 6.99 8.73 80 4.15 7.00 8.71 85 4.18 7.00 8.70 90 4.20 7.01 8.68 95 4.23 7.02 8.67 CAL MEAS pH CAL MEAS pH - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL MEAS pH ▶ Properties..
PAGE 1028

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command CAL MEAS pH are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command CAL MEAS pH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
PAGE 1029

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .STY Type of stop with which the command was stopped: 1 = normal;0 = manual or after error CAL MEAS pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ CAL MEAS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1030

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 867 Selection Default value 1|2 1 855 Selection Default value 1 1 Titrino Selection Default value 1 | 2 | diff 1 Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
PAGE 1031

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 855 and 867. 5.6.5.5.
PAGE 1032

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Min. waiting time The measured value is not accepted until the minimum waiting time has elapsed, even if the signal drift has already been reached. The drift continues to be checked while the waiting time is elapsing. Titrando, 855, 867 Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 10 s Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed.
PAGE 1033

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 5.6.5.6 5.6.5.6.1 -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C CAL LOOP Conc CAL LOOP Conc - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP Conc ▶ Properties.. ▶ CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name' Loop command for the calibration of ion-selective electrodes, which is used together with the command CAL MEAS Conc.
PAGE 1034

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.6.2 CAL LOOP Conc - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL LOOP Conc ▶ Properties.. ▶ CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name' The number of standards and their concentration are defined in the dialog window CAL LOOP Conc - 'Command name'. Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Standards Number of standards Selection of the number of standards with which the concentration calibration is to be carried out. Selection Default value 1|2|3|4|5 2 Unit conc.
PAGE 1035

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Devices This command can be executed with the following devices: Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 857, 904, 905, 906, 907 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command CAL MEAS Conc are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure.
PAGE 1036

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.7.2 Identification Description .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.MEA Measured value for the last measuring point in the measuring point list in the unit of the measured value .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .
PAGE 1037

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table. Selection Default value Device types | Titrando Titrando Sensor Measuring input Selection of the measuring input to which the sensor is connected.
PAGE 1038

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | off 1 off Means that no stirrer will be used. Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Range Default value -15 ... 15 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this check box is activated, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.5.7.
PAGE 1039

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Max. waiting time If the signal drift has not yet been reached, then the measured value will be accepted when the maximum waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time has not been newly entered then a waiting time that is suitable for the drift will be calculated automatically according to the following equation: Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 110 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Range Default value 0.
PAGE 1040

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command CAL Cond are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, sensors and stirrers. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Conductivity standard Defining the values or the type of the input for calibration with one standard.
PAGE 1041

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.8.2 5 Method Identification Description .LP.TEM Temperature for the last measuring point of the measuring point list in °C .LP.TIM Time in s until the last measuring point in the measuring point list is reached .MTE Temperature measurement with sensor; 1 = on, 0 = off) .NMP Number of measuring points in the measuring point list .RTE Reference temperature in °C (only MEAS Cond and CAL Cond) .
PAGE 1042

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Sensor Sensor Selection of a conductivity sensor from the conductivity sensors available in the sensor table. Selection Default value 'Sensor name' | Conductivity sensor Conductivity sensor Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. 856 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected. The temperature will then be measured continuously.
PAGE 1043

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. 5.6.5.8.3 CAL Cond - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ CAL Cond ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Measurement Measurement frequency 712 Selection Default value auto | 300 Hz | 2.
PAGE 1044

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note A constant measured value is often only achieved after a certain time, as mixing and possibly the reaction itself require a certain time. The response time of an electrode can also increase with time, i.e. reaching a constant measured value takes longer and longer. Drift-controlled measurement is particularly advisable in such cases, as the measured values are not applied until equilibrium has almost been achieved.
PAGE 1045

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 856 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999.0 s 2.0 s Measurement without drift control If the option Measurement without drift control has been selected, then the following parameters will be displayed: Measuring time Maximum period of time for measurement. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 s 120 s Measuring interval Time interval for entering a measuring point in the measuring point list. Max. number of entries? 712 Range Default value 0.4 ... 999999 s 2.
PAGE 1046

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value Input | Request | Template Input Input If this option is selected, then the values for the conductivity standard can be entered directly. Request If this option is selected, then first the current temperature of the solution is measured after the start of the determination. Afterwards, the dialog window Data Conductivity standard will appear (see Chapter 5.6.5.8.5, page 1031). The method continues running after the data has been entered.
PAGE 1047

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Name standard List box with conductivity standards. The data of one of these standards is used to calculate the temperature coefficient for the specified reference temperature. Selection 5.6.5.8.5 'Conductivity standard' CAL Cond - Data Conductivity standard Dialog window: Method ▶ CAL Cond ▶ Data Conductivity standard Current temperature Display of the currently measured temperature of the conductivity standard.
PAGE 1048

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command CAL Cond are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device. Measuring parameters Parameters for setting the measurement procedure. Calibration wavelengths Input of the reference wavelengths. Definition of the behavior of the calibration.
PAGE 1049

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.5.9.2 5 Method Identification Description .CP{#}.MEA Measured wavelength of the calibration point in nm. If no measured peak can be assigned, then not found will be entered. .CP{#}.REF Reference wavelength of the calibration point in nm. .FIN Command status: 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0 = Command was started but not ended, invalid = Command was not started (variable not available). .
PAGE 1050

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.5.9.3 CAL Spec - Measuring parameters Tab: Method ▶ CAL Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Measuring parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The parameters for the measuring procedure can be defined on this tab. Integration time Integration time for spectrum recording. Range Default value 0.01 ... 600000 ms 6 ms Averaged spectra The number of spectra that are recorded and averaged. Range Default value 5.6.5.9.4 1 ...
PAGE 1051

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Calibration wavelength # to edit the values selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.5.9.5, page 1035). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.5.9.5 CAL Spec - Calibration wavelength # Tab: Method ▶ CAL Spec ▶ Properties... ▶ Calibration wavelengths ▶ [New]/[Properties] ▶ Calibration wavelength # Wavelength Range Default value 5.6.6 5.6.6.1 200.0 ... 1100.
PAGE 1052

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.
PAGE 1053

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .TITER Titer value of the solution used for the command .VOL Currently dosed volume ADD - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ ADD ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the device, the dosing device and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 1054

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 846, 856, 867 Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 1 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 730, 774 Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 758, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 1055

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 846, 856, 867 Selection Default value 1|2|3|4 2 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection Default value 1|2|3 2 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct.
PAGE 1056

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done. Titrando, 846, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range -15 ... 15 Default value 8 Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the dosing has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 846, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864 and 874. 5.6.6.2.
PAGE 1057

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing rate The rate at which the volume is dosed. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered dosing rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Titrando, 846, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min Default value maximum mL/min 730, 774, 778, 789 Range Default value 0.01 ... 160.
PAGE 1058

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Fill automatically at start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the buret is filled automatically before dosing. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos, 846, 855, 856, 864, 867, 814, 815 and 874. Using this option ensures that the buret is filled before the execution of the ADD command and that it is located at the dosing port of the selected solution.
PAGE 1059

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Commands Depending on the measured value, one of the following two DOS commands can be selected: ￭￭ 5.6.6.3.2 5.6.6.3.4DOS pH Controlled dosing with the measured quantity pH. 5.6.6.3.5DOS U Controlled dosing with the measured quantity voltage U. DOS - Monitored dosing Tab: Method ▶ Commands ▶ DOS ▶ Dosing parameters Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1060

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands The time defined as Dosing time corresponds to the net dosing time t1+t2, i.e. the filling time of the exchange or dosing unit is included in the total. If the specifications with the maximum dosing rate cannot be achieved, then dosing is carried out at the maximum rate. The following formula can be used to estimate whether the maximum dosing rate is used or not: Dosing rate = desired flow rate in mL/min • 2.
PAGE 1061

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Flow rate of a single dosing device The cylinder volume and the filling time of the exchange or dosing unit must be taken into account for the calculation of the effective flow rate. Cylinder volume Max. flow rate Exchange unit Dosing unit 1 mL approx. 80 mL/h --- 2 mL --- approx. 170 mL/h 5 mL approx. 400 mL/h approx. 430 mL/h 10 mL10 mL approx. 800 mL/h approx. 860 mL/h 20 mL approx. 1.6 L/h approx. 1.7 L/h 50 mL approx. 4.0 L/h approx. 4.
PAGE 1062

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Cylinder volume Filling time in s max. 100 mL/min 50 mL/min 10 mL/min 1 mL 24/--- --- --- --- 2 mL ---/22 --- --- --- 5 mL 24/22 --- --- 34 10 mL10 mL 24/22 --- --- 64 20 mL 24/22 --- 28 124 50 mL 24/22 34 64 304 Example 1 L reagent is to be dosed within 1 hour with a 50 mL exchange unit. What is the dosing rate? Total duration = 60 min Dosing volume = 1000 mL Filling time = 24 s (at max.
PAGE 1063

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Any Either one of the two sizes. Limit exceeding Selects the exceeded limit for which a track is to be started. Selection Default value Lower limit | Upper limit | Any | OK Any Any The track will be started if either the upper or the lower limit is exceeded. OK The track is started when the monitored quantities are once again within the limit values (including hysteresis). Track name Selects the track that is to be started automatically.
PAGE 1064

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command DOS pH are configured in the following 5 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Dosing parameters Parameters for the dosing settings. Stop conditions Definition of conditions which cause the stop of the dosing. Monitoring Definition of measured value and temperature monitoring.
PAGE 1065

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) 5 Method Identification Description .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...3) for the last measuring point of the measuring point list .LP.
PAGE 1066

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.3.4.2 DOS pH - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DOS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 1067

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 1068

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
PAGE 1069

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode from the list of sensors available in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for the determination. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode pH electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement. Titrando, 855 Selection Default value continuous | automatic | off automatic continuous A temperature sensor must be connected.
PAGE 1070

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855. Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command.
PAGE 1071

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Note The dosing rate should be reduced for viscous liquids. Dosing time Time during which dosing is to be carried out. This parameter is only displayed for Dosing criterion = Volume/Dosing time or Dosing rate/ Dosing time. Range Default value 0 ... 9999999 s 100 s Pause Waiting period before dosing is started.
PAGE 1072

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.3.4.4 Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 5.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 5s DOS pH - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DOS pH ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The conditions for stopping the dosing are defined on this tab. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the dosing.
PAGE 1073

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method off Means that no stop will take place. Filling rate Rate at which the dosing cylinder is to be filled after dosing. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. If the entered filling rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ...
PAGE 1074

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.000 ... 20.000 -20.000 Titrino Range Default value -20.00 ... 20.00 -20.00 Lower hysteresis pH Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0 ... 20.000 20 Upper limit pH Upper limit of the measured value.
PAGE 1075

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stop determination The running DOS command is quit, then the exit track (if present) is started and the determination is stopped. Stop command (only Titrando) The running DOS command is quit, then the next command is executed. Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted and a message appears.
PAGE 1076

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Upper limit Upper limit of the temperature. When the temperature exceeds this value, the action Temperature upper limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature.
PAGE 1077

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, max. 20 entries can be defined for the track that is to be started automatically when a particular limit is exceeded. [New] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for a new track call can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.6.3.3, page 1046). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for the selected track call can be edited (see Chapter 5.6.6.3.
PAGE 1078

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 1079

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command DOS U are configured in the following 5 tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for devices, dosing devices, sensors and stirrers. Dosing parameters Parameters for the dosing settings. Stop conditions Definition of conditions which cause the stop of the dosing. Monitoring Definition of measured value and temperature monitoring.
PAGE 1080

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 1064 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .IME Initial measured value (measured value before start conditions are processed) in the unit of the measured value .ITE Initial temperature (temperature before start conditions are processed) in °C .LP.CAx Calculated value × (1...
PAGE 1081

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.3.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .VOL Dosed volume DOS U - General/Hardware Tab: Method ▶ DOS U ▶ Properties... ▶ General/Hardware Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The general parameters for the control device, the dosing device, the sensor and the stirrer are defined on this tab. Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 1082

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 855 Selection Default value 1|2|3 1 Titrino Selection internal D0 736, 751, 799 Selection Default value internal D0 | external D1 | external D2 internal D0 Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table.
PAGE 1083

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Solution Input of a solution name or selection of a solution from the solutions defined in the solution table. If intelligent exchange or dosing units are used, then a check will be made in the method sequence to see whether the correct solution has been set on the selected dosing device and whether the dosing device type is correct. With non-intelligent exchange or dosing units, only the cylinder volume is checked.
PAGE 1084

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Sensor Selection of a sensor of type pH electrode, metal electrode, pH electrode or ISE electrode from the list of sensors defined in the sensor table. The calibration data for the sensor will be adopted for pH and ISE electrodes. Selection Default value Sensor name | pH electrode | Metal electrode | ISE electrode Metal electrode Temperature measurement Type of temperature measurement.
PAGE 1085

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Switch off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched off automatically when the command has finished. This parameter is displayed only for Titrandos and 855. Switch on/off automatically on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the stirrer will be switched on automatically at the start of the command and will be switched off automatically at the end of the command.
PAGE 1086

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Note The dosing rate should be reduced for viscous liquids. Dosing time Time during which dosing is to be carried out. This parameter is only displayed for Dosing criterion = Volume/Dosing time or Dosing rate/ Dosing time. Range Default value 0 ... 9999999 s 100 s Pause Waiting period before dosing is started.
PAGE 1087

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.6.3.5.4 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.1 ... 999999 s 5.0 s Titrino Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 5s DOS U - Stop conditions Tab: Method ▶ DOS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Stop conditions Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The conditions for stopping the dosing are defined on this tab. If more than one stop condition is in effect at the same time, then the criterion which is fulfilled first will stop the dosing.
PAGE 1088

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Titrino Range Default value 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min maximum mL/min Note The filling rate should be reduced for viscous liquids. 5.6.6.3.5.5 DOS U - Monitoring Tab: Methods ▶ DOS U ▶ Properties... ▶ Monitoring Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1089

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Lower hysteresis Lower hysteresis of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds the lower limit by this hysteresis value, then the event Measured value lower limit ok is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value 0.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2.0 mV Upper limit Upper limit of the measured value. If the measured value exceeds this limit, then the event Measured value upper limit exceeded is triggered. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -2000.0 ... 2000.0 mV 2000.
PAGE 1090

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Wait for [Continue] Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted and a message appears. As soon as the monitored measured value is again within the limits (including hysteresis) reagent dosing can be resumed by pressing the [Continue] button in this message box. Wait for limit ok Reagent dosing in the current DOS command is interrupted.
PAGE 1091

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 855 Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 150.0 °C Titrino Range Default value -170.0 ... 500.0 °C 500.0 °C Upper hysteresis Upper hysteresis of the temperature. When the temperature once again falls below the upper limit by this hysteresis value, the action Temperature upper limit ok is triggered Titrando Range Default value 0.0 ... 150.0 °C 0.
PAGE 1092

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Track call on limit exceeding In this table, which cannot be edited directly, a maximum of 20 entries can be defined as to which track is to be started automatically when a particular limit value is exceeded. [New] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for a new track call can be entered (see Chapter 5.6.6.3.3, page 1046). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Track call in which the parameters for the selected track call can be edited(see Chapter 5.
PAGE 1093

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Delete] Deletes the calculated measured value selected in the table. Additional external measured values Additional external measured values on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then a maximum of 3 new measured values can be taken over and saved from existing measuring commands (i.e. MEAS) which can also be displayed in curves under the designation Extern 1…3 and used in formulas as variables 'Command name.
PAGE 1094

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command LQH are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General/Hardware Parameters for device and dosing device. Parameters Parameters for adjusting the Liquid Handling function. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command LQH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.6.4.
PAGE 1095

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 1096

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands of the working life, the validity of the titer and the GLP test interval for the selected solution. Selection Default value 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. 5.6.6.4.3 LQH - Parameters Tab: Method ▶ LQH ▶ Properties... ▶ Parameters Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters The liquid handling function is defined on this tab. Function Selection of the liquid handling function that is to be carried out.
PAGE 1097

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Exchange position With this function the cylinder is filled via the given port first. The valve disc is then turned to Port 2 and the dosing unit can be removed from the dosing drive. Change port With Change port the valve disc is only moved to the given port; no piston movement takes place.
PAGE 1098

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Dosing Range Default value 0.00000 ... 99999.9 mL 10.0000 mL Aspirate Range Default value 0.00000 ... 50.0 mL 10.0000 mL Rate Speed at which the commands Dosing, Fill, Aspirate, Eject and Exchange position are carried out. The maximum rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing device used. Aspiration and Ejection of the sample should be done at a rate <10 mL/min. Range Selection Default value 5.6.6.5 5.6.6.5.1 0.01 ... 166.
PAGE 1099

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command PREP are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ PREP - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command PREP and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.6.5.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
PAGE 1100

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 1101

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Solution name' | not defined not defined not defined No tests will be carried out. 5.6.6.6 5.6.6.6.1 EMPTY EMPTY - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ EMPTY ▶ Properties... ▶ EMPTY - 'Command name' Command for Emptying cylinder and tubing of a dosing unit.
PAGE 1102

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.6.6.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .CYL Cylinder volume of the exchange or dosing unit used for the command .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended EMPTY - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ EMPTY ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1103

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Dosing device Dosing device Selection of the dosing device (Dosinos only) to be emptied. All the dosing device connections which are possible with the selected device type are displayed.
PAGE 1104

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7 5.6.7.1 Automation commands Automation commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... ▶ Automation Commands for the operation of Sample Processors. The following eight automation commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.2 5.6.7.2.1 MOVE Moving to a rack position or an external position. SWING Swinging of the robotic arm (with Swing Head only). LIFT Moving to a lift position. PUMP Switching on/off the connected or built-in pumps.
PAGE 1105

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method MOVE - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command MOVE and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.7.2.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
PAGE 1106

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 1107

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Move = Rack position Range 1 ... 999 Default value 1 Move = Special beaker (for 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874) Range 1 ... 16 Default value 1 Move = Special beaker (for 730) Range 1 ... 8 Default value 1 Move = Special beaker (for 774) Input 1 Move angle This parameter specifies the angle by which the sample rack should be rotated relative to the current position. It is only visible for Move = Relative angle. 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range -259.90 ... 259.
PAGE 1108

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop determination and series The determination as well as the series are stopped. An Exit track will be started if there is one defined. Parameters Shift rate Selection of the speed at which the sample rack rotates. Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s Shift direction Selection of the shift direction of the sample rack. Selection Default value auto | + | – auto auto The direction of rotation with the smallest angle of rotation is selected automatically.
PAGE 1109

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command SWING are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ SWING - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command SWING and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.7.3.2 Identification Description .
PAGE 1110

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 1111

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Range Default value 1 ... 4 1 Swing angle Angle by which the robotic arm is to be swung relative to the current position. This parameter is visible only when Swing = Relative angle. Range Default value -180.0 ... 180.0 ° 10.0 ° Parameters Swing rate Speed of the robotic arm when swinging to an external position or a particular angle. Range Default value 5.6.7.4 5.6.7.4.1 10 ... 55 °/s 55 °/s LIFT LIFT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ LIFT ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1112

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7.4.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended .LPO Current absolute lift position in mm (entry when ending the command) LIFT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ LIFT ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1113

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Target Tower Selection of the tower of the Sample Processor for moving to the required lift position. Both Tower 1 and Tower 2 can always be selected even if the Sample Processor has only one tower. Selection Default value 1|2 1 Lift position Entering the desired lift position in mm or selecting a lift position predefined for the rack Work position, Shift position, Rinse position or Special position. A lift height of 0 mm corresponds to the Home position.
PAGE 1114

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 778, 789, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Range 5 ... 25 mm/s Default value 25 mm/s 5.6.7.5 5.6.7.5.1 730 Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s 774 Range Default value 3 ... 12 mm/s 12 mm/s PUMP PUMP - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ PUMP ▶ Properties... ▶ PUMP - 'Command name' Command for controlling pumps connected to or built into the Sample Processor.
PAGE 1115

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended PUMP - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ PUMP ▶ Properties... ▶ PUMP - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1116

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Selection Default value 1|2 1 Pump(s) Selection of the pump that is to be actuated. The pump(s) can either be builtin or externally connected. With 1+2 both pumps at the selected tower will be switched at the same time. Selection Default value 1 | 2 | 1+2 1 1 Pump 1 is actuated. 2 Pump 2 is actuated. 1+2 Both pumps at the selected tower will be switched at the same time.
PAGE 1117

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Coulometer: 756, 831 Dosing Interface: 846 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample Processor: 730, 778, 789, 814, 815, 857, 864, 874 Robotic Titrosampler: 855 Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command STIR are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ STIR - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command STIR and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command n
PAGE 1118

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 1119

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Unknown is displayed either with devices unable to read out the stirrer type or if no stirrer is connected Selection 801 Magnetic Stirrer | 802 Rod Stirrer | 803 Ti Stand magnetic stirrer | 804 Ti Stand rod stirrer | unknown Stirring rate Setting the stirring rate or rotational speed. The algebraic sign of the stirring rate changes the direction in which the stirring is done.
PAGE 1120

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Period of operation The stirrer can be switched on for a particular period. 5.6.7.7 5.6.7.7.1 Range Default value 0 ... 9999.9 10.0 Selection Default value s | min s RACK RACK - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ RACK ▶ Properties... ▶ RACK - 'Command name' Command for initialization of the attached sample rack. The rack, lift and robotic arm (if present) are reset, the rack code is read off and the corresponding rack data is transferred to the Sample Processor.
PAGE 1121

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.7.7.2 5 Method RACK - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ RACK ▶ Properties... ▶ RACK - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 1122

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.7.8 5.6.7.8.1 HEATER HEATER - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ HEATER ▶ Properties... ▶ HEATER - 'Command name' Command for controlling the oven temperature.
PAGE 1123

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run. Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Device type Display or selection of the device type.
PAGE 1124

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Off causes heating at the maximum possible heating rate (see device manual). Range Selection Default value 1 ... 999 min off off Timeout If the Target temperature is not reached within the defined Heating time then this waiting time will start. This parameter is only visible if a Heating time has been defined. Range Selection Default value 1 ...
PAGE 1125

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command FLOW are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ FLOW - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command FLOW and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.7.9.2 Identification Description .
PAGE 1126

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead. If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 1127

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Gas flow Selection Default value Switch on | Switch off Switch on Switch on Switches on the gas flow. Switch off Switches off the gas flow. 5.6.8 5.6.8.1 Result commands Result commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... ▶ Results Commands for the calculation, storage and output of results. The following four result commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.2 5.6.8.2.
PAGE 1128

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Result parameters The parameters for the individual results on the results table are configured on the following 3 tabs: ￭￭￭ Definition Entering the formula, assigning the unit and switching the statistics on/ off. Monitoring Settings for result monitoring. Options Saving the result as common variable or as titer.
PAGE 1129

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .OVF Limit value violation for result; 1 = limit exceeded, 0 = limit not exceeded .RSD Relative standard deviation for the result .STS Statistics status for the result; 1 = Statistics on, 0 = Statistics off .UNI Result unit (Text) CALC - Result table Dialog window: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ CALC 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Moves the selected result up (changes the sequence).
PAGE 1130

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Result name Name of the result. Formula Calculation formula of the result. Device Result unit. Decimal places Number of decimal places of the result. Assignment Assignment of the result to one of the 25 result columns in the determination overview. Statistics Display whether the statistics calculation for the result is switched on or off. Result monitoring Display whether the monitoring for the result is switched on or off. 5.6.8.2.
PAGE 1131

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.2.4 5 Method CALC - Formula assistant Dialog window Method ▶ CALC ▶ [New] ▶ New resultat ▶ Formula-Assistent Existing determination templates can be adapted quickly in this dialog window to the required command drawings. Formula Display of the calculation formula of the result. In this formula, only the variable identifications themselves will be listed for command variables, and not the command designations.
PAGE 1132

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Select result variable All of the result variables of the formula template will be listed. 'Variable' Selection of the result variable. Selection 'Result variable' 'Result variable' Selection of a result variable defined in the method. Enter constant All of the constants of the formula template will be listed. 'Constant' Entering the constants. Range Default value -1.0E+99 ... 1.0E+99 (max.
PAGE 1133

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device Unit of the result for the output (text only). The unit can be used in further calculations as variable 'RS.Result name.UNI'. Input Selection Default value 16 characters empty | ppm | % | g/L | mg/L | mg/mL | mg/100 g | mol/L | mmol/L | mL | µL | g | mg | µg | °C | s | mV | µA | S/cm | mS/cm | µS/cm | µL/min empty Decimal places Number of decimal places for the output of the calculated result. This parameter is ignored for results of the type text or date/time.
PAGE 1134

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Statistics on | off (Default value: on) Mean value, absolute and relative standard deviations are calculated for the result if this option is enabled. Statistical calculations are only carried out if statistics is also activated in the START command and in the Run window. Description Freely selectable entry of a description of the result.
PAGE 1135

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method into the text field (see Chapter 2.5.2, page 79). The formula editor can also be called up inside the text field (see Chapter 2.4, page 23). Input Text (unlimited) Display message on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, all active tracks are stopped and the message defined in the text box will be displayed in the event that the limits are exceeded.
PAGE 1136

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop determination The determination is stopped and the next determination of the series is started. Stop determination and series The current determination and the series are terminated. [Save as template] Open the dialog window Save result template in order to save the result parameters as template for the creation of new results (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.6.2, page 1122). 5.6.8.2.5.3 Result - Options Tab: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1137

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Save result as titer on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, then the result will be saved as a titer under the selected name. If statistics is activated for this result, then the current mean for this result will automatically be saved as titer. Solution name Name of the solution for which the result is to be saved as titer. List of all the solutions defined Selection Note If no solutions have been defined, then the combo box will be empty.
PAGE 1138

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.8.2.6.2 Save result template Dialog window: Method ▶ CALC ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] ▶ [Continue] ▶ [Save as template] ▶ Save result template Name of result template The result template is saved under this name in the configuration database. Input Default value 100 characters 'Result name' Description Freely definable description of the result template. This description is displayed in the dialog windows New result and Manage templates. 1000 characters Input 5.6.
PAGE 1139

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Appearance The command has the following appearance: Parameters The parameters for the command DATABASE are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ DATABASE - Properties All the defined databases in the list of databases are displayed in the properties window of the command DATABASE. Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DATABASE and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.
PAGE 1140

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Database Name of the database in which the determination data is stored. [New] Opens the dialog window Database - New for the selection of a new database. [Properties] The dialog window Database - 'Database name' in which a different database can be selected. [Delete] Deletes the database selected in the list. Note The DATABASE command has to be executed at the end of the method sequence in order to guarantee that all data of a determination are stored.
PAGE 1141

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command REPORT and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.8.4.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
PAGE 1142

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands PDF file on | off (Default value: off) The report is stored as PDF file in the directory selected if this option is activated. A click on opens the dialog window Save, in which the desired directory is selected and a name for the PDF file can be entered. Send E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The PDF file is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated.
PAGE 1143

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.8.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended EXPORT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ EXPORT ▶ Properties... ▶ EXPORT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Export template Export template List box with saved export templates with which the determination data is to be exported (see Chapter 4.4.4.1, page 244).
PAGE 1144

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.9.2 5.6.9.2.1 CTRL CTRL - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ CTRL ▶ Properties... ▶ CTRL - 'Command name' Command for Setting remote output lines.
PAGE 1145

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.9.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended CTRL - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ CTRL ▶ Properties... ▶ CTRL - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 1146

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Set lines Output signal Input of the binary pattern for the output signal or selecting a predefined signal pattern. It is possible to enter the following characters: 0 = line inactive 1 = line active * = any line status p = set pulse (pulse length = 200 ms). If an impulse with a different length is to be emitted, a corresponding template must be defined.
PAGE 1147

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note For Titrinos with 3 output lines: only the first 3 characters are used. 5.6.9.3 5.6.9.3.1 SCAN SCAN - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ SCAN ▶ Properties... ▶ SCAN - 'Command name' Command for scanning remote input lines.
PAGE 1148

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.9.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .TOU Timeout status: 1 = Timeout expired; 0 = Timeout not expired SCAN - Properties Tab: Method ▶ SCAN ▶ Properties... ▶ SCAN - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1149

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Titrando, 856, 867, 814, 815, 855, 864, 874 Selection 1|2|3|4 Default value 1 Scan lines Input signal Input of the binary pattern for the expected input signal or selecting a predefined signal pattern.
PAGE 1150

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.9.4 5.6.9.4.1 SEND SEND - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ SEND ▶ Properties... ▶ SEND - 'Command name' Command for Sending event messages to commands, tracks or to tiamo.
PAGE 1151

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Note A maximum of 10 event messages can be entered. [New] Opens the dialog window Send event message for entering a new event message (see Chapter 5.6.9.4.3, page 1135). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Send event message to edit the event message selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.9.4.3, page 1135). [Delete] Deletes the selected event message. 5.6.9.4.3 SEND - Send event message Dialog window: Method ▶ SEND ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1152

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 1136 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Recipient Selection Event message Significance System - Hold Hold determination (all tracks). This corresponds to the [Hold] button in the dialog window Run in the program part Workplace. System - Quit Cancel determination (Series continues). System - Stop Stop determination and series. This corresponds to the [Stop] button in the dialog window Run in the program part Workplace. Command All track commands Hold Hold selected track.
PAGE 1153

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Recipient Selection Event message Significance Command SET, KFT, KFC Start Titration Start titration. For this, the option Only start titration by a start command from a SEND command must be enabled on the Conditioning tab for the titration command (Example: KFT). Note In order that the event message from the SEND command can be handled by the RECEIVE command, the RECEIVE command must be running and at the same time be able to process the message being sent.
PAGE 1154

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ RECEIVE - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command RECEIVE and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.5.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
PAGE 1155

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [Properties] Opens the dialog window Wait for event/status to edit the event message selected in the table which is to be waited for (see Chapter 5.6.9.5.3, page 1139). [Delete] Deletes the selected event message. Timeout on | off (Default value: off) If this option is activated, then a maximum waiting time for event messages can be entered.
PAGE 1156

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Event/ Status Type Significance Commands Start Event Command has been started. All End Event Command has been finished. All Dosing Event The dosing of the titration has been started. DET, MET Measure Event The measurement of the titration has been started. DET, MET Busy Status System is in status BUSY, HOLD or ERROR. All Finished Status Command has been terminated at least once.
PAGE 1157

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Parameters The parameters for the command TRANSFER are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ TRANSFER - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command TRANSFER and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.6.2 Identification Description .
PAGE 1158

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 1159

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 5.6.9.6.3 min | s s TRANSFER - Transfer command Dialog window: Method ▶ TRANSFER ▶ Properties... ▶ Transfer command Name Freely definable name for the transfer command. Input 50 characters Selection Default value Read | Write | Wait for | Poll Read Action Read The character string defined in Command (optional) will be sent to the device and the answer of the device is expected within the Timeout defined for the device settings and evaluated.
PAGE 1160

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note All ASCII characters can be entered with its two-digit hex code after backslash (e.g. \1B = Escape). Variable Selection of an available method variable under which the received data for the Actions Read, Wait for and Scan will be saved. Method variables must be defined in the START command for this purpose which are not permitted to be assigned to any system variables. Method variables Selection Note It is also possible to create several indexed variables (e.g.
PAGE 1161

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [abc] OR function for single characters receive a or b or c [a-z0-9] one character in the specified range m or 5 (hallo) substring string contains hallo ^hallo start of line hallo is at start of line hallo$ end of line hallo is at end of line . any single character a or 4 or - or … \. point .
PAGE 1162

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Parameters The parameters for the command WEIGH are configured in the following dialog window: ￭ WEIGH - Properties Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command WEIGH and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.9.7.2 Identification Description .
PAGE 1163

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Device type Display or selection of the device type. If a device is selected under Device name, then this Device type field can no longer be edited, and the device type belonging to the selected device is displayed instead If the option not defined is selected as Device name, any device types or device groups which are able to execute the command can be selected, independently of the devices in the device table.
PAGE 1164

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10 5.6.10.1 Miscellaneous commands Miscellaneous commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... These commands can be used independently of the connected devices. The following five commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.2 5.6.10.2.1 REQUEST Requesting sample data. CALL Calling tracks (subprograms). LOOP Multiple execution of a command sequence. WAIT Interrupts the method run. SEQUENCE Combines several commands to one command.
PAGE 1165

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.2.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended REQUEST - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ REQUEST ▶ Properties... ▶ REQUEST - Data input # Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1166

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note Text is selected as type in the default settings for the sample identifications ID1 … ID16. If you wish to enter numbers for these method variables for use in later calculations, then these variables must be switched in the dialog window Method variable - Sample position to the type number. START ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1167

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.10.2.3 5 Method REQUEST - Sample data request Dialog window: Workplace ▶ [START] ▶ Sample data request Message Displaying the message defined in the command REQUEST. Sample position Position of the sample on the Sample Processor rack. This number can be used for moving to a sample position with the command MOVE when Target position = Sample position. Range Default value 1 ... 999 1 ID1 … ID16 Sample identifications. Type = Number Range -1.0E-99 ... 1.
PAGE 1168

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Note Sample data can be loaded directly from a balance or a barcode reader. The data import must be enabled for this purpose in the Run window in which the determination is started (Single determination or Determination series) and the corresponding devices must be defined. The dialog window Sample data request will be closed automatically after the data has been received from these devices.
PAGE 1169

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command CALL and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.10.3.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .
PAGE 1170

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands [Properties] Opens the dialog window Call to edit the call selected in the table (see Chapter 5.6.10.3.3, page 1154). [Delete] Deletes the selected call. 5.6.10.3.3 CALL - Call Dialog window: Method ▶ CALL ▶ Properties... ▶ [New] Call text Text (can be edited to suit) for designating the call that is shown in the command presentation. Input Default value 50 characters 'empty' Track name Selecting the track to be called.
PAGE 1171

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method A LOOP command just inserted has an arrow on the left-hand side with which a loop can be created by using the mouse to drag this arrow to the desired command in the same track. Two different types of loops will result, depending on whether the arrow has been dragged upward or downward: Repeat loop tiamo 2.
PAGE 1172

5.6 Commands 1156 ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ tiamo 2.
PAGE 1173

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The LOOP command is at the end of the loop for Repeat loops. As soon as one stop criterion is fulfilled (case 2), the command after the LOOP command is carried out. If no stop criterion is fulfilled, (case 1), the loop is run through again. In either case, the loop is run through at least once. The LOOP command is at the beginning of the loop for While loops.
PAGE 1174

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10.4.2 LOOP - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ LOOP ▶ Properties... ▶ LOOP - Loop # Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Stop criteria Definition of three possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the loop. Maximum run number on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, then the maximum number of runs will be used as stop criterion by repeat and while loops.
PAGE 1175

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method The input field contains the expression for the condition(s) which can be created or edited with the formula editor after pressing on or doubleclicking in the text field (see Chapter 2.4, page 23). If the condition is fulfilled (evaluation of the formula gives the result 1 = true), then the loop will be canceled when the LOOP command is called. Input Default value 5.6.10.5 1000 characters 'empty' WAIT 5.6.10.5.1 WAIT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ WAIT ▶ Properties.
PAGE 1176

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10.5.2 WAIT - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ WAIT ▶ Properties... ▶ WAIT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1177

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Record message on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be documented in the determination. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, the message defined in the text box will be sent to the address defined under [E-mail]. [E-mail] Open the dialog window Send E-mail for defining the E-mail parameters (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1178

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.10.6.2 Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has not ever been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has been ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been ended SEQUENCE - Properties Dialog window: Method ▶ SEQUENCE ▶ Properties... ▶ SEQUENCE - Sequence # Command name Name of the command.
PAGE 1179

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Use this context-sensitive menu item to paste the commands at the end of the table that were copied onto the clip board. Paste 5.6.11 5.6.11.1 ProcessLab commands ProcessLab commands - Overview Menu item: Method ▶ Paste ▶ New command... Commands for controllers which are controlled by ProcessLab. The following commands can be selected: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.2 DIGITAL OUT Actuation of digital outputs. DIGITAL IN Loading of digital inputs.
PAGE 1180

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Once the command has expired, the statuses and the set values of all of the digital outputs used in the command are saved to command variables. Parameters The parameters for the command DIGITAL OUT are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General Digital outputs Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command DIGITAL OUT and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.11.2.
PAGE 1181

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value 'Device name' | not defined not defined not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Note If the option not defined is selected, then no ports can be selected in the Digital outputs tab, because it is not known to which device this block refers. If a method is generated independently of a device, then a device for the editing of the block will nevertheless still need to be selected.
PAGE 1182

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Functions Moves the selected line up. Moves the selected line down. [New] Opens the dialog window Digital output # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.2.4, page 1166). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Digital output # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.6.11.2.4, page 1166). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.11.2.
PAGE 1183

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Start delay Waiting time in seconds or minutes before the initiated action is started. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 0 Selection Default value s | min s Working time The time for which the digital output can be set to ACTIVATED can be specified in seconds or minutes when Action = Timer. It is reset to DEACTIVATED after the working time has expired. Range Default value 0.01 ...
PAGE 1184

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 5.6.11.3 5.6.11.3.1 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 DIGITAL IN DIGITAL IN - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ DIGITAL IN ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1185

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.3.2 5 Method Identification Description .BSY Command status; 1 = BUSY, HOLD or ERROR; 0 = READY; invalid (variable not available) = Command has never been started .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL').
PAGE 1186

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.3.3 DIGITAL IN - Stop criteria Tab: Method ▶ DIGITAL IN ▶ Stop criteria Command name Name of the command. 25 characters Input Stop criteria Definition of possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the command. Maximum run time on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching on/off the stop criterion Maximum run time. If the maximum run time is reached, then the command will be stopped.
PAGE 1187

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.4 5 Method ANALOG OUT 5.6.11.4.1 ANALOG OUT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ ANALOG OUT ▶ Properties... ▶ ANALOG OUT - 'Command name' Devices This command can be executed with the IO Controller. Appearance The command has the following appearance: Mode of operation The values which are written to the analog outputs can be either calculation results or fix values.
PAGE 1188

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.4.2 Identification Description .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL'). The value returned corresponds to the status of the IO port after completion of the command ANALOG OUT - General Tab: Method ▶ ANALOG OUT ▶ Properties... ▶ General Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table.
PAGE 1189

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method If a command block originates from a different device, the Port description of which does not exist on the currently selected device, then the affected lines will be presented in red script. Functions Moves the selected line up. Moves the selected line down. [New] Opens the dialog window Analog output # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.4.4, page 1173). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Analog output # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.6.
PAGE 1190

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Mapping range and unit of the value are defined in the configuration of the analog output. If the value that is to be written is less than 0% mapping, then the smallest possible value (low level (0%)) will be output; in the case of values greater than 100% mapping, the largest possible value (high level (100%)) will be output. 5.6.11.5 5.6.11.5.1 ANALOG IN ANALOG IN - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ ANALOG IN ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1191

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6.11.5.2 5 Method Identification Description .FIN Command status; 1 = Command has ended at least once, 0, invalid (variable not available) = Command has never ended .UNI Mapping unit which is defined in the configuration for an IO port. .[VAL] Value of the command variables (optional, i.e. Command name.Port name' = Command name.Port name.VAL').
PAGE 1192

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Stop criteria Definition of possible stop criteria. The first stop criterion to be fulfilled will stop the command. Maximum run time on | off (Default value: off) Check box for switching on/off the stop criterion Maximum run time. If the maximum run time is reached, then the command will be stopped. Range Default value Selection Default value 0 ... 999.9 0 min | s min Note The run time is interrupted if the method is stopped with [HOLD].
PAGE 1193

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Mode of operation Stepping motors can be actuated with time controls. Parameters The parameters for the command STEPPING MOTOR are configured on the following 2 tabs: ￭￭ General Stepping motors Command variables The following command variables are generated in the method run by the command STEPPING MOTOR and can be used in formulas under the designation 'Command name.Variable designation': 5.6.11.6.2 Identification Description .
PAGE 1194

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands not defined In this case, the device name must be assigned by the user at the start of the method. Note If the option not defined is selected, then no ports can be selected in the Stepping motors tab, because it is not known to which device this block refers. If a method is generated independently of a device, then a device for the editing of the block will nevertheless still need to be selected. One can however afterwards set the device name back to not defined.
PAGE 1195

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method [New] Opens the dialog window Stepping motor # in order to edit a new line (see Chapter 5.6.11.6.4, page 1179). [Properties] Opens the dialog window Stepping motor # in order to edit the selected line (see Chapter 5.6.11.6.4, page 1179). [Delete] Deletes the selected line. 5.6.11.6.4 STEPPING MOTOR - Stepping motor # Dialog: Method ▶ STEPPING MOTOR ▶ Stepping motor ▶ Properties ▶ STEPPING MOTOR - Stepping motor # Port description Selection of the stepping motor.
PAGE 1196

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 mm 0 mm Angle The angle to be moved to. Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 ° 0° Note The moving direction of the stepping motor depends on the algebraic sign of the value for Distance or Angle: ￭￭ ≥0: Move in positive direction.
PAGE 1197

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method s | min s Selection Default value 5.6.11.7 PORT 5.6.11.7.1 PORT - Overview Dialog window: Method ▶ PORT ▶ Properties... ▶ PORT - 'Command name' Command for changing the port position on a multi-port valve.
PAGE 1198

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5.6 Commands 5.6.11.7.2 PORT - Properties Dialog window Method ▶ PORT ▶ Properties... ▶ PORT - 'Command name' Command name Name of the command. Input 25 characters Device Device name Selection of a device from those available in the device table. The only devices which shall be offered are those with which the command can run.
PAGE 1199

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 5 Method Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over automatic ascending The valve moves towards the target port in ascending direction. descending The valve moves towards the target port in descending direction. automatic The valve determines the shortest path to the target port on its own. not over The valve moves towards the target port in such a way that the port specified in the parameter Not over will not be traversed.
PAGE 1200

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General 6 Configuration 6.1 Configuration - General 6.1.1 Configuration - Definition Program part: Configuration Definition Configuration is to be understood as all of the tiamo settings for devices, titrants/solutions, sensors, common variables and rack data. Configuration also includes methods, security settings, user administration, program administration, templates, and Audit Trail.
PAGE 1201

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1.3 6 Configuration Configuration - Menu bar 6.1.3.1 Configuration - Main menus Program part: Configuration The menu bar in the program part Configuration includes the following main menu items: ￭￭￭￭ 6.1.3.2 File Export, import, backup, restore configuration data. View Change layout, load view, save view, quick access to subwindows. Tools User administration, security settings, program administration, Audit Trail, templates, options.
PAGE 1202

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General Load view... Load a saved configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.3, page 89). Save view... Save current configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.4, page 89). Quick access Open subwindow not contained in the current configuration view. Toolbar Enable/Disable the toolbar display. 6.1.3.4 Configuration - Menu Tools Program part: Configuration Manual control Manually control the devices connected (see Chapter 8.1, page 1466).
PAGE 1203

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1.4 6 Configuration Configuration - Toolbar Program part: Configuration Change layout... Modify layout of loaded configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.2, page 88). Laod view... Load a saved configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.3, page 89). Save view Save current configuration view (see Chapter 3.1.7.4, page 89). User administration… Manage users and groups of users with access rights, signature rights and options (see Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 1192).
PAGE 1204

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General Presentation The subwindows can be enlarged or made smaller to suit by dragging the separating bar between the windows. By clicking on the button above at the right, the subwindows can be maximized so that only one subwindow is displayed in the main window. The original view of all subwindows is restored when the button in the maximized subwindow is clicked on again.
PAGE 1205

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Backup/Restore configuration data ￭￭￭ Backup configuration data automatically Save configuration data manually Restore configuration data Templates ￭￭￭ Custom calibration buffers Input lines Output lines Options ￭ 6.1.7 6.1.7.
PAGE 1206

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.1 Configuration - General Automatic load The standard procedure is that the view saved when the program is terminated will be loaded automatically the next time that the program is opened. As an alternative a standard view can be defined for each user group that is loaded automatically the first time that the program part is opened.
PAGE 1207

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Move the selected subwindow upward (modifies sequence). Move the selected subwindow downward (modifies sequence). 6.1.7.3 Load view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Load view… ▶ Load view With the symbol or the menu item View ▶ Load view... the dialog window Load view is opened. Name Name of the view that should be loaded. [Rename] Rename the selected view. [Delete] Delete the selected view. [Load] Load the selected view. 6.1.7.
PAGE 1208

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.1.7.5 Rename view Dialog window:Workplace / Database / Configuration ▶ View ▶ Rename view… ▶ Rename view To be able to rename a view, either open the dialog window Load View or Save View and press the [Rename] button. The Rename View window is opened. Rename view to Enter a new name for the view. Input 6.1.7.
PAGE 1209

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Structure The dialog window User administration is divided into two parts, the size of which can be modified with the mouse. In the left-hand part the user groups with their assigned users are listed in tree-form, the right-hand side shows details of the selected items. Each user group, with the exception of the Removed users group, contains the following items: ￭￭￭￭ Access rights Assigns access rights to the four program parts and their menu bars.
PAGE 1210

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Description Description of the user group. Input 256 characters [Rename group] Renames selected user group. [Delete group] Deletes selected user group. [Copy group] Copies selected user group. [Add group] Adds new user group. User group members The table showing the group members contains information about all members of the selected user group. The table can neither be edited nor sorted. User Short name of the user. Full name Full name of the user.
PAGE 1211

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration deactivated. If a subitem, e.g. the menu Tools, is deactivated in the configuration then the box for the configuration is colored gray. Blocked functions are deactivated for the particular user, i.e. shown in gray.
PAGE 1212

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Delete signatures Level 2 If this check box is enabled then users in this user group can delete all signatures at Level 2. The method can be edited again. Selection Default value off | on off Permissions for determinations Signature Level 1 If this check box is enabled then users in this user group can electronically sign determinations at Level 1.
PAGE 1213

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Executable methods Only methods with Signature Level 2 If this check box is enabled, then only methods with Signature Level 2 can be started at the workplace by users in this user group. Selection Default value 6.2.1.2.
PAGE 1214

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Group name Name of new group. Input 24 characters With [OK] a new group is generated under this name with standard settings; it does not contain any users. The Description field and the table of group members are empty. 6.2.1.2.
PAGE 1215

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note It is only possible to delete a user group when the group no longer contains any users. 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.3.1 User User - Details Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ User administration If in the left-hand side of the dialog window User administration a user in a user group has been selected, then details of the user will be shown at the right-hand side. User Shows the short name of the user that must be entered in the field User.
PAGE 1216

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration removed Users with the status removed can no longer log in. If the status of a user is changed from activated or deactivated to removed, then the user is automatically moved to the group Removed users. If a removed user is subsequently again given the status activated or deactivated then a dialog window appears for selecting the group to which the user is to be assigned.
PAGE 1217

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration User Short name of new user that must be used to log in at program start. After the name has been entered a Start password must be issued with which the user is entered in the list of users. 24 characters Input 6.2.1.3.
PAGE 1218

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Security settings can be exported and imported. This means that these settings can be exchanged between different client/server systems. The security settings can be put out as PDF file using the menu item File ▶ Print (PDF) ▶ Security settings. Tabs The security settings are configured on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭ 6.2.2.2 Login/Password protection Settings for login and password protection.
PAGE 1219

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration as his/her user name. If this check box is disabled, then all subsequent parameters are deactivated. Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: on Password monitoring by tiamo If this option is enabled then the password will be monitored by tiamo according to the following parameters.
PAGE 1220

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Note With Windows 2000, proceed as follows for password monitoring by Windows: 1. 2. 3. Run/Execute "secpol.msc". Under "Local Policies/User Rights Assignment", switch on the guideline "Act as part of the operating system" for all desired user groups. Restart computer.
PAGE 1221

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: off Note If the automatic logout is enabled (see below) only the same user or a user with administrator rights can log in again independent of these option settings. No editing of workplaces in 'BUSY' status If this check box is enabled then, after a user has logged out manually, a newly logged-in user on the workplaces still open with running determinations can neither edit data or trigger actions.
PAGE 1222

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Note The immediate termination of all determinations on all activated workplaces with the emergency stop button still remains possible after an automatic logout. Password policies Enforce unique password If this check box is enabled then this ensures that a user can use a given password only once.
PAGE 1223

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Range Default value 6.2.2.3 1 ... 999 Days 365 Days FDA default: 365 days Test login for password monitoring by Windows Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings ▶ Login/Password protection ▶ Test login The user's Windows password must be entered in this dialog window when switching on the option Password monitoring by Windows(see Chapter 6.2.2.2, page 1202). The test login will be used to check whether the user name matches the Windows user name.
PAGE 1224

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration Modifications Comment on modification of methods If this check box is enabled then each time that a method is modified a modification reason and a modification comment must be entered; these are saved in the method and shown in the method history. The reason and comments are also recorded in the Audit Trail.
PAGE 1225

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: on Range Default value 1 ... 60 min 10 min FDA default: 10 min Remove password after signature If this check box is enabled then the password must be entered again after each signature. Selection Default value on | off off FDA default: on Sign each determination separately If this check box is enabled then each determination contained in the determination overview must be signed individually.
PAGE 1226

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration [New] Adds a new reason. [Edit] Edits the selected reason. [Delete] Deletes the selected reason. 6.2.2.7 Sending E-mail Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Security settings ▶ Login/Password protection ▶ [E-mail...] ▶ Send E-mail E-mail address E-mail address of the recipient. Input 200 characters Subject Title for describing the message.
PAGE 1227

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Authentication on | off (Default value: off) Check box for activating the authentication of the sender when sending the E-mail or selection of the authentication method. Selection Default value SMTP | SMTP after POP SMTP POP server Address of POP mail server. Input 200 characters Port Port number of the POP mail server. Range Default value 1 ... 65536 110 User Name of the user for access to mail server. The name need not agree with the Windows user name.
PAGE 1228

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration ￭ 6.2.3.2 6.2.3.2.1 Licenses List of installed licenses with number of clients. This tab is only shown on the server of a client/server installation. Backup directories Backup directories Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Program administration ▶ Backup directories Table with the defined backup directories. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence.
PAGE 1229

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note If the backup directory is on a network drive the saving date should be added manually to the Backup name because the saving date information is not available when the directory is restored. Note Make sure that you have read and write access rights on the selected directory. 6.2.3.2.3 Edit backup directory Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Program administration ▶ Backup directories ▶ [Edit] ▶ Edit backup directory Name Name for the backup directory.
PAGE 1230

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.2 Administration 6.2.3.3 Clients Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Program administration ▶ Clients Table with information about the computers on whichtiamo is installed. The table cannot be edited. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence. Client ID Shows the ID for the client that has been entered for the client/server installation.
PAGE 1231

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note In client/server systems this tab is only visible on the server and only for members of the Administrators user group. License code Shows the entered license code. Number of licenses Shows the number of clients to have been enabled with the license code. [Add licenses] Adds new, additional licenses. The dialog window Add licenses opens. License code Entry of the license code. 6.3 Configuration data 6.3.1 Export/Import 6.3.1.
PAGE 1232

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Common variables on | off (Default value: on) Exports configuration data for common variables (see Chapter 6.8.1, page 1301). Rack data on | off (Default value: on) Exports configuration data for sample changer racks (see Chapter 6.10.1, page 1317). Sample solutions (TC conductivity) on | off (Default value: on) Exports the configuration data for calculating the temperature coefficients of sample solutions (see Chapter 6.9.2, page 1310).
PAGE 1233

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Buffer data on | off (Default value: on) Exports configuration data for custom buffers (see "Buffer table", page 1223). Conductivity standards on | off (Default value: on) Exports configuration data for conductivity standards (see Chapter 6.3.3.4.1, page 1227). E-mail templates on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved E-mail templates (see Chapter 6.3.3.5, page 1228). Security settings on | off (Default value: on) Exports saved security settings (see Chapter 6.2.
PAGE 1234

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Devices on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for devices (see Chapter 6.5.1, page 1248). Titrants/Solutions on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for titrants and solutions (see Chapter 6.6.2.1, page 1255). Sensors on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for sensors (see Chapter 6.7.2.1, page 1278). Common variables on | off (Default value: on) Imports configuration data for common variables (see Chapter 6.
PAGE 1235

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Result templates on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved result templates (see Chapter 5.6.8.2.6.1, page 1121). Control chart templates on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved control card templates (see Chapter 4.4.2.1, page 234). Curve overlay templates on | off (Default value: on) Imports saved curve overlay templates (see Chapter 4.4.3.1, page 238).
PAGE 1236

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data 6.3.2 Backup/Restore 6.3.2.1 Backup configuration data automatically Dialog window: Backup ▶ Configuration ▶ Data ▶ Automatically ▶ Backup configuration data automatically Automatic backup on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the configuration database will be backed up automatically in the defined backup directory at the required time interval. The whole configuration database (including method groups and methods) is backed up.
PAGE 1237

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3.2.2 6 Configuration Backup configuration data manually Dialog window: Backup ▶ Configuration ▶ File ▶ Manually ▶ Backup Configuration File Manually Backup target Backup directory Selection of a pre-defined backup directory (see Chapter 6.2.3.2.1, page 1212). Note Make sure that you have read and write access rights on the selected directory. Backup name Selection of an existing name for the backup file or entry of a new name.
PAGE 1238

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data ￭ tiamo multi Make sure that tiamo is closed on all clients connected to the server and on the server itself. 2 Start restore program ￭￭ tiamo light, tiamo full Start ConfigRestore.exe in the program directory …\tiamo\bin. tiamo multi Start ConfigRestore.exe in the program directory …\tiamo\bin on the server. The dialog window Restore configuration data opens.
PAGE 1239

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [Start] Starts the recovery of the configuration database. After the start, a progress bar appears in the window. When the backup has been completed, the dialog window closes automatically. 6.3.3 Templates 6.3.3.
PAGE 1240

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Note For your own calibration buffers you should enter the pH values for the particular temperature range in which your pH calibration and measurements will later be carried out. If you do not know the pH values for individual temperatures these will be automatically calculated by linear interpolation. 6.3.3.2 6.3.3.2.1 Templates for input lines Managing the templates for input lines Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Templates ▶ Input lines...
PAGE 1241

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 1 = Line active and * = Any line status. Selection Default value Bit-pattern with 8 characters (0, 1, *) | ******** ******** The input lines and bits are numbered from right to left: Input 76543210 Bit 76543210 Example: *******1 expects an active input line 0 (1 = set). For example, this line is set by a Titrino after a titration has been completed and the Titrino can accept a start signal again.
PAGE 1242

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Creating new template or editing template With or the dialog window New template or Edit template opens for entering a new template or for editing an existing template. Signal name Name of the pattern for the output signal. 25 characters Input Output signal Entry of the bit-pattern for the output signal with exactly 14 characters.
PAGE 1243

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3.3.4 6.3.3.4.
PAGE 1244

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Input 1000 characters Measured observational pairs Table with the value pairs for Temperature and Conductivity, which were determined for the conductivity standard. The table cannot be edited, but with a click on the column title the temperature can be sorted according to either increasing or decreasing sequence. [New] Creation of a new value pair. The window Edit value pair opens, in which a new value pair can be entered (see Chapter 6.3.3.4.3, page 1228).
PAGE 1245

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [New] Generates a new template. The window Edit E-mail template opens, in which a new template can be defined (see Chapter 6.3.3.5.2, page 1229). [Edit] Edits the selected template. The window Edit E-Mail template opens, in which the template can be edited (see Chapter 6.3.3.5.2, page 1229). [Delete] Deletes the selected template. [Copy] Copies the selected template and saves it under the name Copy of..... 6.3.3.5.
PAGE 1246

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data Range Default value 1 ... 1 … 65536 25 Authentication on | off (Default value: off) Check box for activating the authentication of the sender when sending the E-mail or selecting the authentication method. Selection Default value SMTP | SMTP after POP SMTP POP server Address of POP mail server. Input 3 … 200 characters Port Port number of the POP mail server. Range Default value 1 ... 1 … 65536 110 User Name of the user for access to mail server.
PAGE 1247

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3.4.2 6 Configuration Options - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Options ▶ Options ▶ General Dialog language Dialog language Selection of the dialog language. Selection Default value German | English | additional languages (dependent on installed language patches) English Note For the altered setting to become effective the program must be restarted. Emergency stop button If this option is enabled then the emergency stop button will be shown in all program parts.
PAGE 1248

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.3 Configuration data then any alterations that may have been made to the view will not be saved and at the next program start the original, manually saved view will be loaded. Configuration settings on | off (Default value: off) Switches Save configuration view on/off when exiting the program. Workplace settings on | off (Default value: off) Switches Save workplace view on/off when exiting the program.
PAGE 1249

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4.1 Audit Trail - General 6.4.1.1 Audit Trail - Definition Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail Definition The term Audit Trail means the FDA-compliant logging of all user actions with which in tiamo data is generated, altered or deleted. Each of these actions is saved as a line in the Audit Trail table together with the date, time and name of the logged-in user.
PAGE 1250

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4.1.3 Audit Trail - Menu bar 6.4.1.3.1 Audit Trail - Main menus Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail The menu bar in the Audit Trail program window contains the following main menu items: ￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.1.3.2 File Prints, exports, archives, deletes Audit Trail View Updates table, defines column display. Filter Defines and uses special filters and quick filters.
PAGE 1251

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Special filter... Defines and uses special filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.1, page 1240). Remove filter Removes current filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.5, page 1244). 6.4.1.3.5 Audit Trail - Menu Tools Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail Monitoring Defines Audit Trail table monitoring (see Chapter 6.4.2.9, page 1247). Installation log Opens log file for installation.
PAGE 1252

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Selection Default value All entries | Quick filter | Temporary filter | Filter name All entries All entries The table is shown unfiltered. Quick filter The table is filtered according to the last defined Quick filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.3, page 1240). Temporary filter The table is filtered according to the last defined, not saved Special filter (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.1, page 1240).
PAGE 1253

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.1.7 6 Configuration Audit Trail - Functions Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail... ▶ Audit Trail In the Audit Trail program window the following functions can be carried out: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.2 6.4.2.1 Filter Audit Trail Update Audit Trail Export Audit Trail Archive Audit Trail Delete Audit Trail Print Audit Trail Audit Trail table Audit-Trail - Table Program window: Configuration ▶ Tools ▶ Audit Trail...
PAGE 1254

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Date Date, time and time zone of the action. User Short name of the logged-in user. Full name Full name of the logged-in user. Client Name of the Client on which the action was carried out or which is affected by the action. Category Program part to which the action belonged. Action Short description of the action. Details Detailed information about the action. Archived Shows whether the action has already been archived or not (only archived actions can be deleted).
PAGE 1255

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4.2.2 Filter Audit Trail Update Audit Trail Export Audit Trail Archive Audit Trail Delete Audit Trail Print Audit Trail Monitor Audit Trail Verify Audit Trail Audit Trail - Column display Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ View ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display View ▶ Column display… opens the dialog window Column display. Here you can define the columns that are to be shown in the Audit Trail table.
PAGE 1256

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail ￭ 6.4.2.3.2 Remove filter Audit Trail - Last filter Menu item: Audit Trail ▶ Filter ▶ Last filter With the menu item Filter ▶ Last filter or the symbol in the Audit Trail program window, the previously used filter is reactivated. 6.4.2.3.
PAGE 1257

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration [Save filter] Opens the dialog window Save filter in which the filter criteria entered in the table can be saved as a special filter under the required name (see Chapter 6.4.2.3.4.3, page 1243). [Delete filter] Deletes the special filter that is currently loaded. Table view The overview table shows all the defined filter criteria and cannot be directly edited.
PAGE 1258

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail 6.4.2.3.4.2 Special filter - Editing filter criterion Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ Filter ▶ Special filter... ▶ Special filter - Database 'ConfigDB' ▶ [Edit] ▶ Edit line ▶ Edit filter criterion # With [Edit] ▶ Edit line the dialog window Edit filter criterion # opens in which the filter criterion selected in the filter table can be edited. Link Selection of the type of link (logic operator) with the previous filter criterion.
PAGE 1259

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note If for the column Date, the Operator Today is selected then filtering will be carried out for the actual date. In the field Comparative value, a range in days (-9999 … 9999) can also be defined for filtering based on the current date. Comparative value Selection or entry of the comparative value for the filter criterion. for fields of type 'Text' Input 250 characters ^* can be used as a wildcard for any strings.
PAGE 1260

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Filter name Name under which the special filter is to be saved. 50 characters Input [Save] Saves filter under given name. Note The filters are saved globally in the configuration database and are therefore available for all clients. 6.4.2.3.
PAGE 1261

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Selection Default value All records | Selected records All records All records All the entries from the filtered Audit Trail table are exported. Selected records Only the entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be exported. Note Audit Trail entries are exported in text format and cannot be imported back into the Audit Trail table. The export file contains a checksum which allows to verify whether the file has been modified later on. 6.4.2.
PAGE 1262

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.4 Audit Trail Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to exporting them, i.e. the Audit Trail entries are stored in text format and cannot be imported back into the Audit Trail Table. The difference between this and exporting is that the archived entries can be marked in the column Archive and then deleted. The archive file contains a checksum which allows to verify whether the file has been modified later on. 6.4.2.
PAGE 1263

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 24 characters Input 6.4.2.8 Print Audit Trail Dialog window: Audit Trail ▶ File ▶ Print (PDF)... ▶ Print Audit Trail (PDF) The menu item File ▶ Print (PDF)... or the symbol in the Audit Trail program window is used to open the dialog window Print Audit Trail (PDF). Selection Selection Default value All records | Selected records Selected records All records All the entries from the filtered Audit Trail table will be printed.
PAGE 1264

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices Maximum number Maximum number of entries allowed in the Audit Trail table. If this number is exceeded an error message appears. Range Default value 6.4.2.10 10 ...
PAGE 1265

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Peripheral devices of USB devices Peripheral devices connected to USB devices (e.g. dosing devices, stirrers, etc.) are also recognized automatically. If they are connected or removed while a program is running, then after confirming a corresponding message, either the device must be reinitialized, the USB connection must be interrupted and then re-established or the program must be restarted.
PAGE 1266

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices Note The device status is permanently monitored and updated for USB devices only. For Metrohm devices with RS-232 connection, the current status at the last access to the device is shown always. For balances, barcode readers and generic RS-232 devices, the status cannot be monitored. It will be set to ok after confirmation of the connection test. Start-up Date on which the device was added to the device table.
PAGE 1267

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Functions The menu [Edit] beneath the device table contains the following menu items: New… Adds manually a new device connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface(see Chapter 6.5.2.2, page 1251). Delete Deletes the selected device. Only devices that are not connected can be deleted(see Chapter 6.5.2.3, page 1251). Properties… Edits the selected device (see Chapter 6.5.3, page 1253). Column display… Defines columns for the device table(see Chapter 6.5.2.
PAGE 1268

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.5 Subwindow Devices 6.5.2.4 Devices - Column display Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display With[Edit] ▶ Column display…, the dialog window Column display opens. Here you can define the columns that are to be shown in the device table. Available columns Shows all the fields that can be shown as columns in the device table. Displayed columns Shows all the fields that will be shown as columns in the device table.
PAGE 1269

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Table contents The following information concerning the ignored devices is shown in the table: Device type Type of device. Device serial number Serial number of the instrument. [Delete] The highlighted device is removed from the list. It will be recognized automatically again at the time of the next program start and can be included in the list of devices. 6.5.2.
PAGE 1270

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 756/831 Coulometer 712 Conductometer 856 Conductometer 867 pH Module 846 Dosing Interface 730 Sample Changer 774 Oven Sample Processor 778/789 Sample Processor 814/815 Sample Processor 855 Robotic Titroprocessor 864 Balance Sample Processor 874 Oven Sample Processor Avantes Spectrometer RS-232 device Balance Barcode reader IO Controller Stepping Motor Controller 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.
PAGE 1271

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Non-intelligent exchange units (EU) and dosing units (DU) Non-intelligent exchange and dosing units must be added manually to the solution table. 6.6.2 Solution table 6.6.2.1 Solution table Subwindow:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions Contents In the solution table the following information about automatically recognized or manually added solutions is shown as standard: Solution name Name of the solution.
PAGE 1272

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions With menu item [Edit] ▶ Column display... further columns from the solution properties can be shown. Note Lines that contain red entries will also show the line number with a red background. Table view The solution table cannot be edited directly. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence.
PAGE 1273

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Note Solutions in intelligent 806 Exchange Units (IEU) or 807 Dosing Units (IDU) with data chip need only be manually added and configured when they are fitted to devices that cannot read out the data automatically (e.g. Titrino, 700 Dosino). 6.6.2.3 Delete solution Menu item:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete With [Edit] ▶ Delete, the solution selected in the solution table is deleted. 6.6.2.
PAGE 1274

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.2.5 Print list of solutions Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Print (PDF)… ▶ Print list of solutions (PDF) [Edit] ▶ Print (PDF)… opens the dialog window Print list of solutions (PDF). Orientation Selection Default value Portrait | Landscape Portrait Portrait Prints the solution table in portrait format. Landscape Print the solution table in landscape format.
PAGE 1275

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.3.2 6 Configuration Properties - Solution Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Solution - 'Name' ▶ Solution Solution name Name of the solution (can be entered or selected). Input 24 characters Selection Selection from predefined names Concentration (value) Concentration value of the solution. This value for the concentration of a solution to be used in the titration commands DET, MET, SET and KFT, is available as a variable ''Command name.
PAGE 1276

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Range Default value 0 ... 999 Days 999 Days Expiry date Expiry date of the solution. The date can be selected by pressing in the dialog window Select date. When a date has been entered the Working life will be automatically adapted. Selection Date selection Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on.
PAGE 1277

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.3.3 6 Configuration Properties - Titer Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Titer Titer determination Titer (value) Titer value of the solution. The value for the titer of a solution used by the titration commands DET, MET, SET and KFT is available for calculations as a variable 'Command name.TITER''Command name. Range Default value 1E-12 ... 1E+12 (max. 10 digits) 1.000 Titer (unit) Titer unit of the solution.
PAGE 1278

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Rel. standard dev. (s rel) Relative standard deviation for the titer determination in %. Monitoring titer validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the validity of the titer will be monitored. Validity Validity of the titer in days. If a value is entered here then the date for the Next titer determination will be automatically adapted. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 1279

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1280

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Note This parameter is not saved on the data chip of intelligent exchange/dosing units, i.e. this parameter will be empty if the data are written into the solutions table from the IEU/IDU. User Short name of the user logged in during titer determination or when the titer was entered manually. If work is not carried out using login then the user logged in under Windows will be entered automatically.
PAGE 1281

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6.3.5 6 Configuration Titer history Limit values Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Titer history ▶ [Limit values] ▶ Limit values titer Warning and intervention limits can be defined for the titer in the dialog window Limits for titer. If you have defined limits then these will be shown in the graph in orange for warning limits and red for intervention limits. Whether these limits are observed is not monitored, i.e.
PAGE 1282

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.3.6 Properties - Exchange unit Tab: Configuration ▶ Titrants/solutions ▶ Properties ▶ Exchange unit Hardware Name Freely definable designation for exchange unit. Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Type Shows the type of exchange unit: Selection EU | IEU EU Non-intelligent exchange unit without data chip. IEU Intelligent 806 Exchange Unit with data chip. Order number Order number of exchange unit.
PAGE 1283

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration IEU Input Default value 8 characters 'empty' EU Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Parameters for preparation Configures the parameters to be used in the command PREP. Volume Volume to be dosed in during preparation. Range Selection Default value 0.00000 ... 99999.99999 mL Cylinder volume Cylinder volume Cylinder volume The whole contents of the cylinder will be dosed in. Cycles Number of rinsing cycles during preparation. Range Default value 1 ...
PAGE 1284

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Maximum Dosing/Filling rate for exchange unit as a function of the cylinder volume: Cylinder volume Maximum rate 1 mL 3.0 mL/min 5 mL 15.0 mL/min 10 mL 30.0 mL/min 20 mL 60.0 mL/min 50 mL 150.0 mL/min Note Enter lower rates for high-viscosity liquids. Tubing parameters Defines the length and diameter of the tubing connected to the exchange unit.
PAGE 1285

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Length Length of the tubing connecting the cock to the cylinder. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 13.0 cm Diameter Diameter of the tubing connecting the cock to the cylinder. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Reagent bottle Length Length of the tubing connecting the cock to the reagent bottle. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 25.0 cm Diameter Diameter of the tubing connecting the cock to the reagent bottle. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.
PAGE 1286

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions 6.6.3.7 Properties - Dosing unit Tab:Configuration ▶ Titrants/Solutions ▶ Properties... ▶ Dosing unit Hardware Name Freely definable name for the dosing unit. Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Type Shows the type of dosing unit: Selection DU | IDU DU Non-intelligent dosing unit without data chip. IDU Intelligent 807 Dosing Unit with data chip. Order number Order number of dosing unit.
PAGE 1287

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Input Default value 6 Configuration 24 characters 'empty' Serial number Serial number of dosing unit. With intelligent dosing units the serial number is read off automatically and cannot be edited. Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Cylinder volume Cylinder volume of dosing unit. With intelligent dosing units the cylinder volume is read off automatically and cannot be edited.
PAGE 1288

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Dosing rate Dosing port 2 Speed at which dosing is to be carried out at Dosing port 2. The maximum dosing rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit used (see below). When the function is carried out the speed will automatically be reduced to the largest possible value. Range Selection Default value 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min maximum maximum Dosing rate Fill port Speed at which dosing or filling is to be carried out at the Fill port.
PAGE 1289

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Tubing parameters Defines the length and diameter of the tubing connected to the dosing unit. The port assignment can also be altered. These parameters are important for carrying out the dosing unit commands PREP and EMPTY correctly, as the volumes of the tubing connections have to be taken into account. Note Default values have already been entered for the tubing parameters; these correspond to the dimensions of the standard tubing supplied.
PAGE 1290

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 cm 0.0 cm Diameter Diameter of tubing attached to Dosing port 2. Range Default value 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Fill port Port Port to be used as Fill port for aspirating the solution. Selection Default value Port 1 | Port 2 | Port 3 | Port 4 Port 2 Length Length of tubing attached to Fill port. Range Default value 0.0 ... 999.9 25.0 Diameter Diameter of tubing attached to Fill port. Range Default value 0.0 ...
PAGE 1291

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Range Default value 6 Configuration 0.0 ... 9.9 mm 2.0 mm Port assignment of dosing unit: Valve disc Rotating direction Specification of the shift direction of the valve disc. Automatic is the shift direction with the shortest distance. Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over automatic Not over Here you can choose the protected port. The protected port is the one which is not driven at during rotation. Selection Default value 6.6.3.
PAGE 1292

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.6 Subwindow Titrants/Solutions Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test. Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test.
PAGE 1293

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Acoustic signal on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, an acoustic signal will be emitted additionally to the message defined above Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test.
PAGE 1294

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Standard sensors The sensor table contains the following sensors as standard; these cannot be deleted: ￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7.2 Conductivity sensor ISE electrode (ion-selective electrode) Metal electrode pH electrode Temperature sensor Sensor table 6.7.2.1 Sensor table Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Sensors Contents In the sensor table the following information about the configured sensors is shown as standard: Sensor name Name of the sensor.
PAGE 1295

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration pH(0)/E(0) Electrode zero point of the sensor. Next calibration Date on which the next calibration is to be carried out. If calibration data monitoring is switched on and if the set date is before the current date (i.e. the calibration has not yet been carried out) then the date will be shown in red. Additional columns from the Sensor properties can be shown with the menu item Edit ▶ Column display.
PAGE 1296

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors 6.7.2.2 Sensors - Column display Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Sensors ▶ Edit ▶ Column display… ▶ Column display In the dialog window [Column display], you can define the columns to be shown in the sensor table. Columns available Shows all the fields that can be shown as columns in the Sensor table. Columns displayed Shows all the fields that will be shown as columns in the Sensor table.
PAGE 1297

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Ion Selection Default value Ag | BF4 | Br | Ca | Cd | Cl | CN | Cu | F | I | K | Na | NH4 | NO2 | NO3 | Pb | S | SCN | SO4 | Surfactant | Custom F F Selection of the measuring ion from the list or defines another ion with Custom. The valency of the selected measuring ion will also be shown automatically. Name Entry of the name for the self-selected ion. This parameter is only visible if Custom has been selected in the field Ion.
PAGE 1298

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors [OK] The sensor table is produced in the required format as a PDF file and can be opened directly with Acrobat Reader; it can then be printed out and/or saved. 6.7.3 Sensor properties 6.7.3.1 Edit sensor properties Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Sensors ▶ Edit ▶ Sensor With the menu item Edit ▶ Properties… in the subwindow Sensors, the properties window for the sensor selected in the sensor table opens in which the parameters of the sensor can be edited.
PAGE 1299

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Order number Order number of the sensor (read-only for intelligent sensors). Input Default value 24 characters 'empty' Sensor serial number Serial number of the sensor (read-only for intelligent sensors). Input Default value 10 characters 'empty' Device For non-intelligent sensors it is possible to select the device to which the sensor is connected. All the devices in the device table which have a measuring input are shown in the selection list.
PAGE 1300

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Sensor monitoring on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the working life of the sensor will be monitored. Working life Working life of the sensor in days. If a value is entered here then the Expiry date will be automatically adapted. Range Default value 0 ... 999 Days 999 Days Expiry date Expiry date of the sensor. The date can be selected by pressing in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1301

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the working life of the sensor has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it.
PAGE 1302

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Specific calibration data for ISE electrodes Slope Slope of the ISE electrode. This value can be determined automatically with a calibration from the linearized calibration curve or entered manually. The slope of an ISE electrode is available for calculations as the variable 'Command name.SLO. Range Default value -999.9 ... 999.9 mV 59.2/Valency mV E(0) E(0) is the second characteristic quantity of the calibration function U = f(log c).
PAGE 1303

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Shared calibration data Calibration temperature Temperature during the calibration. The display also shows whether the temperature was measured with a Pt1000 or an NTC temperature sensor or entered manually. Range Default value -20.0 ... 150.0 °C 25.0 °C Calibration date Date and time of last calibration that is entered automatically after each automatic calibration or manual entry.
PAGE 1304

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Note The days are monitored, e.g. the calibration becomes invalid when the date changes and not at the time time of day that calibration took place. Can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Range 0 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next calibration Date on which the next calibration is to be carried out. The date can be in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter selected by pressing 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1305

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity of the calibration has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it.
PAGE 1306

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -61.0 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value 2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 25.0 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -31.0 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 16.0 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -23.0 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 12.0 mV for ISE (-4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ...
PAGE 1307

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -25.0 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 23.0 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -16.0 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 17.0 mV for ISE (-4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -12.
PAGE 1308

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors message appears and you can choose whether you will nevertheless accept the value or whether the previous value is to be retained. Lower limit Lower limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -2000.0 mV Upper limit Upper limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 2000.
PAGE 1309

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration pH electrodes, the Slope and the pH(0) are displayed, for ISE electrodes the Slope, E(0) and c(blank value), and for conductivity sensors the cell constant. Slope, pH(0), E(0), c(blank), cell constant The values are shown in the following colors: ￭￭￭￭ Blue, when the values were determined automatically by a method. Black, when the values have been entered manually. Orange, when the values are outside the warning limits.
PAGE 1310

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Black, when the values have been entered manually. ￭ If limits have been defined then the warning limits will be shown in orange and the intervention limits in red. Note The history graph can be copied into the clipboard by using the contextsensitive menu item Copy. [Limits] Opens the dialog window Limits for sensor in which the warning and intervention limits for the calibration data can be defined.
PAGE 1311

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Warning limits for slope (only for pH and ISE electrodes) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on, then the values for the slope will be shown in orange if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower warning limit for the slope. tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 97.5 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 57.2 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.
PAGE 1312

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Upper limit Upper warning limit for the slope. for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 102.5 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 61.2 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -57.2 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 31.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -27.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 21.
PAGE 1313

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Lower limit Lower intervention limit for the slope. for pH electrode Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 % 95 % for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 55 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -62.4 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 26.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -32.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 16.
PAGE 1314

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors for ISE (+1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 62.4 mV for ISE (-1) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -55.0 mV for ISE (+2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 32.7 mV for ISE (-2) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -26.7 mV for ISE (+3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 22.7 mV for ISE (-3) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -16.7 mV for ISE (+4) Range Default value -2.147E+9 ...
PAGE 1315

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 7.500 Intervention limits for pH(0) (only for pH electrodes) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on, then the values for pH(0) will be shown in red if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower intervention limit for pH(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 6.000 Upper limit Upper intervention limit for pH(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 8.
PAGE 1316

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.7 Subwindow Sensors Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV -30 mV Upper limit Upper intervention limit for E(0). Range Default value -2.147E+9 ... 2.147E+9 mV 30 mV Warning limits for cell constant (only for conductivity sensors) on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the values for the cell constant will be shown in orange if the limits are exceeded. Lower limit Lower warning limit for the cell constant. Range Default value 0.001 ...
PAGE 1317

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6.8 Common variables subwindow 6.8.1 Configuration - Common variables Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Common variables Common variables subwindow The subwindow Common variables contains the table with the configured common variables. It can be shown in a separate window in the program part Configuration as a part of the Configuration view or (if not present on the desktop) with View ▶ Quick access.
PAGE 1318

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Common variables subwindow Unit Unit of the common variables. Assignment date Date of the last value assignment for the common variable. Assignment method Name of the method used to assign the value. User Short name of the user logged in during value assignment. Next assignment Date on which the next value assignment is to be carried out. If monitoring the common variable is switched on and the set date is before the current date (i.e.
PAGE 1319

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration New… Adds new common variable manually (see Chapter 6.8.2.2, page 1303). Delete Deletes the selected common variable (see Chapter 6.8.2.3, page 1303). Properties… Edits the selected common variable (see Chapter 6.8.3.1, page 1304). Column display… Defines the columns of the table of Common variables (see Chapter 6.8.2.4, page 1303). Print (PDF)… Outputs the table of common variables as a PDF file (see Chapter 6.8.2.5, page 1304). 6.8.2.
PAGE 1320

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Common variables subwindow Removes the selected column from the table. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column down. 6.8.2.
PAGE 1321

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8.3.2 6 Configuration Properties - Common variable Tab: Configuration ▶ Common variables ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Common variable - 'Name' ▶ Common variable Name Name of common variable. Input 50 characters Type Selection of the type for a new common variable. For existing common variables the type will only be shown; it cannot be edited. Selection Default value Number | Text | Date/Time Number Value Value of common variables.
PAGE 1322

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Common variables subwindow 256 characters Input Assignment date Date and time at which the last value was assigned; this is entered automatically each time that a value is assigned automatically or manually. Note In contrast to automatic value assignment, when assigning the value manually the date is only entered if the value has really been changed. Assignment method Name of the method with which the last value assignment was carried out.
PAGE 1323

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-mail] opens the Send E-mail window.
PAGE 1324

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8 Common variables subwindow Value The values are shown in the following colors: ￭￭￭￭ Blue, if the value has been assigned automatically by a method. Black, when the values have been entered manually. Orange, when the values are outside the warning limits. Red, when the values are outside the intervention limits. If the warning or intervention limits are exceeded then the line number will also be shown with an orange and red background respectively.
PAGE 1325

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.8.3.4 6 Configuration History - Limits Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Common variables ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Common variable - 'Name' ▶ History ▶ [Limit value] ▶ Limits for Common variable - 'Name' In the dialog window Limits for Common variable both warning and intervention limits can be defined for the values of the common variables. If you have defined limits then these will be shown in the graph in orange for warning limits and red for intervention limits.
PAGE 1326

6.9 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow 6.9.1 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) - General Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Sample solutions (TC conductivity) Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow In the subwindow Sample solutions (TC conductivity), the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficients of a sample solution is displayed in tabular form via Chebyshev function.
PAGE 1327

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration c0 ... c4 Coefficients of the Chebyshev polynomial for the calculation of the function. Assignment date Point in time at which the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficient was entered or determined. Assignment method Name of the method with which the automatic value assignment took place. If the value has been entered manually then manual will be shown.
PAGE 1328

6.9 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ If the contents of a field is larger than the column width then the whole contents will be shown as a tooltip if the mouse cursor is kept on the field. Functions The menu [Edit] beneath the table contains the following menu items: New… Adds a new column manually (see Chapter 6.9.2.2, page 1312) . Delete Deletes the selected line (see Chapter 6.9.2.3, page 1312). Properties… Edits the selected line (see Chapter 6.6.3.
PAGE 1329

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Removes the selected column from the table. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column up. Modifies the sequence of displayed columns by moving the selected column down. 6.9.2.
PAGE 1330

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow 6.9.3.2 Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Sample solutions (TC conductivity) ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Sample solution (TC conductivity) ▶ General Name Name of the measurement solution for which the temperature coefficient was determined for conductivity. Input Default value 50 characters 'empty' Comment Comments on the solution to be measured. Input Default value 6.9.3.
PAGE 1331

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration c0 ... c4 Coefficients of the Chebyshev polynomial for the calculation of the function. Range Default value 1E-08 ... 1E+08 0.0 Assignment date Display of the point in time at which the data for the calculation of the temperature coefficient was entered or determined. This value is entered automatically by tiamo. Assignment method Name of the method with which the automatic value assignment took place.
PAGE 1332

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.9 Sample solutions (TC conductivity) subwindow Selection Date selection Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the E-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] Pressing [E-mail] opens the Send E-mail (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81) window.
PAGE 1333

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration 6.10 Rack data subwindow 6.10.1 Configuration - Rack data Subwindow: Configuration ▶ Rack data Rack data subwindow The subwindow Rack data contains the Rack table with all the sample racks for Metrohm sample changers defined for the client. It can be shown in a separate window in the program part Configuration as a part of the Configuration view or (if not present on the desktop) with View ▶ Quick access.
PAGE 1334

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Rack data subwindow Table view The rack table cannot be edited directly. With a click on the column title the table can be sorted according to the selected column in either increasing or decreasing sequence.
PAGE 1335

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Rack name Name for the new rack. The selected name must not already exist. Input 25 characters Rack code Code of the new rack. The selected rack code must not already exist. Input 6.10.2.3 6-figure binary pattern made up of 0 and 1 Deleting rack Menu item: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ [Edit] ▶ Delete With [Edit] ▶ Delete the rack selected in the rack list will be deleted. 6.10.2.
PAGE 1336

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Rack data subwindow in by the Sample Processor in order to recognize the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. The parameters for the rack in position are defined in the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 6.10.3.2 Rack parameters Defines the parameters that are valid for all rack positions.
PAGE 1337

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Rack offset The rack offset is a production-dependent tolerance value between the upper part of the rack and the lower part. The value is determined by a rack adjustment and displayed here. If necessary, it can be edited. Range 6.10.3.3 -5.00 ... 5.00 ° Properties - Lift positions Tab: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Rack data ▶ Lift positions Tower 1 Defines the lift positions for Tower 1.
PAGE 1338

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Rack data subwindow 0 ... 235 mm Range Rinse position Rinse position for Lift 2. This lift position is used for rinsing the electrodes. 0 ... 235 mm Range Shift position Shift position for Lift 2. Each time that the rack shifts, the lift will move to this position if it is located at a lower lift position. If the lift is located at a higher lift position than that defined here, then the shifting will take place at the current lift position.
PAGE 1339

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6 Configuration Work position Tower 1 Work position for the special beaker at Tower 1. Work position Tower 2 Work position for the special beaker at Tower 2. Beaker radius Radius of the special beaker. Beaker sensor Shows whether and which beaker sensor is to be used for the special beaker. [Edit] Opens the dialog window Special beaker # (see Chapter 6.10.3.5, page 1323) for editing the data of the selected special beaker. 6.10.3.
PAGE 1340

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10 Rack data subwindow Beaker radius Radius of the selected special beaker on the rack. If the lift is moved to the work position then this value will be compared with the parameter Min. beaker radius (see Chapter 7.10.3, page 1377) that can be specifically defined for each tower. If Beaker radius samples < min. beaker radius then a corresponding error message will appear. With off the beaker radius will not be checked. Range Selection 1.0 ... 100.
PAGE 1341

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 6.10.3.7 6 Configuration Special beakers Display of the special beaker for the rack in position. Properties - Lift positions (774) Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Rack data ▶ Properties Tower 1 Defines the lift positions for Tower 1. These apply for all rack positions except those that are defined as (see Chapter 6.10.3.8, page 1325). Work position Work position for Lift 1. At this lift position the electrodes, stirrer and buret tips are optimally positioned for work. Range 0 .
PAGE 1342

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando 7 Devices 7.1 Titrando 7.1.1 Titrando - Overview The parameters for the 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 851, 852, 857, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906 and 907 Titrando are set on the following tabs: ￭￭ General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. Note 2.xxx.0010 Titrando models only have one measuring input.
PAGE 1343

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself.
PAGE 1344

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando Measuring input 1/2 (iConnect) ADC type Shows the type of analog-digital converter. Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring input interface. Temperature sensor Selects the type of temperature sensor connected to the measuring input. With the 856 Conductivity Module displayed only. Selection Pt 1000 | NTC Default value Pt 1000 R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ...
PAGE 1345

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices At program start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each program start the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. On attaching an exchange/dosing unit on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each attaching of an exchange or dosing unit the request to prepare the dosing device will appear.
PAGE 1346

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.1 Titrando 7.1.5 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1347

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1348

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Old version Shows the old device program version. New version Shows the new device program version to be loaded. [Load] Loads new program version. Note Make sure that the device is not manipulated or switched off during the loading process and follow the instructions shown. 7.2 Titrino 7.2.
PAGE 1349

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2.2 7 Devices Titrino Program version 702 SM Titrino 5.702.0021 716 DMS Titrino 5.716.0022 718 STAT Titrino 5.718.0012 719 S Titrino 5.719.0021 720 KFS Titrino 5.720.0021 721 NET Titrino 5.721.0012 736 GP Titrino 5.736.0013 751 GPD Titrino 5.751.0021 758 KFD Titrino 5.758.0022 784 KFP Titrino 5.784.0011 785 DMP Titrino 5.785.0011 794 Basic Titrino 5.794.0010 795 KFT Titrino 5.795.0010 798 MPT Titrino 5.798.0010 799 GPT Titrino 5.799.
PAGE 1350

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table.
PAGE 1351

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices At program start on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each program start the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. On attaching an exchange/dosing unit on | off (Default value: on) If this option is switched on then at each attaching of an exchange or dosing unit the request to prepare the dosing device will appear.
PAGE 1352

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Time interval on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the request to prepare the dosing device will appear after the time interval defined here. all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Here the device (685 or 700) connected to the dosing device connector is displayed with its properties. Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type.
PAGE 1353

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.2.6 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1354

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.2 Titrino Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1355

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.3 756/831 Coulometer 7.3.1 756/831 Coulometer - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 756 and 831 Coulometers are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 7.3.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the Coulometer is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
PAGE 1356

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.3 756/831 Coulometer Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.3.
PAGE 1357

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.3.4 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1358

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.3 756/831 Coulometer Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1359

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.4 712 Conductometer 7.4.1 712 Conductometer - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 712 Conductometer are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 7.4.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the Coulometer is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
PAGE 1360

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.4 712 Conductometer Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.4.
PAGE 1361

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.4.4 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1362

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.4 712 Conductometer Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1363

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.5 856 Conductivity Module 7.5.1 856 Conductivity Module - Device Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 856 Conductivity Module are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭ 7.5.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. MSB # Properties of the MSB connector 1...
PAGE 1364

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.5 856 Conductivity Module Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.5.
PAGE 1365

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 99999 Ohm Default value 30000 Ohm B value Material constant of the NTC resistance referred to measuring the resistance at 25 °C and 50 °C. Only visible for temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 9999 Default value 4100 7.5.4 Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1366

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.5 856 Conductivity Module all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type.
PAGE 1367

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
PAGE 1368

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1369

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6.2 7 Devices Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device.
PAGE 1370

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module 7.6.3 Properties - Measuring inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Measuring inputs On the tab Measuring inputs the properties of the measuring inputs used on the device are displayed. For each measuring input a group of parameters is displayed.
PAGE 1371

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6.4 7 Devices Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ MSB # On the tabs MSB # the properties of the connector and the devices connected to are displayed. Request for dosing device preparation Selection when the request for carrying out the command PREP (see Chapter 5.6.6.5.1, page 1082) (prepare) is to be shown for the dosing device connected to the MSB.
PAGE 1372

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.6 867 pH Module Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.6.5 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1373

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 2.5.1, page 79). After the date has been entered, the field GLP test interval will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format.
PAGE 1374

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.7 846 Dosing Interface 7.7 846 Dosing Interface 7.7.1 846 Dosing Interface - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the 846 Dosing Interface are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 7.7.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. (see Chapter 7.1.4, page 1328) Properties of the MSB connector and the peripheral devices connected to.
PAGE 1375

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.7.3 1000 characters empty Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1376

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.7 846 Dosing Interface all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.9 h 12 h Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type.
PAGE 1377

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
PAGE 1378

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1379

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭ 7.8.2 GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring. Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type.
PAGE 1380

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Input Default value 7.8.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Towers Note This tab is only displayed if a PC and a sample changer are connected via an RS-232 interface. On the tab Towers the tower parameters for Tower 1 and Tower 2 (if present) are shown for the 730 Sample Changer.
PAGE 1381

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8.4 7 Devices Properties - Rack Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Rack On the tab Rack the rack-specific data of the attached rack are shown. Rack name Shows the name of the rack attached. If no rack is in position then "-----" is shown. Rack code Shows the rack code of the rack attached.
PAGE 1382

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.8 730 Sample Changer Note Connecting the dosing devices is described in the manual for the 730 Sample Changer or 774 Oven Sample Processor. If no dosing device is connected then the tab will remain empty. 7.8.6 Properties - RS-232 Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ RS-232 COM Port Selection of the serial interface on the PC to which the device is connected.
PAGE 1383

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test. Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
PAGE 1384

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor Acoustic signal on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled, an acoustic signal will be emitted additionally to the message defined above Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test.
PAGE 1385

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9.2 Dosing device Properties of the connector and the dosing devices connected to. This tab is only displayed if the Oven Sample Processor is connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface. Oven Shows the oven parameters. This tab is only displayed if the Oven Sample Processor is connected to the PC via an RS-232 interface. Gas Shows the parameters for the gas flow.
PAGE 1386

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.9.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1387

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Rack code Shows the rack code of the rack attached. The rack code corresponds to the arrangement of magnets on the base of the rack and is read in by the Sample Processor in order to recognize the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Shift rate Sample rack speed of rotation for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ...
PAGE 1388

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor 7.9.6 Properties - Oven Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Oven On the tab Oven the oven parameters are set: Oven program version Shows the program version of the oven module. Display for the 874 Oven Sample Processor only. Oven serial number Shows the serial number of the oven module. Display for the 874 Oven Sample Processor only.
PAGE 1389

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9.7 7 Devices Properties - Gas Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Gas On the tab Gas the parameters for the gas flow on the 774 Oven Sample Processor are shown. The parameters cannot be edited, they are only read off by the device. Unit for gas flow Shows the unit selected at the device for the gas flow display (mL/min or L/h). Minimum gas flow Shows the lower warning limit set on the device for the gas flow.
PAGE 1390

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.9 774 Oven Sample Processor [Disconnect] Disconnects the connection to the RS-232 device. Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.9.9 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1391

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1392

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor 7.10.1 778/789 Sample Processor - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the devices 778 Sample Processor and 789 Robotic Sample Processor XL are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc.
PAGE 1393

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table.
PAGE 1394

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor tions(see Chapter 6.10.3.2, page 1320) and Special beakers(see Chapter 6.10.3.4, page 1322) will be compared with the Min. beaker radius. If this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear. With off no check will be made. Selection Default value 1.0 … 100.0 mm | off off Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ...
PAGE 1395

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1391) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position.
PAGE 1396

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.10.3.1, page 1319) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.10.3.6, page 1324) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.10.
PAGE 1397

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.10.
PAGE 1398

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.10 778/789 Sample Processor Note These parameters are only editable for devices with status not ok (power supply and/or RS connection interrupted). 7.10.7 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1399

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1400

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor 7.11.1 814/815 USB Sample Processor - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the devices 814 USB Sample Processor and 815 Robotic USB Sample Processor XL are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc.
PAGE 1401

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory.
PAGE 1402

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear. With off no check will be made. Selection Default value 1.0 … 100.0 mm | off off Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s Axial distance Distance between the axis of rotation of the sample rack and swing axis of the robotic arm. Range 100.0 ... 300.0 mm 814 USB Sample Processor XL Selection 166.
PAGE 1403

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1391) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position.
PAGE 1404

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.10.3.1, page 1319) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.10.3.6, page 1324) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.11.
PAGE 1405

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.11.
PAGE 1406

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1407

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.11.7 Configuration Robotic arm Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1408

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.11 814/815 USB Sample Processor Range Default value -270.0 ... 270.0 ° 0.0 ° Swing direction The swing direction of the robotic arm depends on the type of robotic arm. For a 2-tower model, the robotic arm at Tower 1 must swing to the right, i.e. – and that at Tower 2 must be mounted + so that it swings to the left. Selection Default value +|– + + Clockwise rotation. – Counterclockwise rotation. 7.11.8 External position Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1409

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler 7.12.1 855 Robotic Titrosampler - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for the device 855 Robotic Titrosampler are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Measuring inputs Properties of the measuring inputs. MSB # Properties of the MSB connector 1...
PAGE 1410

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself. Device serial number Shows the serial number of the device. Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory.
PAGE 1411

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices With the 856 Conductivity Module displayed only. Selection Pt 1000 | NTC Default value Pt 1000 R (25 °C) Nominal resistance of connected NTC sensor. Only visible with temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 99999 Ohm Default value 30000 Ohm B value Material constant of the NTC resistance referred to measuring the resistance at 25 °C and 50 °C. Only visible for temperature sensors of the NTC type. Range 1000 ... 9999 Default value 4100 7.12.
PAGE 1412

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler Lift rate Lift speed for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 25 mm/s 25 mm/s Axial distance Distance between the axis of rotation of the sample rack and swing axis of the robotic arm. Range 100.0 ... 300.0 mm 814 USB Sample Processor XL Selection 166.0 mm Default value 166.0 mm 815 Robotic USB Sample Processor XL, 855 Robotic Titrosampler, 864 Balance Sample Processor Selection 196.0 mm Default value 196.
PAGE 1413

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly. External position Number of the external position. Angle [°] Swing angle for external position. Work position [mm] Work position for external position. [Edit] Opens the dialog window External position # (see Chapter 7.11.
PAGE 1414

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.10.3.1, page 1319) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.10.3.6, page 1324) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.12.
PAGE 1415

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.12.
PAGE 1416

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.12 855 Robotic Titrosampler GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1417

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor 7.13.
PAGE 1418

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware. It is only active if the device has an old program version not supported by tiamo and which can be updated by tiamo itself.
PAGE 1419

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Min. beaker radius Definition of the minimum radius which the beakers used on the rack must have. If the lift is moved to the work position the beaker radii defined in Rack table(see Chapter 6.10.2.1, page 1317) for general Sample positions(see Chapter 6.10.3.2, page 1320) and Special beakers(see Chapter 6.10.3.4, page 1322) will be compared with the Min. beaker radius. If this minimum beaker radius is undercut then the run will be stopped and an error message will appear.
PAGE 1420

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Rinse position Rinse position valid for all 4 external positions. Range Default value 0 ... 235 mm 0 mm [Configuration] Opens the dialog window Configuration (see Chapter 7.11.7, page 1391) in which the properties of the robotic arm can be editet. Table for external positions The properties for the 4 possible external positions for the swing head mounted on the tower are shown in the table. The table is not editable directly.
PAGE 1421

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack. If no rack is in position then the display will be empty. Shift rate Sample rack speed of rotation for manual operation. Range Default value 3 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.10.3.1, page 1319) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.10.3.6, page 1324) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack.
PAGE 1422

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.13 864 Balance Sample Processor Time interval on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the request to prepare the dosing device will appear after the time interval defined here. all Time interval after which the request to prepare the dosing device will appear. Range Default value 0.1 ... 999.
PAGE 1423

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
PAGE 1424

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1425

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14.2 7 Devices Properties - General Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ General General properties of the device are displayed on the General tab. Device name Designation of the device (can be freely defined by user). Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device.
PAGE 1426

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor 7.14.3 Properties - Tower Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Tower On the tab Tower the tower parameters for the tower on the 874 Oven Sample Processor are edited. Max. stroke path Entry of the lowest permitted lift position for the tower. A lift height of 0 mm corresponds to the "Home position", i.e. the lift is moved right to the top. Range Default value 0 ...
PAGE 1427

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices [Rack Data] Opens the dialog window Rack data (see Chapter 6.10.3.1, page 1319) or Rack data (774) (see Chapter 6.10.3.6, page 1324) in which the data of the rack attached can be displayed and edited. [Initialize rack] Initializes the attached rack. This resets the rack, the lift and the robotic arm, reads out the rack code and transfers the corresponding rack data to the Sample Processor. 7.14.5 Properties - MSB # Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1428

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Connected devices Information about the following peripheral devices connected to the MSB connector appears here: Dosing device 1 Dosing device type Display of the dosing device type. Dosing device serial number Display of the serial number of the connected dosing device. Stirrer 1 Stirrer type Display of the stirrer type. Stirrer serial number Display of the serial number of the connected stirrer. Remote box 1 Display of the connected remote box. 7.
PAGE 1429

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display of the initial temperature set on the device only. Range 50 ... 250 °C Default value off °C Max. temperature With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display of the maximum temperature set on the device only. With the 774 Oven Sample Processor display only. Range 50 ... 250 °C Default value 250 °C Temperature correction Enter the temperature correction.
PAGE 1430

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.14 874 Oven Sample Processor Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out.
PAGE 1431

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated.
PAGE 1432

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware.
PAGE 1433

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Selection Default value continuous | pulsed continuous Pulses per integration time Frequency the light flashes with. This parameter can only be edited for the Type = pulsed. Range Default value 0 ... 1000 10 Analog output Analog output on | off (Default value: on) If this option is enabled, the measured signal on the analog output of the spectrometer is put out. If the connected spectrometer has no analog output, this option is ignored.
PAGE 1434

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer 7.15.5 Properties - Calibration Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Calibration On the tab Calibration the data of the wavelength calibration is displayed. A specific wavelength, defined by four wavelength coefficients, is assigned to each pixel on the detector.
PAGE 1435

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Date Display of date and time the dark spectrum has been recorded. User Display of the user logged in during recording of the dark spectrum. Method Display of the method the dark spectrum has been recorded with. Determination ID ID of the determination the dark spectrum has been recorded in. Integration time Display of the integration time at recording the dark spectrum. Averaged spectra Number of spectra recorded and averaged.
PAGE 1436

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.15 Avantes Spectrometer User Display of the user logged in during recording of the reference spectrum. Method Display of the method the reference spectrum has been recorded with. Determination ID ID of the determination the reference spectrum has been recorded in. Integration time Display of the integration time at recording the dark spectrum. Averaged spectra Number of spectra recorded and averaged.
PAGE 1437

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ...
PAGE 1438

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1439

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input Default value 50 characters Device type number_# Device type Display of the device type. Program version Shows the program version of the device. Only visible with devices that have their own firmware. [Update] Opens the dialog window Load new program version (see Chapter 7.1.6, page 1331). This button is only displayed with devices that have their own firmware.
PAGE 1440

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Selection Default value COM1 | COM2 | … | COMn COMn COMn First free COM port. Baud rate Transmission rate. The baud rate selected here must also be set on the device itself. Selection Default value 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 9600 Data bit Number of data bits. Selection Default value 7|8 8 Parity Type of parity testing. Selection Default value None | Odd | Even None Stop bit Number of stop bits.
PAGE 1441

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Selection Default value \0D | \0D\0A | \0D\0A\0A | \0D\0D\0A \0D\0A (\0D = CR, \0A = LF) Terminator for receiving Final character for receiving in hexadecimal code. Selection Default value \0D | \0D\0A | \0D\0A\0A | \0D\0D\0A \0D\0A (\0D = CR, \0A = LF) Code page Code page used for the data transfer.
PAGE 1442

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.16 RS-232 device Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
PAGE 1443

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1444

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances 7.17 Balances 7.17.1 Balance - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for a balance are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 7.17.2 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. RS-232 Selection of the serial interface the device is connected to. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
PAGE 1445

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Start-up Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.17.3 1000 characters empty Properties - RS-232 Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1446

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances Selection Default value None | Odd | Even None Stop bit Number of stop bits. Selection Default value 1|2 1 Handshake Type of data transmission protocol. Selection Default value None | HW | SW None [Connect] Establishes the connection to the balance. The dialog window Establish connection appears (see Chapter 7.17.5, page 1432). [Disconnect] Disconnects the connection to the balance (only then the device can be deleted out of the configuration). 7.17.
PAGE 1447

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Range 1 ... 999 Days Default value 999 Days Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79).
PAGE 1448

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.17 Balances Display message A message is displayed and you can choose whether you want to continue the run or cancel it. If the run is continued then the message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination. Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.17.
PAGE 1449

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices 7.18 Barcode reader 7.18.1 Barcode reader - General A barcode reader is used to enter sample and other data in tiamo. Note A barcode reader only needs to be configured as a device in tiamo if the functions for automatic data import into sample tables are to be used.
PAGE 1450

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.18 Barcode reader 7.18.2 Barcode reader - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The parameters for a barcode reader are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭ 7.18.3 General General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. Settings Settings for the barcode reader. GLP Information on GLP tests and GLP monitoring.
PAGE 1451

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Data storage under legal control Indicates whether the balance has its own calibratable data memory. Only visible and editable with Sartorius balances. Selection on | off Default value off Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.18.4 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Settings Barcode reader ID Shows the identification of the barcode reader.
PAGE 1452

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.18 Barcode reader Input 1000 characters Monitoring of GLP validity Monitoring of GLP validity on | off (Default value: off) If this option is switched on then the time interval for the GLP test will be monitored. Monitoring can only be switched on when a date has been entered in the field GLP test date. GLP test interval Time interval to next GLP test. If a value is entered here then the date in the field Next GLP test will be adapted automatically.
PAGE 1453

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action The actions can only be edited if monitoring is switched on. If during monitoring it is found that the validity period has expired then one of the following actions will be triggered automatically at Start test. Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the validity period has expired will be automatically saved with the determination.
PAGE 1454

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller 7.19 IO controller 7.19.1 IO controller - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The properties of an IO controller are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19.2 (see Chapter 7.19.2, page 1438) General device information such as device name, device type, serial number, etc. (see Chapter 7.19.3, page 1439) General settings for the IO controller. (see Chapter 7.19.
PAGE 1455

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Device serial number Display of the serial number of the device. Set to work Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.19.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Settings On the tab Settings the IP address of the controller and the controller ID are entered.
PAGE 1456

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller 7.19.4 Properties - Digital inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Digital inputs On the registration card Digital inputs all inputs detected are automatically listed in a table. For each digital input the port description can be modified. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Port description Display of the port description. Type Display of the port type.
PAGE 1457

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Input Default value 50 characters DigIn_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Note The first digital input is connected to the the emergency switch on the wet end. With pressed switch all modules connected to the controller are set to their default status and do not react to other control commands. The first digital input should therefore be called Emergency_Module.
PAGE 1458

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Assigned output Selection of an output port assigned to an input port. The signal of the output port depends on the signal of the input port. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector. Selection All digital outputs Note Digital outputs of the Type = Alarm signal cannot be selected. Signal Select which value the signal on the output port should take. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector.
PAGE 1459

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Action Only active and editable for the Port type = Level detector. If the fill level is too low and the level detector is therefore active, one of the following actions will automatically be carried out at the start test: Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the level detector on the device is active will automatically be saved in the determination.
PAGE 1460

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Parameter 2 The meaning of Parameter 2 depends on the Type set. [Edit] Opens the dialog Properties Digital output in order to edit the selected port. [Port description] Opens a menu in order to import or export port descriptions. The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored.
PAGE 1461

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Note Additionally a stepping motor can have a port of the Type = Brake. The port information for this port type is automatically read out of the stepping motor controller. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting tiamo. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
PAGE 1462

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 7.19.6 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - Analog inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1463

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored. Export Export a text file containing the port descriptions of all digital inputs. 7.19.6.1 Properties Analog input Dialog window Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1464

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Note With the aid of the following parameters the physical values that are adjacent to the analog input can be mapped to any measured value. The transfer function is linear. 0% Mapping Measured value to be used when the Low level (0%) is adjacent as input value. Range Default value -214783648 ... 214783647 0 100% Mapping Measured value to be used when the High level (100%) is adjacent as input value. Range Default value -214783648 ...
PAGE 1465

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices High level (100%) Display of the highest analog output value with unit. 0% Mapping Measured value to be used when the Low level (0%) is adjacent as output value, with unit. 100% Mapping Measured value to be used when the High level (100%) is adjacent as output value, with unit. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting the program. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
PAGE 1466

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Input Default value 50 characters AnOut_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Type Display of the port type. Low level (0%) Display of the lowest analog output value. This value is read out automatically and depends on the Type. High level (100%) Display of the highest analog output value. This value is read out automatically and depends on the Type. Unit Display of the unit of the analog output value.
PAGE 1467

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting the program. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method. Lastly used value on | off (Default value: off) If this option is enabled the lastly set value is used as default value on the analog output. Enter the default value. Range Default value 7.19.8 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties..
PAGE 1468

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.19 IO controller Next GLP test Date on which the next GLP test is to be carried out. The date can be selected by clicking on the symbol in the dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). After the date has been entered, the field GLP test interval will be adapted automatically. Only editable when the monitoring is activated. Default value GLP test date + 999 days Message The message options can only be edited if monitoring is switched on.
PAGE 1469

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Stop determination The running determination will be automatically terminated. The following message must be confirmed with [OK]. 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.1 Stepping motor controller - Overview Dialog window: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' The properties of a stepping motor controller are set on the following tabs: ￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20.2 (see Chapter 7.19.
PAGE 1470

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller AdsDll version Display of the version of AdsDll.dll. Device serial number Display of the serial number of the device. Set to work Shows the date on which the device was automatically added to the device table. Remarks Remarks about the device. Input Default value 7.20.3 1000 characters empty Properties - Settings Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1471

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20.4 7 Devices Properties - Digital inputs Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ Digital inputs On the registration card Digital inputs all inputs detected are automatically listed in a table. For each digital input the port description can be modified. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Port description Display of the port description. Type Display of the port type.
PAGE 1472

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Input Default value 50 characters DigIn_x_y_z The following characters must not be part of the port description: \ , ', ., {, }, [, ]. Note The first digital input is connected to the the emergency switch on the wet end. With pressed switch all modules connected to the controller are set to their default status and do not react to other control commands. The first digital input should therefore be called Emergency_Module.
PAGE 1473

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Assigned output Selection of an output port assigned to an input port. The signal of the output port depends on the signal of the input port. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector. Selection All digital outputs Note Digital outputs of the Type = Alarm signal cannot be selected. Signal Select which value the signal on the output port should take. Only active and editable for the port type level detector and leak detector.
PAGE 1474

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Action Only active and editable for the Port type = Level detector. If the fill level is too low and the level detector is therefore active, one of the following actions will automatically be carried out at the start test: Selection Default value Record message | Display message | Stop determination Display message Record message The message that the level detector on the device is active will automatically be saved in the determination.
PAGE 1475

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Parameter 2 The meaning of Parameter 2 depends on the Type set. [Edit] Opens the dialog Properties Digital output in order to edit the selected port. [Port description] Opens a menu in order to import or export port descriptions. The menu [Port description] contains the following menu items: Import Import of a text file (TXT, CSV) containing the port description. Each line is interpreted as port description, spaces will be ignored.
PAGE 1476

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller Note Additionally a stepping motor can have a port of the Type = Brake. The port information for this port type is automatically read out of the stepping motor controller. Default value Display of the default value the outputs takes directly after starting and exiting tiamo. The default value is also set after an error or when canceling the method.
PAGE 1477

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices ￭ >0: For 100% stirrer output (Parameter 1 = 100), pulse duration in 10 ms Example: Parameter 1 = 100, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 300 ms, switched off 0 ms Parameter 1 = 75, Parameter 2 = 30: Pulse duration switched-on 225 ms, switched off 75 ms Range Default value 7.20.6 -214783647 ... 214783647 0 Properties - Stepping motors Tab: Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties...
PAGE 1478

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.6.1 Properties Stepping motor Dialog window Configuration ▶ Devices ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ Properties - 'Device type' - 'Device name' ▶ Stepping motors ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties Stepping motor In the dialog window Properties Stepping motor the properties for the individual stepping motors are set.
PAGE 1479

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Reset A reset is carried out on the terminal the motor is connected to. While doing so, the LEDs of the terminal will shortly flash, afterwards it could be necessary to reference anew. Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 mm 0 mm Angle The angle to be moved to. Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ...
PAGE 1480

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7.20 Stepping motor controller 7.20.7 Properties - GLP Tab: Configuration ▶ Device ▶ [Edit] ▶ Properties... ▶ 'Properties - 'Device type' 'Device name' ▶ GLP GLP test date Date of the last GLP test. This date can be selected by clicking on dialog window Select date (see Chapter 2.5.1, page 79). in the Comment GLP test Comment on GLP test.
PAGE 1481

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 7 Devices Message by E-mail on | off (Default value: off) The message is additionally sent to the e-mail address defined under [Email] if this option is activated. The message is sent in text format. [E-mail] [E-Mail] opens the Send e-mail window (see Chapter 2.6.1, page 81).
PAGE 1482

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.1 Manual Control - General 8 Manual Control 8.1 Manual Control - General Program part: Manual Control Definition In tiamo, Manual Control refers to the program part in which the connected devices can be directly actuated, i.e. without a predefined execution specification. The precondition for this is that the devices are switched on and detected by tiamo. The Manual control is also possible live when running a method.
PAGE 1483

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.3 8 Manual Control Manual Control - Device selection Program part: Manual Control In the subwindow for the device selection, the devices or function units of devices can be selected, on which the functions are to be triggered manually. Therefore they are displayed in tree-form. Displayed are all devices configured in the device table with status "ok", device name and (in brackets) the device type number. The currently selected device is shown with a blue background.
PAGE 1484

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrino: 702, 716, 718, 719, 720, 721, 736, 751, 758, 785, 784, 785, 794, 795, 798, 799 Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 857, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906, 907 Dosing Interface: 846 Conductometer: 856 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample changer: 730, 774, 778, 789, 814, 815, 864, 874 Robitic Titrosampler: 855 8.4.1.
PAGE 1485

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Titer Display of the titer of the solution put on. This field only appears for intelligent exchange/dosing units or if the solution for non-intelligent exchange/ dosing units has been selected. 8.4.1.3 Dosing - Prepare Program part: Manual Control Here the preparing of exchange/dosing units can be started and stopped. This tab appears when selecting a single dosing device as well as with all dosing devices.
PAGE 1486

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.1.5 Dosing - Empty Program part: Manual Control Here the emptying of dosing units can be started and stopped. This tab appears when selecting a single dosing device as well as with all dosing devices with dosing units. Note This tab is not displayed for external dosing devices on the Titrinos 736, 751, 758, 799. [Start] Start emptying for the selected dosing device(s). The parameters defined for the dosing units will be used.
PAGE 1487

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control 730, 774, 778, 789 Range 0.01 ... 160.00 mL/min Titrino Range 0.01 ... 150.00 mL/min Filling rate The buret is filled at this rate after the dosing. The maximum filling rate depends on the cylinder volume of the exchange unit or dosing unit used. If the entered filling rate is too high for the selected dosing device, it will automatically be reduced during dosing to the largest possible value. Note For viscous liquids the filling rate should be reduced.
PAGE 1488

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Note Parameters modified after the start of the dosing are not valid until the next dosing procedure. [Fill] Start filling of the buret for the selected dosing device. This button is only available if Fill automatically is disabled. During the filling procedure, the volume display is set to 0.0000 mL. [Stop] Stop fixed volume dosing for the selected dosing device. If the dosing has been stopped, it cannot be continued. 8.4.1.
PAGE 1489

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Note For viscous liquids the filling rate should be reduced. Selection Default value maximum maximum Titrando, 814, 815, 855 Range 0.01 ... 166.00 mL/min 778, 789 Range 0.01 ... 160.00 mL/min [Dosing] Start manual dosing for the selected dosing device. Dosing will take place as long as the button is pressed down. The dosed volume is displayed live. Note Parameters modified after the start of the dosing are not valid until the next dosing procedure.
PAGE 1490

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrino: 751, 758, 785, 784, 785, 794, 795, 798, 799 Titrando: 808, 809, 835, 836, 841, 842, 857, 888, 890, 901, 902, 904, 905, 906, 907 Dosing Interface: 846 Conductometer: 856 Coulometer: 756, 831 pH/Ion - Meter: 867 Sample changer: 730, 774, 778, 789, 814, 815, 864, 874 Robitic Titrosampler: 855 8.4.2.2 Stirring - Switch on/off Program part: Manual Control Here stirrers can be switched on and off.
PAGE 1491

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [Start] Start continuous operation for the selected stirrer. In the status display the remaining time is shown. The stirrer will be switched off automatically after the stirring time has elapsed [Stop] Stop stirring for the selected stirrer. 8.4.
PAGE 1492

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Output signal Current status Displays the current status of the 14 output lines. Templates/Input Input of the binary pattern for the output signal or selecting a predefined signal pattern. It is possible to enter the following characters: 0 = line inactive 1 = line active * = any line status p = set pulse (pulse length = 200 ms. If a pulse of another length should be put out, a corresponding template has to be defined.
PAGE 1493

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Note We recommend masking the irrelevant output lines with an asterisk * so as not to modify these line conditions. Note For Titrinos with 3 output lines, only 3 characters can be entered. If signal pattern is selected, also only the first 3 characters will be used. [Set] Set the bit pattern defined under Outputs. 8.4.4 8.4.4.
PAGE 1494

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Rack code Shows the number of positions on the rack attached. If no rack is attached, -------- is displayed. Number of positions Shows the number of positions on the rack attached. If no rack is attached, -------- is displayed. Shift rate Shift rate for manual control of the sample changer. Range Default value 5 ... 20 °/s 20 °/s Lift rate Lift rate for manual control on the selected tower. Range Default value 5 ...
PAGE 1495

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Current position Shows the current rack position. Target position Select or enter the rack position to be moved to. Range Default value 1 ... n (depending on rack) 1 Selection Special beaker 1...16 [Start] Start moving to target position. After the start, the button changes to [Stop], the two lower buttons are shown as inactive (gray) and Move... instead of Ready is displayed as status message. Move to current rack position - 1.
PAGE 1496

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions [Start] Start moving to target position. Start moving to target position. After the start, the button changes to [Stop], the two lower buttons are shown as inactive (gray) and Move... instead of Ready is displayed as status message. Move lift upwards as long as this button is pressed. Move lift downwards as long as this button is pressed. Robotic arm position Set the robotic arm position (angle) on the selected tower.
PAGE 1497

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Current position Shows the current rack position. Special beaker Select the special beaker to be assigned to the current rack position. Range Default value 1 ... 16 1 [Assign] Trigger assignment. During the assignment the cursor is displayed as hourglass. Lift position Assign current lift position to a specific special position.. Current position Shows the current lift position in mm.
PAGE 1498

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Shift position for If this option is selected, the current lift position is assigned to the shift position of the tower. all except 730 Selection Default value Tower 1 | Tower 2 Tower 1 730 only Selection Default value Tower 1+2 Tower 1+2 Special position for If this option is selected, the current lift position is assigned to the special position of the tower.
PAGE 1499

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control External position Select the external position to which the current robotic arm position is to be assigned. Range Default value 1 ... 4 1 [Assign] Trigger assignment. During the assignment the cursor is displayed as hourglass. 8.4.4.5 Sample changer - Pump Program part: Manual Control Here the pumps connected to the tower can be switched on and off. Pump 1 Manually control pump 1 or valve 1 on the selected tower.
PAGE 1500

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Selection Default value On/Off | Duration On/Off Duration Enter the duration during which the pump/valve should remain switched on. This field only appears for Operation = Duration. Range Default value 1 ... 999999 s 60 s [Start] Start pump 2. In the status display the running time since start is shown. [Stop] Stop pump 28.4.4.
PAGE 1501

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Gas flow Inlet Select the inlet of the carrier gas. Selection Default value Pump | Valve Pump Pump Use of ambient air as carrier gas. Valve Use of gas out of a compressed gas cylinder. Flow rate 874 Range Default value 10 ... 150 mL/min 50 mL/min Gas type Gas type of the carrier gas. Selection Default value Air | Nitrogen | Other gas Air Gas flow factor Factor for the correct determination of the gas flow.
PAGE 1502

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Inert gas valve Switch the inert gas valve on the Oven Sample Processor on/off. [Start] Switch on inert gas valve. In the status display the running time since start is shown. [Stop] Switch off inert gas valve. 8.4.5 8.4.5.
PAGE 1503

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Measured quantity The selectable measured quantities depend on the device whose measuring input has been selected in the device selection. pH | U | Ipol | Upol | Temperature | Conc | Cond Selection Note Which other parameters are displayed depends on the selected measured quantity. Sensor Select the sensor, the ones of the sensor table are available. Depending on the measured quantity only specific sensor types can be selected.
PAGE 1504

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Titrino Range Default value -127 ... 127 µA (Increment: 1) 5 µA U(pol) The polarization voltage is the potential applied to the polarized electrode during an amperometric measurement. Titrando, 855 Range Default value -1250 ... 1250 mV (Increment: 25) 400 mV Titrino Range Default value -1270 ... 1270 mV (Increment: 10) 400 mV Reference temperature The electrical conductivity depends greatly on the temperature.
PAGE 1505

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Sample solution Select name from the table Sample solution (TC conductivity). Selection Default value DIN | Entries of the table DIN [Start] Start measuring. [Stop] Stop measuring. 8.4.5.3 Measure - Intensity Program part: Manual Control Here the intensity of an uncorrected spectrum can be measured and displayed. Start wavelength Lower limit of the spectrum. Range Default value 200.0 ... 1100.0 nm 400.0 nm End wavelength Upper limit of the spectrum.
PAGE 1506

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions [Measuring] Start measuring of the intensity. The parameters defined will be used. 8.4.5.4 Measure - Sample spectrum Program part: Manual Control Here a sample spectrum can be measured and displayed. Note Before a sample spectrum can be measured, a reference spectrum has to be recorded in a determination by a spectrometer.
PAGE 1507

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4.6.2.1 8 Manual Control Digital inputs - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Digital inputs is selected, then the status of all connected digital inputs is shown in their physical order in the subwindow for the graphical display. Graphical display Example: 8.4.6.2.
PAGE 1508

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR Graphical display Overview of the states of a digital input: ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR Display flashes. 8.4.6.3 Digital outputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.3.
PAGE 1509

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Graphical display Example: DigOut_1_4_1 tiamo 2.1 (ProcessLab) DigOut_1_4_2 DigOut_1_4_3 Type: Valve DigOut_1_4_4 Type: Gen.
PAGE 1510

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.6.3.2 Digital output Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree a single digital output is selected, then the properties of the digital output on the tabs Switch on/off, Timer control and Set default are displayed in the subwindow for functions/parameters. In the subwindow for the graphical display, the status of the input is displayed. Switch on/off Port description Display of the port description.
PAGE 1511

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [Start] Sets the digital output to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets the digital output to INACTIVE. Timer control Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Parameter 1 The meaning of Parameter 1 depends on the Type of the digital output that has been set.
PAGE 1512

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Start delay Waiting time in seconds or minutes before the initiated action is started. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 0 Selection Default value s | min s Working time Time in seconds or minutes for which the digital output is set to ACTIVE. After the working time has elapsed, it is set to INACTIVE again. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 0.
PAGE 1513

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Type Display of the port type. Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [Set] Resets all digital outputs to the default value in the configuration. Graphical display Overview of the states and the different port types of a digital output Port type ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR not defined Gen. output Alarm signal Display flashes. Pump Pump on Pump off Display flashes. Stirrer on Stirrer off Display flashes.
PAGE 1514

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.6.4 Analog inputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.4.1 Analog inputs - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Analog inputs is selected, then the adjacent value for all connected analog inputs in their physical order is shown in the subwindow for the graphical display. Graphical display Example: 8.4.6.4.
PAGE 1515

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Graphical display 8.4.6.5 Analog outputs Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.5.1 Analog outputs - Overview Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree the branch Analog outputs is selected, then all outputs can be commonly controlled on the tabs Set value and Set default in the subwindow functions/parameters. In the subwindow for the graphical display the adjacent value for all connected analog outputs is shown in their physical order.
PAGE 1516

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions 8.4.6.5.2 Analog output Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree a single analog output is selected, then the output can be controlled on the tabs Set value and Set default in the subwindow for functions/parameters. In the subwindow for the graphical display the adjacent value for the analog output status is displayed. Set value Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port.
PAGE 1517

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control [Set] Sets the analog output to the mapping value indicated. Set default Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Mapping Display of the mapped value range. Current value Display of the adjacent value. [Set] Resets the analog output to the default value in the configuration. Graphical display 8.4.6.6 Stepping motors Program part: Manual Control 8.4.6.6.
PAGE 1518

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Switch on/off [Start] Sets all stepping motors to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets all stepping mortors to INACTIVE. Graphical display Example: 8.4.6.6.
PAGE 1519

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Type Display of the port type. Distance Distance to be moved to. Visible only in cases of stepping motors where Type = Linear drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 mm 0 mm Angle The angle to be moved to. Not visible in cases of stepping motors where Type = Rotary drive. Range Default value -214783647 ... 214783647 ° 0° Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely.
PAGE 1520

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [>] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE and moves in positive direction as long as the button remains pressed or until an end position is reached. [<] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE and moves in negative direction as long as the button remains pressed or until an end position is reached.
PAGE 1521

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely. If this is not done after the maximum waiting time has expired, the status of the stepping motor will be set to ERROR. Range Default value 0 ... 999999 10 Selection Default value s | min s Status Display of the current status. Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [Start] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets the stepping motor to INACTIVE.
PAGE 1522

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Selection ACTIVE | INACTIVE | ERROR [Start] Sets the stepping motor to ACTIVE. [Stop] Sets the stepping motor to INACTIVE. Reset On this tab the motor control can be reset to factory settings. Port description Display of the port description. Port Display of the internal description of the port. Type Display of the port type. Timeout Time in seconds or minutes within which the action must have run through completely.
PAGE 1523

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8 Manual Control Reference position Brake Safety switch 1 Safety switch 2 Safety switch 3 Overview of the states of a stepping motor: 8.4.6.7 ACTIVE INACTIVE ERROR Motor on Motor off Display flashes. Multi-port valve Program part: Manual Control If in the device tree a multi-port valve is selected, then the functions and parameters belonging to this element are displayed in the subwindow for functions/parameters. Current port Shows the current port position.
PAGE 1524

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.4 Manual Control - Functions Range Default value 1 ... 12 1 Shift direction Select the direction in which the valve moves to the target port. Selection Default value ascending | descending | automatic | not over ascending ascending The valve moves towards the target port in ascending direction. descending The valve moves towards the target port in descending direction. automatic The valve determines the shortest path to the target port on its own.
PAGE 1525

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 8.5 8 Manual Control Manual Control - Graphical display Program window:Manual control In the subwindow for the graphical display all running, manually triggered functions are displayed graphically. tiamo 2.
PAGE 1526

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.1 Audit Trail 9 How to proceed? 9.1 Audit Trail 9.1.1 Opening Audit Trail How to proceed? Note The Audit Trail Table can only be opened if the option Enable Audit Trail is switched on in Security settings under Audit Trail/Modifications. 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item Tools ▶ Audit Trail…. The dialog window Audit Trail opens. 3 If required, adjust the column display. 9.1.
PAGE 1527

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? After this function has been selected, the field in which the cursor is located will have a yellow background when navigating in the Audit Trail table. 2 Double click on the desired field with the left-hand mouse key. The contents of the field selected in the table will be set as a filter condition and this filter will be applied directly to the table.
PAGE 1528

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.1 Audit Trail The dialog window Audit Trail opens. 3 If desired, filter Audit Trail table. 4 If desired, select Audit Trail entries to be exported. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Export Audit Trail opens. 6 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the export file in the field Save file as. 7 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Selected records). 8 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1529

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 4 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the archive file in the field Save file as. 5 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Records until including date selection). 6 Click on [OK]. The entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be archived as a text file. Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to export, i.e. the Audit Trail entries are stored in text format.
PAGE 1530

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup 3 Archive desired Audit Trail entries. 4 With the menu item File ▶ Delete the dialog window Delete Audit Trail opens. 5 Under Selection, select the desired option (All archived records or Archived records until including date selection). 6 User 1: Enter User name and Password. 7 User 2: Enter User name and Password. 8 Click on [OK]. The archived entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be deleted. 9.2 Backup 9.2.
PAGE 1531

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Backing up database manually 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens. 3 Select database. 4 Click on [Backup] in the dialog window Database manager. The dialog window Backup database 'Database name' is opened. 5 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 6 Select or enter the name for the Backup file.
PAGE 1532

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup 4 On the tab General enter a comment on the database in the field Comment. 5 On the tab Backup enable the check box Backup monitoring. 6 Enter Interval for backup monitoring or date for the next backup in the field Next backup. 7 Activate the Start backup automatically check box. 8 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 9 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1533

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note Existing databases cannot be overwritten, i.e. they must first be deleted so that the database can be recovered under its old name. 9.2.3 Backing up configuration data How to proceed? General The configuration data in tiamo is saved in the Configuration database. Configuration data includes all cross-method settings for devices, titrants/solutions, sensors, common variables and rack data as well as Methods, Security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.
PAGE 1534

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup Note If the backup directory is on a network drive. the backup date should be added manually to the Backup name because the backup date information is not available when the directory is restored. 5 Click on [Start]. The manual backup is started and the configuration database is backed up to the selected directory. Backing up configuration data automatically 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Automatically.
PAGE 1535

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The dialog window Restore configuration data opens. 3 Select the directory in the Backup directory field in which the desired database was backed up. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired backup file in the Backup name list box. 5 Click on [Start]. The restoring of the configuration database is started. tiamo multi 1 Make sure that tiamo is closed on all clients connected to the server and on the server itself. 2 Start the file ConfigRestore.
PAGE 1536

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup 2 Click on the menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Manually. The dialog window Backup configuration data manually opens. 3 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired backup file in the Backup name list box. If an existing backup file is selected it will be overwritten. . Note If the backup directory is on a network drive.
PAGE 1537

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Exporting methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 Select desired Method group. 4 Select desired methods. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Select directory for export opens. 6 Select the directory where the method should be exported to and click on [OK]. The selected methods are each exported as files named 'Method name'.mmet.
PAGE 1538

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.2 Backup 3 Click on the menu item File ▶ Archive.... The dialog window Archive Audit Trail opens. 4 Enter or select directory and file name for saving the archive file in the field Save file as. 5 In the field Selection select the desired option (All records or Records until including date selection). 6 Click on [OK]. The entries selected in the Audit Trail table will be archived as a text file. Note Archiving Audit Trail entries is identical to export, i.e.
PAGE 1539

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9.3 Determinations 9.3.1 Starting single determination How to proceed? Single determination without statistics 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 In the Run subwindow, select the Single determination tab. 3 If desired, enter Determination parameters. 4 In the Method list box select the method to be used for carrying out the determination. The subwindow Method shows the method loaded.
PAGE 1540

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations Note In order to calculate statistical calculations for results, the Statistics option must be enabled in the START command of the method and, in addition, the Statistics option must be enabled in the CALC command for each desired result. 5 Activate the Statistics check box. 6 If desired, modify number of single determinations. 7 Enter sample data. 8 Click on [Start]. The single determination will be started.
PAGE 1541

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 5 If a method was loaded in which the option Statistics in the START command is enabled, disable the check box Statistics on the tab Determination series. 6 Click on [Start]. The first determination of a sample series will be started. The subwindow Method shows active tracks and commands, the subwindow Live display live curves, measured values and messages. Determination series with statistics 1 Select program part Workplace.
PAGE 1542

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations Note If the method contains a DATABASE command, then it is mandatory that this command be executed in all statistically linked determinations. If this is not done, then the statistical results will be displayed incorrectly and the determinations cannot be reprocessed. 9.3.3 Searching for determinations How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
PAGE 1543

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. Filtering can now be done via quick filter or special filter in the Determination overview window: Quick filter 1 Click on the symbol or on Filter ▶ Quick filter in the context menu.
PAGE 1544

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 4 Click on [Save filter]. 5 Click on [Apply filter]. The table will be filtered. Using special filter 1 In the list box Filter, select the desired special filter. The table will be filtered. 9.3.5 Signing determination How to proceed? Selecting determination 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name.
PAGE 1545

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Signature 1 Note Determinations can only be signed at level 1 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization (see Chapter 6.2.1.2.3, page 1195). 1 Click on the symbol or menu item Determinations ▶ Sign ▶ Signature 1…. The window Signature Level 1 opens. If the selected determination can be signed, Signature possible is displayed in the field Info. 2 Enter or select User, Password, Reason and Comment. 3 Click on [Sign].
PAGE 1546

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations The window Signature Level 2 opens; if a signature is possible for the selected determination, then in the field Info will appear Signature possible. 2 Enter or select User, Password, Reason and Comment and click on [Sign]. The selected determination will be signed on level 2. Note Determinations that can be signed at level 2 are blocked, i.e. they can neither be reprocessed nor deleted.
PAGE 1547

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. 5 Select desired determinations. Exporting determinations 1 Click on the menu item Determinations ▶ Export.... The window Export determinations opens.
PAGE 1548

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 5 Click on the menu item Determinations ▶ Import.... The window Import determinations opens. 6 Select desired determinations. 7 Click on [Open]. The selected determinations are imported into the open database. Note Exported determinations can only be imported in the file format *.mdet. 9.3.8 Deleting determinations How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
PAGE 1549

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note If the option Comment on modification of determinations in the Security settings is enabled, then the window Modification comment determination will appear before the modification is saved. 9.3.9 Making the determination version current How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name.
PAGE 1550

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 9.3.10 Reprocessing determinations How to proceed? Note Determinations that have a signature at level 2 cannot be reprocessed. 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview. 4 Select desired determinations. 5 Click on the symbol ess....
PAGE 1551

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. Note If a variable is modified, then with [Recalculate] all the selected determinations will be recalculated with the new value. If one variable is not modified then when several determinations are recalculated the original value of the variable will be used (i.e.
PAGE 1552

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. 6 If desired, save the modified method with [Save as...] under the same name or under a new name. If the modified method is saved under the name of an existing method then all the earlier method versions will be deleted and a new version with the number 1 will be generated. 7 In the dialog window Reprocessing click on [OK].
PAGE 1553

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? If the determination is switched off then an asterisk (*) appears behind all result values in the table and the line is shown as inactive (gray); if it is switched on again then the asterisks will disappear. Note If the results of a determination are switched off, the statistics for these results will be switched off when this determination is recalculated, i.e. no data for the mean value and standard deviations will be shown.
PAGE 1554

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.3 Determinations 4 Modify curve evaluation manually. 5 Then close the window with [OK]. 6 Click on [Recalculate]. The selected determinations are recalculated. The results of this recalculation are entered automatically in the subwindow Result display. 7 In the dialog window Reprocessing click on [OK]. Each determination that has been modified by reprocessing will be saved as a new version with a version number increased by +1 and the subwindow Reprocessing will be closed.
PAGE 1555

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 6 Click on the menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Report.... The dialog window Report output opens. 7 Under Selection, select desired determinations. 8 Under Report type, select the option Original report or Report template. 9 Under Output target, enable the check box Printer and/or select PDF file. Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name.
PAGE 1556

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases Note A maximum of 4 databases can be opened, but only 2 can be displayed at the same time. Databases that are open at the time the program is ended will be automatically opened the next time the program is started. 5 Select desired determinations. 6 Click on menu item File ▶ Print ▶ Determination overview…. The dialog window Print determination overview (PDF) opens. 7 Under Selection, select desired determinations.
PAGE 1557

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Note Each determination database has to be backed up separately. Afterwards, it is recommended that all backed-up files be copied to an external directory or to a CD/DVD. 9.4.2 Opening database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open].
PAGE 1558

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases Closing all databases 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Close all…. All opened databases will be closed. 9.4.4 Creating database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens. 3 Click on the menu item Edit ▶ New.... The dialog window New database opens. 4 Enter a name for the new database. 5 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1559

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9 On tab Monitoring, define monitoring of size and number of data sets. 9.4.5 Backing up database How to proceed? Backing up database manually 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The window Database manager opens. 3 Click on [Backup]. The window Backup database opens. 4 Select the directory for the backup in the field Backup directory. 5 Select or enter the name for the Backup file.
PAGE 1560

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.4 Databases 3 Select desired database. 4 Click on [Properties]. The dialog window Properties - Database - 'Database name' opens for editing the database properties. 5 On the tab General enter a comment on the database in the field Comment. 6 On the tab Backup enable the check box Backup monitoring. 7 Enter Interval for backup monitoring or date for the Next backup. 8 Activate the Start backup automatically check box.
PAGE 1561

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 6 Enter the name under Save as under which the database is to be restored. 7 Click on [Start]. The database restoring is started. Note Existing databases cannot be overwritten, i.e. they must first be deleted so that the database can be recovered under its old name. 9.4.7 Deleting database How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Database manager…. The dialog window Database manager opens.
PAGE 1562

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.5 Configuration data 9.5 Configuration data 9.5.1 Configuration data in general The configuration data in tiamo is saved in the Configuration database. Configuration data includes all cross-method settings for devices, titrants/solutions, sensors, common variables and rack data as well as Methods, Security settings (see Chapter 6.2.2.1, page 1201), User administration (see Chapter 6.2.1.1, page 1192), Program administration (see Chapter 6.2.3.
PAGE 1563

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.5.3 9 How to proceed? Importing configuration data How to proceed? 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the menu item Determinations ▶ Import.... The dialog window Open opens. 3 Select or enter a new name and directory for the import file MCFG. 4 Click on [Open]. The dialog window Import configuration data opens. 5 Select desired configuration data. Note Data that is not present in the export file cannot be selected. 6 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1564

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.5 Configuration data 4 Select or enter the name for the Backup file. If an existing backup file is selected it will be overwritten. Note If the backup directory is on a network drive. the backup date should be added manually to the Backup name because the backup date information is not available when the directory is restored. 5 Click on [Start]. The manual backup is started and the configuration database is backed up to the selected directory.
PAGE 1565

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 2 Start the file ConfigRestore.exe in the program directory …\tiamo \bin. The dialog window Restore configuration data opens. 3 Select the directory in the Backup directory field in which the configuration database was backed up. 4 Select or enter the name for the desired Backup file. 5 Click on [Start]. The restoring of the configuration database is started.
PAGE 1566

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods 9.6 Methods 9.6.1 Open method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open method opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 5 Click on [Open]. The selected method is opened in the main window in the place of a method that is already opened.
PAGE 1567

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? Close all methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on menu item File ▶ Close all…. All opened methods will be closed. A request to save the method as a new version will appear for each method having been modified. 9.6.3 Create method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ New.... The dialog window New method opens. 3 Select Empty method or a fixed Method template. 4 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1568

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods 2 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 3 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 4 Click on [Save]. The selected method is saved under the desired method name in the selected method group as method version 1. If the check box Comment on modification of methods is activated in the Security settings, the window Modification comment method is displayed before the method is saved. 9.6.
PAGE 1569

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6.6 9 How to proceed? Exporting method How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select the desired method from the table or enter a name in the field Method name. 5 Click on the menu item File ▶ Export.... The dialog window Select directory for export opens. 6 Select the directory for the export files.
PAGE 1570

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods The dialog window Select files to import opens. 5 Select desired import files named as 'Method name'.mmet in the desired directory. 6 Click on [OK]. The selected methods are imported in the currently opened method group. 9.6.8 Sign methods How to proceed? Select method 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The window Method manager opens. 3 Select desired Method group. 4 Select desired method.
PAGE 1571

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? The selected method will be signed on level 1. Note Methods can be signed more than once at level 1 and can also be edited and deleted. If the method is edited and saved again, a new version is created and all the signatures will be deleted i.e. the method must be signed again. Signature 2 Note Methods can only be signed at level 2 if the user belongs to a user group with the corresponding authorization (see Chapter 6.2.1.2.3, page 1195).
PAGE 1572

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods The dialog window Method manager opens. 3 In the list box Method group select the desired method group. 4 Select desired method. 5 Click on [History]. The dialog window Method history showing a table with all versions of the selected method is opened. 6 Select desired method that is to be made current. 7 Click on Make [current]. The selected method version is set as the current method version.
PAGE 1573

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6.11 9 How to proceed? Backup methods How to proceed? General Methods are stored in the configuration database and globally accessible for all clients. This means that in order to save methods the configuration data must be saved manually or automatically. A further possible way is to export the methods and then to save these files externally from tiamo. Manual configuration data backup 1 Select program part Configuration. 2 Click on the menu item File ▶ Backup ▶ Manually.
PAGE 1574

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.6 Methods 3 Activate the Automatic backup check box. 4 Enter an interval for backup monitoring in the field Interval or a date for the next backup in the field Next backup. 5 In the field Backup directory select a directory for the backup. 6 Click on [OK]. The dialog window Backup configuration data automatically is closed. Exporting methods 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or menu item File ▶ Method manager…. The dialog window Method manager opens.
PAGE 1575

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9.7 Method groups 9.7.1 Creating method group How to proceed? 1 Select program part Method. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Method groups.... The dialog window Method groups opens. 3 Click on [New]. The dialog window Properties - Method group - New Group opens. 4 On the tab General in the field Name, enter a new name for the method group and in the field Comment enter a comment.
PAGE 1576

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.8 Sample tables 4 Click on [Delete]. The selected method group is deleted. 5 Confirm deleting with [OK]. 9.8 Sample tables 9.8.1 Create sample table How to proceed? 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 Click on the symbol table ▶ New…. or the menu item Tools ▶ Sample The dialog window Sample table 'New sample table with an empty sample table opens. 3 Click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Properties.... The dialog window Properties - Sample table 'New sample table' opens.
PAGE 1577

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9 Repeat step 6 for each desired determination. 10 Click on [Close]. The dialog window Edit line - Sample table 'New sample table' is closed. 11 In the dialog window Sample table 'New sample table' click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Save as.... The dialog window Save sample table opens. 12 In the field Name enter the desired name. 13 Click on [Save]. The sample table will be saved under the name that was entered. 9.8.
PAGE 1578

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.8 Sample tables 9 Click on the menu item Edit ▶ Edit line in the dialog window Sample table. The dialog window Edit line opens. 10 Select Method from the desired method group, enter Sample data and click on [Apply]. The sample data entered will be applied in the respective line of the sample table. 11 Repeat step 8 for each desired determination. 12 Close the dialog window Edit line with [Close]. 13 In the dialog window Sample table click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Save as...
PAGE 1579

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.8.4 9 How to proceed? Edit working sample table How to proceed? 1 Select program part Workplace. 2 In subwindow Run, click on the Determination series tab. 3 If desired, load existing sample table into working sample table. 4 If desired, click on the menu item Sample table ▶ Properties... in the subwindow Run. The dialog window Properties - Determination series opens. 5 Define the properties for the determination series. 6 Click on [OK].
PAGE 1580

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports 14 In the field Name enter a name. 15 Click on [Save]. The working sample table will be saved under the name entered as sample table. 9.9 Reports 9.9.1 Creating report template How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Note A database must be open in order to carry out subsequent steps. Click on the menu item Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ New ▶ Form report… or Tools ▶ Report templates ▶ New ▶ Tabular Report….
PAGE 1581

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 9 Select desired module symbol on the Module bar and place it on the report template by creating a field with the left-hand mouse key. The properties window for the corresponding module opens automatically. 10 Enter desired settings for the module. 11 Click on [OK]. The properties window is closed. 12 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each desired module. 13 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Save as.... The dialog window Save report template opens.
PAGE 1582

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports 7 Close the dialog window with [OK]. 8 In the program window Report template, click on the menu item Tools ▶ Options.... The dialog window Options for report templates opens. 9 Define desired settings for the report template. 10 Close the window with [OK]. Editing existing modules 1 Select the symbol on the module bar and double-click on the desired module in the report template. The properties window of the selected module opens automatically.
PAGE 1583

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9.3 9 How to proceed? Printing determination report How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens. 3 Select desired database or enter name in the field Database name. 4 Click on [Open]. The selected database opens and its data sets are displayed in the Determination overview.
PAGE 1584

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9.9 Reports Note If several reports are produced simultaneously as a PDF file then an index will be automatically appended to the file name. 10 In the dialog window Report output, click on [OK]. The reports of the selected determinations are put out. 9.9.4 Printing determination overview How to proceed? 1 Select program part Database. 2 Click on the symbol or the menu item File ▶ Open.... The dialog window Open database opens.
PAGE 1585

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ 9 How to proceed? 8 Under Orientation, select the option Portrait format or Landscape format. 9 Click on [OK]. The determination overview is opened as PDF file. tiamo 2.
PAGE 1586

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Index Nummern/Symbole 21 CFR 11 ......... 14, 1201, 1202, 1207, 1208 712 Conductometer Overview ........................ 1343 Properties ....................... 1343 730 Sample Changer ............ 1362 Overview ........................ 1362 Properties ....................... 1362 774 Oven Sample Processor Overview ........................ 1368 Properties ....................... 1368 778/789 Sample Processor Devices ........................... 1376 External positions .........
PAGE 1587

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Beaker radius ..... 1325, 1377, 1385, 1395, 1402 Rack parameters ............. 1320 Rack table ...................... 1317 Special beaker ...... 1322, 1323 Beaker sensor ....................... 1325 Rack parameters ............. 1320 Rack table ...................... 1317 Special beaker ................ 1322 Beaker test ........................... 1089 BRC ........................................ 785 Additional evaluations ...... 797 Additional measured values ........................
PAGE 1588

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index DIGITAL OUT .................. 1163 DOS pH .......................... 1047 DOS U ............................ 1062 EMPTY ........................... 1085 ERROR .............................. 427 EXIT ................................. 426 EXPORT .......................... 1126 FLOW ............................. 1108 HEATER .......................... 1106 KFC .................................. 769 KFT Ipol ............................ 728 KFT Upol ..........................
PAGE 1589

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Statistics ........................... 238 Control chart templates Export ............................ 1215 Control parameters 652, 673, 694, 715, 737, 757, 775, 792, 814, 839 Control point .................. 814, 839 Control range 642, 652, 673, 694, 715, 737, 757, 775, 792, 801, 814, 839 Coulometer Overview ........................ 1339 Properties ....................... 1339 Criterion ................................. 454 CSV export ............................. 245 CTRL ..........
PAGE 1590

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Version ........... 322, 327, 1533 Determination overview Column display ................. 277 Data display ..................... 276 Data record selection ........ 280 Filter selection .................. 278 Functions ......................... 281 General ............................ 276 Navigation bar .................. 279 Print ....................... 319, 1568 Printing .......................... 1539 Table navigation ............... 279 Update .....................
PAGE 1591

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Overview ........................ 1168 Digital input Manual Control .............. 1490 DIGITAL OUT ........................ 1163 Command variables ........ 1163 Digital outputs ................ 1165 General .......................... 1164 Overview ........................ 1163 Digital output Manual Control .............. 1492 Division .................................... 48 DOS ..................................... 1042 DOS pH .......................... 1047 DOS U ...................
PAGE 1592

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Parameters for preparing ....................................... 1266 Prepare .......................... 1469 Tubing parameters ......... 1266 Exchange units ..................... 1254 EXIT ....................................... 426 Command variables .......... 426 Exit track ........................ 407, 426 Exponential function ................. 59 Export Audit Trail ...................... 1244 Buffer Data ..................... 1215 Configuration data .......................
PAGE 1593

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Greater than or equal to ........... 55 Group field Group field ....................... 227 H Half neutralization point ......... 854 Half neutralization potential 449, 475, 501, 528, 555, 580, 607, 632, 854 Heater .................................. 1106 HEATER ................................ 1106 Command variables ........ 1106 Overview ........................ 1106 Properties ....................... 1106 Heating time ........................ 1106 Help ..............................
PAGE 1594

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Graphical display ............ 1509 Heater/Gas ..................... 1484 Measure ......................... 1486 ProcessLab functions ...... 1490 Pump ............................. 1483 Remote functions ........... 1475 Stirring ........................... 1473 Maximum evaluation 449, 475, 501, 528, 555, 580, 607, 632, 660, 681, 702, 723, 745, 765, 856, 869, 881, 894, 907, 919, 927, 946, 967 MEAS ..................................... 860 MEAS Conc ......................
PAGE 1595

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Messages ..................... 168, 1160 MET ....................................... 536 Evaluation ........................ 536 MET Ipol ........................... 589 MET pH ............................ 537 MET U .............................. 563 MET Upol ......................... 615 Overview .......................... 536 Method Backup ................. 1519, 1557 Cancel command ............. 166 Check ............................... 385 Close ..............................
PAGE 1596

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Line .................................. 229 Module bar ...................... 206 Number of pages ............. 224 Page number .................... 223 Rectangle ......................... 231 Text field .......................... 216 Time field ......................... 221 Toolbar ............................ 206 Molar mass calculator ............... 78 Monitor Audit Trail ...................... 1247 Monitored dosing ................. 1043 Monitoring Calibration data ........
PAGE 1597

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Overview ............................ 11 Workplace .................... 12, 82 Program versions ........................ 7 PSE ........................................... 78 Pulse length ......................... 1225 Pump ................................... 1099 PUMP ................................... 1098 Command variables ........ 1098 Overview ........................ 1098 Properties ....................... 1099 Q Quick access ............... 1185, 1187 Quick filter Audit Trail .
PAGE 1598

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index Result ................................... 1116 Assignment .................... 1116 Decimal places ............... 1116 Definition ....................... 1116 Description ..................... 1116 Formula .......................... 1116 Formula assistant ............ 1115 Monitoring ..................... 1118 Name ............................. 1116 New result ...................... 1114 Options .......................... 1120 Save as Common variable .........................
PAGE 1599

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Limits ............................. 1289 Monitoring ........... 1282, 1289 Parameter ...................... 1282 Print list of sensors .......... 1281 Sensor information ........... 333 Sensor selection 435, 461, 487, 514, 541, 567, 593, 619, 646, 667, 688, 709, 731, 752, 772, 788, 808, 833, 863, 875, 888, 901, 914, 931, 940, 972, 979, 987, 1013, 1020, 1025, 1050, 1065 Sensor table ................... 1278 Slope .............................. 1285 Standard sensors ............
PAGE 1600

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index 979, 987, 1037, 1050, 1065, 1078 Solution table ................. 1255 Subwindow .................... 1254 Titer ............................... 1261 Titer history .................... 1263 Special beaker ............ 1322, 1480 Parameters ..................... 1323 Properties ....................... 1325 Special filter Audit Trail ...................... 1240 Determinations overview . . 286 Special position .......... 1325, 1480 Lift position ....................
PAGE 1601

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Stop measured value 444, 471, 497, 524, 551, 576, 603, 628, 865, 878, 890, 903, 916, 927, 933, 942, 991 Stop rate ........................ 818, 844 Stop temperature ...................
PAGE 1602

￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭￭ Index SERIES START .................... 424 START .............................. 413 TRACK .............................. 423 Track display .......................... 415 Tracks Interrupt ......................... 1160 Live display ....................... 166 Main track ........................ 403 TRANSFER ............................ 1140 Command variables ........ 1140 Overview ........................ 1140 Properties ....................... 1141 Regular expression .........